WO2015123379A1 - Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy - Google Patents

Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2015123379A1
WO2015123379A1 PCT/US2015/015547 US2015015547W WO2015123379A1 WO 2015123379 A1 WO2015123379 A1 WO 2015123379A1 US 2015015547 W US2015015547 W US 2015015547W WO 2015123379 A1 WO2015123379 A1 WO 2015123379A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
frequency
current
led
digital
phototherapy
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2015/015547
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Richard K. Williams
Keng Hung LIN
Daniel Schell
Joseph P. LEAHY
Original Assignee
Applied Biophotonics Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Applied Biophotonics Ltd. filed Critical Applied Biophotonics Ltd.
Priority to CN201580019372.1A priority Critical patent/CN106687175B/en
Priority to EP15749448.5A priority patent/EP3104936B1/en
Priority to RU2016136821A priority patent/RU2709115C2/en
Priority to KR1020167025565A priority patent/KR102156468B1/en
Priority to JP2016569560A priority patent/JP6659587B2/en
Publication of WO2015123379A1 publication Critical patent/WO2015123379A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B2017/00017Electrical control of surgical instruments
    • A61B2017/00137Details of operation mode
    • A61B2017/00154Details of operation mode pulsed
    • A61B2017/00159Pulse shapes
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/0626Monitoring, verifying, controlling systems and methods
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/0626Monitoring, verifying, controlling systems and methods
    • A61N2005/0629Sequential activation of light sources
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61NELECTROTHERAPY; MAGNETOTHERAPY; RADIATION THERAPY; ULTRASOUND THERAPY
    • A61N5/00Radiation therapy
    • A61N5/06Radiation therapy using light
    • A61N2005/065Light sources therefor
    • A61N2005/0651Diodes
    • A61N2005/0652Arrays of diodes

Definitions

  • This Invention relates to biotechnology for medical applications, including photobiomodulation, phototherapy, and bioresonance.
  • Biophotonics is the biomedical field- relating to the electronic control of photons, i.e. light, and its interaction with living cells and tissue. Biophotonics includes surgery, imaging, biometrics, disease detection, and phototherapy.
  • Phototherapy is the controiled application of light photons, typically infrared, visible and ultraviolet light for medically therapeutic purposes including combating injury, disease, and immune system distress. More specifically, phototherapy involves subjecting cells and tissue undergoing treatment to a stream of photon of specific wavelengths of light either continuously or in repeated discontinuous pulses to control the energy transfer and absorption behavior of Hying cells and tissue,
  • Such harmonic behavior is analogous to the design of a piano and its keyboard, where doubling or halving a frequency is musically equivalent to the same note one octave, i.e. eight whole tones, higher or lower than the original.
  • the reported benefit o f "even" harmonics is consistent with mathematical analysis of physical systems showing even-harmonics couple energy more efficiently, and behave more predictably than circuits or systems exhibiting odd harmonics.
  • LT Light therapy
  • SCI spinal cord injury
  • PW pulsed wave
  • the rats were transcutai eously irradiated within 15 minutes of S'Cl surgery with an 808n ni (infrared) diode laser for 50 minutes daily and thereafter for 14 consecutive days.
  • 808n ni (infrared) diode laser for 50 minutes daily and thereafter for 14 consecutive days.
  • the authors reported; "in conclusion, CW and pulsed laser light support axonal regeneration and functional recovery after SCL Pulsed laser light has the potential to support axonal regrowth to spinal cord segments located farther from the lesion site. Therefore, the use of pulsed light is a promising non-invasive therapy for SCI"
  • LEDs digitally pulsed light-emitting diodes
  • Figure 1 Illustrates elements of a phototherapy system capable of continuous or pulsed light operation including an LED drive 1 controlling and driving LEDs as a source of photons 3 emanating from LED pad 2 on tissue 5 for the patient
  • an LED drive 1 controlling and driving LEDs as a source of photons 3 emanating from LED pad 2 on tissue 5 for the patient
  • tissue 5 a human brain is shown as tissue 5, any organ, tissue or physiological system may be treated using phototherapy.
  • doctor or clinician 7 ma adjust the treatment by controlling the settings of LED driver 1 in accordance with monitor observations,
  • photonics logical process 22 involves a photon 23 impinging, among others, a molecule cytochrorne-c oxidase (CCO) 24, which acts as a battery charger increasing the cellular energy content by transforming adenosine monophosphate (AMP) into a higher energy molecule adenosine diphosphate (ADP), and converting ADP into an even higher energy molecule adenosine triphosphate (ATP), in the process of increasing stored energy in the AMP to ADP to ATP, charging sequence 25, eytoehrome-c oxidase 24 acts similar to that of a battery charger with ATP 26 acting as a cellular battery storing energy, a process which could be considered animal "photosynthesis”. Cytochrome-c oxidase 24 is also capable of converting energy from glucose resulting from digestion of food to fuel in the ATP charging sequence 25, or through a combination of digestion and photosynthesis.
  • CCO molecule cytochrorne-c oxidase
  • ATP 26 is able to release energy 29 through an ATP-to-ADP-to-A discharging process 28.
  • Energ 29 is then used to drive protein synthesis including the formation of catalysts, enzymes, DMA polymerase, and other biomolecules.
  • cytochrome-c oxidase 24 is a scavenger for nitric oxide (NO) 27, an important signaling molecule in neuron communication and angiogenesis, the growth of new arteries and capillaries.
  • NO nitric oxide
  • cytochrome-c oxidase 24 in cells treated during phototherapy releases NO 27 in the vicinity of injured or infected tissue, increasing blood flow and oxygen delivery to the treated tissue, accelerating healing, tissue repair, and immune response.
  • EM electromagnetic radiation
  • Figure 3 shows the relative absorption coefficient of oxygenated hemoglobin (curve 44a), cleoxygenated hemoglobin (curve 44b), cytochrome c (curves 41a, 41b), water (curve 42) and fats and lipids (curve 43) as a function of the wavelength of the light.
  • deoxygenated hemog!obin curve 44b
  • oxygenated hemoglobin i.e.
  • curve 44a strongly absorb light in the red portion of the visible spectrum , especially for wavelengths shorter than 650 nra, At longer wavelengths in the infrared portion of the spectrum, i.e. above 950 nm, EMR is absorbed by water (H2O ⁇ (curve 42], At wavelengths between 650 nm to 950 nm, human tissue is essentially transparent as illustrated by transparent optical window 45.
  • EMR comprising photons 23 of wavelengths ⁇ within in transparent opti cal window 45
  • cytochrome-c oxidase Curves 41aa, 41b
  • cytochrome-c oxidase 24 absorbs the infrared portion of the spectrum represented by curve 41b unimpeded by water or blood
  • a secondary absorption tail for cytochrome-c oxidase (curve 41a) illuminated by light in the red portion of the visible spectrum is partially blocked by the absorption properties of deoxygenated hemoglobin (curve 44b), limiting any photobioiogicai response for deep tissue but still activated in epithelial tissue and ceils.
  • Figure 3 thus shows that phototherapy for skin and internal organs and tissue requires different treatments and light wavelengths, red for skin and infrared for internal tissue and organs,
  • the lamps must be run very hot to achieve the requ ired photon flux to achieve an efficient therapy in reasonable treatment durations.
  • Unfiitered lamps like the sun, actually deliver too broad of a spectrum and limit the efficacy of the photons by simultaneously stimulating both beneficial and unwanted chemical reactions, some involving harmful rays, especially in the ultraviolet portion of the electromagnetic spectrum.
  • lasers have been and continue to be employed to perform phototherapy. Like lamps, lasers risk burning a patient, not through heat, by exposing tissue to intense concentrated optical power. To prevent that problem, special care must be taken that laser light is limited in its power output and that undu Sy high current producing dangerous light levels cannot accidentally occur. A second, more practical problem arises from a laser's small "spot size", the
  • the optical spectrum of a laser is too narrow to fully excite a il the beneficial chemical and molecular transitions needed for to achieve high efficacy phototherapy
  • the limited spectrum of a laser typically a range of ⁇ 3nm around the laser's center wavelength value, makes it difficult to properly excite all the beneficial chemical reactions needed in phototherapy, It is difficult to cover a range of frequencies with a narrow bandwidth optical source.
  • LEDs are commercially available for emitting a wide range of light spectra from the deep infrared through the ultraviolet portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. With bandwidths of ⁇ 30nm to ⁇ 40nm, it is much easier to cover the desired spectrum with center frequencies located in the red, the long red, the short near infrared (N.i.R) and the mid 3 S R portions of the spectrum, e.g. 670nm, ?5G nm, 825nra, and 9O0nm,
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a preferred solution to light delivery problem is to employ a flexible LED pad, one that curves to a patients body as shown in pictograph 59.
  • flexible LED pad 50 is intentionally bent to fit a body appendage, in this case leg comprising tissue 61, and pulled taught by Veicro strap 57.
  • flexible LED pad 50 includes Veicro strips 58 glued to its surface, in use, Veicro strap 57 wrapped around the pad attaches to the Veicro strips 58 holding flexible LED pad 50 firmly in position conforming to a patient's leg, arm, neck, back, shoulder, knee, or any other appendage or bod part comprising tissue 61.
  • the resulting benefit also shown in Figure 4 illustrates that the resulting light penetration depth 63 into subdermal tissue 62 from LEDs 52 comprising flexible pad 50 is perfectly uniform along the lateral extent of the tissue being treated, Unlike devices where the light source is a stiff LED wand or inflexible LED panel held above the tissue being treated, in this example the flexible LED pad 50 comes in contact with the patient's skin, i.e. epithelial 61.
  • a disposable aseptic sanitation barrier 51 typically a clear hypoallergenic biocompatible plastic layer, is inserted between light pad SO and the tissue 62, Close contact betwee the LEDs 52 and the tissue 50 is essential to maintain consistent illumination for durations of 20 minutes to over 1 hour, an interval too long to hold a device in place manually. This is one reason handheld LED devices and gadgets, including brushes, combs, wand, and torchlights, have been shown to offer little or no medical benefit for
  • a prior art phototherap system for controlled light delivery available today and shown in the pictograph of Figure 5 comprises an electronic driver 70 connected to one or more sets of flexible LED pads 71a-71e through cables 72a and 72b and connected to one other through short electrical connectors 73a-7 d.
  • one electrical output of electronic LED driver 70 is connected to center flexible LSD pad 71a by electrical cable 72a, which is in turn connected to associated side fiexibie LED pads 71b and 71c through electrical connectors 73a and 73b, respectively
  • a second set of LBDs pads connected to a second eiectricai output of electronic driver 70 is connected to center flexible LE D pad 71c by electrical cable 72b, which is in turn connected to associated side flexible LED pads 91d and 91e through electrical connectors 73c and 73d, respectively, located o the edge of LED pad 71c perpendicular to the edge where eiectricai cable 72b attaches.
  • Figure 6A illustrates a view of the improved flexible LED pad set, which virtually eliminates all discrete wires and any wires soldered directly into PCBs within the LED pads (except for those associated with center cable 82) while enabling significantly greater flexibility in positioning and arranging the flexible LED pads upon a patient undergoing phototherapy.
  • the LED pad set includes three flexible LED pads comprising center flexible LED pad 80a with associated electrical cable 82, and two side flexible LED pads 80b and 80c. All three LED pads 80a-80c include two connector sockets 84 fo connecting pad-to-pad cables 85a and 85b. Although connector socket 84 is not visible in this perspective drawing as shown, Its presence is easily Identified by the hump 86 in the polymeric flexible LED pad 80b, and similarly in flexible LED pads 80a and 80c, Pad-to-pad cables 85a and 85b electrically connect center LED pad 80a to LED pads 80b and 80c, respectively,
  • USB connector cables 85a and 85b are capable of reliabl conducting up to 1A of current and avoid excessive voltage drops or eleetromigratlon failures during extended use, Aside from USB cables, other connector and cable set options include min-USB, lEEE-1394, and others.
  • an 8-pin rectangular USB connector format was chosen for Its durability, strength, and ubiquity,
  • center flexible LED pad BOa is rectangular and includes a strain relief 81 for connecting to cable 82 and two USB sockets 84, al l located on the same edge of center LED pad 80a,. shown as the pad edge parallel to the x-axis.
  • each of side LED pads 80b and SOcis also rectangular and includes two USB sockets also located on the same edge.
  • This connection scheme is markedly different from the prior art device shown in Figure 5, where the connector sockets are proprietary and l ocated on edges of the LED pads71a-71e and 71c-71e that face one another.
  • the flexible LED pads may be placed far apart, for example across the shoulder and down the arm, or grouped with two pads positioned closely and the third part positioned farther away.
  • the pads With electrical shielding in cables 85a and 85b, the pads may be positioned far apart without suffering noise sensitivity plaguing the prior art. solutions shown previously.
  • FIG. 6A also makes it easy for a clinician to position the flexible LED pads 80a-8Qc, bend them to fit to the patient's body, e.g. around the stomach and kidneys, and then secure the pads 80a-80c by Velcro belt 93 attaching to Velcro straps 92 attached firmly to the LEI) pads 80a-30c,
  • the bending of the individual flexible LED pad 80a-8Oc and the Velcro belt 93 binding them together is illustrated in Figure 6B, where the belt 93 and the pads 80a-80c are bent to fit ar und a curved surface with curvature in the direction of the x-axis.
  • no rigid F f CB oriented parallel to the x-axis can be embedded within any of the LED pads 80a-80c.
  • center LED pad 80a cable 82 and an )45 connector 83 are used to electrically connect the LED pads 80a-80c to the LED controller in order to preserve and maintain backward compatibility with existing LED controllers operating In clinics and hospitals today. If an adapter for converting j45 connector 83 to a USB connector is included, flexible LED pad 80a may be modified to eliminate cable 82 and strain relief 81, instead replacing the center connection with a third USB socket 84 and replacing cable 82 with another USB cable similar to USB cable 85a but typically longer in length.
  • one such advanced electronic drive system adapted from LED TV drive circuitry employs individual channel current control to insure that the current in every LED string is matched regardless of LED forward conduction voltages.
  • current sinks 96a, 96b, ... , 96n are coupled to power N LED strings 97a, 97b, 97N, respectively, acting as switched constant current devices having programmable currents when the are conducting and the ability to turn on and off an individual cha nnei or combination thereof dynamically under control of digital signals 98a, 98b, ,., , 98N respectively.
  • the number N can be any number of channels that are practical
  • controlled current in current sink 96a is set relative to a reference current 99 at a magnitude Iref and maintained by a feedback circuit monitoring and adj usting the circuit biases accordingly in order to maintain current keoa in the string of M series-connected LEDs 7a.
  • the number can be any number of LEDs that are practical
  • the current control feedback is represented symbolically by a loop and associated arrow feeding back into current sink 96a.
  • the digital enable signals are then used to "cho p" or pulse the LBD current on and off at a controlled duty factor and, as disclosed in the above-referenced U.S. patent Application No. 14/073,371, also at varying pulse frequencies.
  • An LED controller 103 is powered by low-dropout (LDO) linear regulator 102 and instructed by microcontroller 104 through a SPI digital interface 105.
  • a switch mode power supply 100 powers LED strings 97a-97N at a high voltage +3 ⁇ 4ED which may be fixed or varied dynamically.
  • the resulting waveforms, and PWM control are essentially digital waveforms, i.e. a string of sequential pulses as shown in Figure 8A, controlling the average LED brightness and setting the excitation frequency by adjusting the repetition rate and LED on-times.
  • a string of clock pulses is used to generate a sequential waveform of LED light, which may comprise different wavelength LEDs of wavelengths A a , Ah, and Ac, each illuminated at different times and different durations.
  • a pulse generator within LED controller 103 generates clock pulses at intervals Ta and a counter located within LED controller 103 associated with generating the waveform 111 counts 9 clock pulses and then turns on the specific channel's current sink and As LED string for a duration of 4 pulses before turning it off again.
  • a second counter also within LED controller 103, turns on the > channel immediately after one clock pulse for a duration of 8 clock pulses, and then turns the channel's LED string off for a duration of 4 clock pulses (while the ⁇ » LED string is on) and then turns the Ab LED string on again for another 3 clock pulses thereafter.
  • a third counter in LED controller 103 waits 22 pulses before turning on the A e LED string for a duration of 4installes then off again,
  • h LED string conducts for a duration ⁇ (8 clock pulses), then i LED string conducts for a duration ⁇ -.2 (4 clock pulses), then when it turns off ⁇ > LED string conducts for a duration A (3 clock pulses), waiting for a duration ⁇ when no LED string is conducting, and followed by ⁇ ,- LED string conducting for a duration Ats ( clockinstalles).
  • the timing diagrams 110-113 illustrate the flexibilit of the new control system in varying the LED wavelength and the excitation pattern frequency
  • the improved LED system allows precise control of the duration of each light pulse emitted by each of LED strings ..gov Ab and Ac.
  • biological systems such as living cells can not respond to single sub-second pulses of light, so instead one pattern comprising a single wavelength and a single pattern frequency of pulses is repeated for long durations before switching to another LED wa velength and excitation pattern frequency.
  • a more realistic LED excitation pattern is shown in Figure 8B, where the same clock signal (waveform 110) is used to synthesize, i.e. generate, a fixed frequency excitation pattern 116 of a single Aa wavelength light with an synthesized pattern frequency of f sy nt , where
  • time Te is the time interval at which successive clock pulses are generated
  • n is the number of clock pulses in each period of the synthesized waveform.
  • the synthesized pattern frequency changes from f &Y n ⁇ 1/nTe to a higher frequency fsy»&2 - 1/mTe, m being less than n, So at time b, the synthesized frequency increases from l 3 ⁇ 4i to fsyntta, even though the duty factor (50%) and LED brightness stay constant.
  • the i mproved LED dri ve system allows the controlled sequencing of arbitrary pulse strings of multiple and va rying wavelength LEDs with control over the brightness and the duration and digital repetition rate, i.e. the excitation or pattern frequency.
  • the pattern frequency h y is not the LED's light frequency.
  • the light's frequency as shown is referred to by the Greek letter nu or V and not by the small letter f or S yn3 ⁇ 4.
  • the light's electromagnetic freq uency is equal to hundreds of a THz (i.e. tera-Hz) while the synthesized pattern frequency of the digita l pulses fsyi si is general in the audio or "sonic" range (an d at most in the ultrasound range ⁇ i.e. below 1 OOkHz, at least nine orders-of-magnitude lower.
  • the pulse rate or excitatio pattern frequency shall only be described as a frequency and not by a wavelength
  • the intensity of light used in phototherapy is varied gradually and repeatedly with regular periodicity rather than being administered as a series of square-wave pulses that are either ON or OFF.
  • the light is generated by strings of light-emitting diodes (LEDs), but in other embodiments other types of light sources, such as semiconductor lasers, may be used.
  • the light is sometimes varied in accordance with a single frequency sinusoidal function, or a "chord" having two or more sine waves as components, but it will become apparent that the techniques described herein can be employed to generate an infinite variety of intensity patterns and funct ons.
  • the intensity of light emitted by a stri ng of LE Ds is varied by analogically control ling the gate voltage of a current-sink MOSFET connected in series with the LEDs,
  • a gate driver compares the current i the LED string against a sinusoidal reference voltage, and the gate voltage of the current-sink MOSFET is automatically adjusted b circuitry within the MOSFET driver until the LED and reference currents match and the LED current is at is desired value. I this way, the LED current mimics the sinusoidal reference current.
  • the sinusoidal reference current can be generated in a variety of ways; for example, with an LC or C oscillator, a Wien bridge oscillator or a twin T oscillator.
  • the gate voltage of the current-sink MOSFET is varied using a digital-to-analog (D/A) converter.
  • the D/A converter is supplied with a series of digital values that represent the values of a sine wave at predetermined i nstants of time, e. g. 24 values in a full 360 s cycle.
  • the digital values may represent not only a sine wave but also may be generated by o from a CD or DVD,
  • the LED current is controlled digitally, preferably using pulse-width modulation (PWM).
  • PWM pulse-width modulation
  • a sine wave is broken down into a series of digi tal values that represent i ts level at particular intervals of time. These intervals are referred to herei as having a duration sync, A pulse is generated for each T «>-nc interval, its width representing the value of the sine wave in that interval.
  • each Tsync interval is further broken down into a number of smaller intervals (each having a duration referred to herein as T&) , and the gate of the current-sink MOSFET is controlled such that the LED current is allowed to flow during a number of these smaller Te intervals that represent the value of the sine wave.
  • T& duration referred to herein as the duration referred to herein as the current-sink MOSFET
  • the current-sink MOSFET is turned ON for part of each sync interval and turned OFF during the remainder of each Tsync interval.
  • the level of the LED current is c eraged (smoothed out) into th e form of a s i ne wave.
  • the gate of the current-sink MOSFET may he controlled by a precision gate bias and control circuit that receives reference current from a reference current source and an enable signal from a digital synthesizer.
  • the digital synthesizer contains a counte that is set to a number representative of the number of small To intervals during which the current-sink MOSFET is to be turned ON, The current- sink MOSFET is turned ON, and the counter counts down to zero. When the counter reaches zero, the current-sink MOSFET is turned OFF.
  • the current-sink MOSFET remains OFF for a number of ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4 intervals equal to the total number of Te intervals in a Tsync: interval less the number of Te intervals during which the current-sink MOSFET was tu rned on,
  • Controlling the LEDs in accordance with a sinusoidal function eliminates the harmonics that are produced when the LEDs are pulsed ON and OFF according to a square wave function, many of which ma fall within the "audible" spectrum
  • the frequencies of the smaller intervals used in producing the sinusoidal function (1/ ' I - and 1/ Te) can typically be set at above 20,000 Hz, where they generally have little effect on phototherap treatments,
  • Chords containing multiple sinusoidal functions may he generated by adding the values of the component sine waves together.
  • the sine waves may be added together with an analog mixer, or a chord may be generated using a polyphonic analog audio source in lieu of an oscillator.
  • the numerical values representing the component since waves may be added together using an arithmetic logic unit (ALU).
  • ALU arithmetic logic unit
  • Another way of creating a chord is to combine an analog synthesized waveform with a second digital pulse frequenc by "strobing" the analog waveform ON and OFF at a strobe frequency.
  • the strobe frequency may be either higher or lower than the frequency of the analog waveform.
  • the strobe pulse may be generated by feeding an analog sine wave to a divide by 2, or 8 counter to produce a second waveform 1, 2 or 3 octaves above the analog sine wave, respectively,
  • An advantage of using a D/A converter to generate an analog voltage or using the digital technique is that treatment sequences (e.g., for particular organs or tissues) may be stored digitally in a memory (e.g., an EPROM) for convenient retrieval and use by a doctor or other clinician,
  • a memory e.g., an EPROM
  • Fig. 1 is a simplified pictorial representation of a phototherapy treatment
  • Fig. 2 is a simplified pictorial representation of photobiomoduiation of cellular mitochondria
  • Fig. 3 is a graph showing the absorption spectra of cytochrome-c (CCO), blood (lib), water and lipids,
  • Fig. 4 is a photographic example and schematic representation of a LED pad being used in a phototherapy treatment
  • Fig. 5 is a view of a pho totherapy system comprising a controller and six flexible polymeric LED pads.
  • Fig. 6A is a schematic representation of a set of three flexible polymeric LED pads connected together and attached to a Ve! ro strap.
  • Fig. 6B is a schematic representation of the set of flexible polymeric LED pads shown in Fig, 6A, bent slightly to conform to a patient's body,
  • Fig. 7 is an electrical schematic diagram of a current controlled LED pulsed phototherapy system.
  • Fig. 8A is an exemplary timing diagram, showing the sequential pulsed excitation of multiple wavelength LEDs with varying durations.
  • Fig. 8B is an exemplary timing diagram, showing the sequential pulsed excitation of multiple wavelength LEDs with various combinations of duty factor and frequency.
  • Fig. 9A illustrates the time domain and Fourier frequency domain
  • Fig, 9B iliustrates a discrete Fourier transform representation using varying numbers of summed sine waves.
  • Fig, 9C illustrates the measured current harmonic con tent of a digitally pulsed power supply.
  • Fig, 9D illustrates a measured Fourier spectrum of amplitude harmonics.
  • Fig, 9E illustrates a Fourier transform of a limited time sample of a measured amplitude data revealing the frequenc "spurs" resulting from the short duration sample.
  • Fig, 9F illustrates the magnitude of odd and even harmonics and the cumulative energy over the spectrum of a continuous Fourier transform of a digital (square wave) pulse.
  • Fig, 10 illustrates a graph of the frequency response of an oscillatory system having two resonant frequencies.
  • Fig. 11 illustrates the summation of two synchronized digital pulses of varying freqiie n ey ,
  • Fig, 12A illustrates a graph of spectral content of a 292 Hz digital pulse contaminating the audi spectrum to that of idealized octaves of D4 in the same range
  • Fig, 12B illustrates a graph showing that the spectral content of a 4,671Hz digital pulse mostly contaminates the ultrasonic spectrum
  • Fig. 13 iliustrates various physical mechanisms of photobiomodulation
  • Fig. 14 illustrates two equivalent circuits of a singie channel LED driver with current control.
  • Fig. 15 iliustrates various example combinations of reference current and enable signals and the resulting LED current waveforms.
  • Fig. 16A schematically illustrates the problem of current sharing among multiple loads from a single reference current
  • Fig. 16B schematically illustrates the use of transconductance amplifiers for distributing a reference current among multiple loads.
  • Fig, 16C schematscaily illustrates one implementation of a controlled current sink comprising a high voltage MOSPKT and MOSFBT driver circuit with resistor trimming.
  • Fig, 16D schematicall iilustrates one implementation of a controlled current sink comprising a high voltage MQSFET and MOSFKT driver circuit with MOSFET trimming.
  • Fig, 17A schematically represents the use of a fixed-value voltage source to generate an oscillating current reference
  • Fig, 17B schematica lly represents the use of a adjustable voltage source to generate an oscillating reference curre t
  • Fig, 17C schematically represents a frequenc and voltage adjustable voltage source comprising a ien-bridge used to generate an oscillating reference current.
  • Fig, 17D schematically represents a programmable level shift circuit using a resistor ladder
  • ISA schematically represents an implementation of a single-channel current-controlled LED driver using a D/A converter to generate a reference current
  • Fig. 18B schematically represents an implementation of a D/A converter using a resistor lad der .
  • Fig. 19A illustrates a 292 Hz sine wave synthesized from a D/A converter.
  • Fig. 19B iilustrates the harmonic spectra of 292Hz sine wave synthesized using a D/A converter generated reference current,
  • Fig. 19C illustrates an expanded view of digital steps present in a 292Hz sine wave synthesized from a D/A converter generated reference current
  • Fig. 19C Illustrates an expanded view of digital steps present in a 18,25 Hz sine wave synthesized from a D/A converter generated reference current.
  • Fig. 19D illustrates a portion of a 18.25Hz sine wave comprising a seq uence of voltage changes occurring at a clock frequency of a D/A converter
  • Fig. 19E Illustrates the harmonic spectra of a 18.25Hz sine wave synthesized using a D/A converter generated reference current
  • Fig. 20 illustrates various combinations of sinusoidal reference currents and resulting LED current waveforms.
  • Fig, 21 iilustrates the sum of two sinusoidal waveforms and the resulting waveform.
  • Fig, 22A schematically illustrates the use of an analog mixer to generate a polyphonic oscillatory reference current for phototherapy LED drive.
  • Fig, 22 B schematically represents the use of an analog audio source to generate a polyphonic reference current for a phototherapy LED drive.
  • Fig, 22C schematically represents the use of a digital audio source to generate a polyphonic reference current for a phototherapy LED drive.
  • Fig, 2 A iilustrates the synthesized polyphonic waveform generated from a sinusoidal reference current and a higher frequency digitalinstalle.
  • Fig, 23 B iilustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 292Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 4,672Hz digital pulse.
  • Fig, 23C illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from 292 Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 9,344Hz digital pulse.
  • Fig, 23 D illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 292Hz sinusoidal reference current and an ultrasonic digital pulse
  • Fig, 23E illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 292Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 18,688Hz digital pulse
  • Fig. 24 iilustrate the synthesized polyphonic waveform generated from a sinusoidal reference current and a lower frequency digital pulse
  • Fig, 25A illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 9,344Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 4,672Hz digital pulse
  • Fig, 258 illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 584Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 292H3 ⁇ 4 digital pulse.
  • Fig. 26 schematicaily illustrates implementation of a poly phonic LED current drive for phototherapy from a single oscillator
  • Fig. 27A schematically illustrates multiple digital synthesizers controlling mutlipie corresponding LED drivers.
  • Fig, 27B schematically illustrates a centralized digital synthesizer separately controlling multiple LED drivers.
  • Fig, 27C schematically il iustrates a single digital synthesizer controlling multiple LED drivers with a common signal.
  • Fig, 28A illustrates a circuit diagram of a digital synthesizer.
  • Fig, 28B is a timing diagram of digital synthes izer operation.
  • Fig, 28C illustrates synthesized pulses of a fixed frequency and varying duty factor.
  • Fig, 29A illustrates an LED drive waveform comprising a fixed frequency PW synthesized sinusoid.
  • Fig, 29B illustrates examples of digitally synthesized sinusoids
  • Fig, 29C illustrates a comparison of the output waveforms of a D/A converter versus PWM control over a single time interval.
  • Fig. 290 graphically illustrates interrelationship between PWM hit resolution, the number of time intervals, and the maximum frequency being synthesized to the required counter clock frequency.
  • Fig, 30 schematically illustrates a clock generator circuit
  • Fig. 31 graphically illustrates the dependence of overall digital synthesis resolution and PWM bit resolution on the maximum frequency being synthesized
  • Fig. 32A illustrates the frequency spectrum of a d igitally synthesized
  • Fig. 32B illustrates the frequency spectrum of a digitally synthesized 292Hz sinusoid
  • Fig. 32C graphically illustrates the dependence of the Sync and PWM counter frequencies on the synthesized frequency.
  • Fig. 33 illustrate a flow chart of sinusoidal waveform generation using the disclosed digital synthesis methods.
  • Fig. 34A graphically illustrates digital synthesis of a 292 Hz (D4) sine wave using 15° intervals.
  • Fig. 34B graphicall illustrates digital synthesis of a 292Hz (D4) sine wave using 20° intervals.
  • Fig, 34C graphically iilustrates the PWM intervals used in the digital synthesis of a 292 Hz (D4) sine wave using 20° intervals.
  • Fig, 34D graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168 Hz (D6) sin e wave using 20° intervals
  • Fig, 34E graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 4,672Hz (D6) sine wave using 20° intervals
  • FIG. 3S A graphically il lustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz £D6) si ne wave with a 50% amplitude
  • Fig, 35B graphically iilustrates the digital synthesis of 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave with a 50% amplitude offset by +25%.
  • Fig, 3SC graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz (06) sine wave with a 20% amplitude offset by +60%.
  • Fig, 3SD il lustrates the frequency spectrum of a digitally synthesized 1,168Hz (D63 sinusoid with a 20% amplitude offset by +60%,
  • Fig, 36 graphicall illustrates the digital synthesis of 4 ⁇ cycles of a 4,472Hz (1)8) sine wave using 20° intervals
  • Fig, 37A graph ically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave using 4X oversampling
  • Fig, 37B iilustrates the pattern file for the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave using 4X oversampling
  • Fig. 38 graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a chord of 4,472Hz (08) and 1, 1672Hz (D6) sinusoids of equal amplitude.
  • Fig, 39 iilustrates the frequency spectrum of digitally synthesized chord of 4,472Hz ⁇ 08 ⁇ and 1,1672Hz (D6) sinusoids of equal amplitude.
  • Fig, 40 graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a chord of 4,472Hz (D8) and 1, 1672Hz (136) sinusoids of differing amplitudes.
  • Fig. 41 illustrates an algorithm for generating a synthesis pattern file
  • Fig. 42A illustrates an algorithm for generating chords of two or more sinusoids in real time or in advance for storage in a pattern library.
  • Fig, 42B illustrates an alternative way of creating chords utilizing the algorithm described in Fig, 41 to generate individual sinusoidal pattern files with normalized mathematical functions.
  • Fig, 43 illustrates sinusoids of frequencies that are integral multiples of one another.
  • Fig, 44 illustrates sinusoids of frequencies that are fractional multiples of one another.
  • Fig, 45 illustrates the use of mirror phase symmetry to generate a chord consisting of sinusoids whose frequencies have a ratio of 11.5.
  • Fig, 46 illustrates the use of an interpolated gap fill to generate a chord consisting of sinusoids aving frequencies that are in an irregular ratio (1.873) to one another.
  • Fig, 47 illustrates generating a sinusoid using PWM while varying the reference current ahet
  • Fig, 48 illustrates how a prior art digital pulse circuit used to drive LED strings may he repurposed for the synthesis of sinusoidal waveforms
  • Fig, 49 illustrates various physiological structures and conditions that may be amenable to treatment with phototherapy, as a function of the amplitude, frequency and DC component of the sinusoidal current used to illuminate the Li: Us. Description of the Invention
  • a continuous Fourier transform refers to the transform of a contin uous real argument into a continuous frequency distribution or vice versa. Theoretically, the continuous Fourier transform's ability to convert a time varying waveform into the precise frequency domain equivalent, requires summing an infinite number of sine waves of varying frequency and sampling the time dependent waveform for an infinite period of time.
  • the fundamental pulse frequency is at 150Hz and has an amplitude of 1.2A
  • the fundamental frequency is accompanied by a series of harmonics at 450Hz, 750H3 ⁇ 4 1050Hz, a nd 1350H3 ⁇ 4 corresponding to the 3 n 5 th , 7 th and 9 th harmonics of the fundamental frequency.
  • the 9 th harmonic 127 has a frequency well into the kHz range despite the low fundamental pulse rate.
  • the 3 f(i harmonic 126 is responsible for 0.3A of the current in the waveform, a su bstantial portion of the current flowing in the system.
  • the circuit also included a 2.5A DC component of current 128, i.e.
  • Figure 9D illustrates another example of a f FT, this time wit the signal amplitude measured in decibels (dB), As shown, the IkHz fundamental is accompanied by a sizeable 3 rd harmonic 131 at 3kHz and includes spectral contributions 132 above -30dB beyond 20kHz. in contrast, Figure 9E illustrates a less idealistic looking FFT output of a 25QHz square wave with a fundamental frequency 135 of 250 Hz, a 3 rd harmonic 136 of 75Hz, and a 15 th harmonic 137of 3750 Hz.
  • the lobes 138 around each significant frequency and the inaccuracy of the frequency can be caused to be two phenomena, either a small and inadequate time based sample measurement possibly with jitter in the signal itself, or the presence of high frequency fast transients that do not appear in normal oscilloscope waveforms but distort the waveform, in this case, as in ever prior example shown, the FFTs of a square wave, i.e. a repeating digital pulse, exhibit purely odd harmonics of the fundamental
  • the y-axis also represents the cumulative current or energy of the fundamental and each harmonic component, then assuming the total current is present in the first 20 harmonics and all other harmonics are filtered out, the fundamental alone represents only 47% of the total current as shown by curve 146, This means that less than half the current is oscillating at the desired frequency. Including the 3 rd harmonic 141, the total current is 63%, while adding the 5* and the 7 th increases the content to 72% and 79% respectively,
  • a similar example is a pendulum or a child swinging in a swing, each time stopping at the top of each arc (where kinetic energy is zero and potential energy is maximum) and then falling back to earth as the swing reaches the bottom of its arc (where the potential energy is at is minimum value and the velocity and kinetic energy of the swing is at its maximum value), i such an example the potential energy is stored in the force due to gravity.
  • Similar phenomena occur in buildings and bridges, sensitive to both wind and seismic vibrations. Each time the object oscillates friction removes some of the energy and the system loses its total energy. U nless that energy is replenished the system will eventual !y lose all of its energy and cease oscillating.
  • the mechanism of oscillatory behavior is also manifest in electrical circuits with magnetic and capacitive elements, where the energy may be stored in a magnetic field, or an electric field or some combination thereof.
  • the current and voltage in inductive and capacitive elements are intrinsically out of phase and once energized, spontaneously oscillate, with stored energy being redistributed from the inductor to the capacitor, or vise versa.
  • the oscillations whenever current is flowing between the energy storage elements, some of the system's energy is lost as heat as a result of electrical resistance.
  • EMR electromagnetic radiation
  • EM may comprise radio waves, microwaves, infrared radiation, light, ultraviolet light, X-rays, or gamma-rays.
  • EM may comprise radio waves, microwaves, infrared radiation, light, ultraviolet light, X-rays, or gamma-rays.
  • the wave is gradually attenuated and energy is lost as it travels, in a manner similar to the energy loss due to friction in mechanical systems or to losses due to resistance in electrical circuits.
  • the timing of when energy is put into the system determines its response,
  • the pushing force will act against the swing's swinging motion and reduce its energy lowering the maximum height to which the swing reaches on its next cycle.
  • the action of pushing too early impedes or interferes with the swing's motion and can be referred to as destructive interference.
  • the adult waits till after the swing reaches its peak height where the swing reverses direction, pushing at that time will put energ into the swing and reinforce the oscillation making the swing reach a higher height, on its next oscillatory cycle.
  • the action of pushing at just the right time, thereby reinforcing the swing's motion can be referred to as constructive interference. If the pushing is done cyclically at just the right moment the swing will go higher wit each cycle and the benefit from pushing at the right time maximizes the energy transfer into the swing's oscillations. The swing is said to be oscillating near its "resonant" frequency.
  • the frequency of the oscillating voltage source exciting the oscillating tank circuit is swept starting from a low frequenc below resonance up and increased constantly to a higher value.
  • the tank circuit may not react at all
  • energy couples into the system and current begins to oscillate between the inductor and capacitor.
  • the driving frequency continues to increase, the response of the tank to the excitation and the corresponding magnitude of the oscillations wili grow, steadily at first and then rapidly as the resonant frequenc is approached.
  • the driving voltage source reaches the circuit's resonant frequency the oscillations will hit their peak value and most efficient energy transfer. Continuing to ramp the frequenc beyond resonance will reduce the magnitude of the oscillations,
  • response curve 151 includes a lower-frequenc resonant peak 152 at a frequency fl and a second higher-frequency resonant peak 153 at a frequency ⁇ 2.
  • resonant peak 152 is greater in magnitude and broader in frequency than resonant peak 153, which exhibits a lower magnitude and a sharper sensitivity to frequency.
  • the magnitude of the system's response between the two resonant peaks never reaches zero, meaning the entire system of energy storage elements are interacting at those excitation frequencies.
  • the fundamental excitation frequency is intrinsically monophonic, i.e. comprising a single frequency, pitch., or note.
  • harmonic spectral contamination resulting from square-wave pulsing of a light source during phototherapy experiments represents an uncontrolled variable responsible, at least in part, for the conflicting results and inconsistent efficacies observed reported in published studies attempting to optimize pulsed wave phototherapy. Assuming that most photobiological processes occur in the audio spectrum, i.e. below 20kHz, then analysis shows the impact of spectral
  • contamination from pulsed operation should be worse at lower digital pulse frequencies because unwanted harmonic spectrum generated more significantly overlaps and influences the frequencies sensitive to photobiological stimulation.
  • the harmonic spectrum of a 292Hz square wave pulse contaminates most of the audio spectrum, while significant harmonics generated from a 5kHz square wave pulse occur in the ultrasonic range, i.e. >20kHz, and beyond a cell's ability to react to such rapid frequencies,
  • Figure 12A graphicall contrasts the harmonic content of a 292 Hz digital pulse to that of a pure tone of 292Hz, i.e. the fourth octave of D (or D4) and even multiples of this frequency, as recommended by Nogier's studies on healing.
  • a 2 2Hz fundamental frequency 161 would exhibit constructive interference and improved energy transfer when blended with other harmonic multiples of D in the audio spectrum 163, for example D5, D6, D7, and 1)8 at corresponding frequencies of 584Hz, 1,168Hz, 2,336Hz, and 4,672Hz.
  • a 292Hz repeating digital puls 162 results in odd harmonics 164 comprising 3 rd , 5 th , 7 th , 9 lh , 11 th , 13 th , 15 lh , harmonic frequencies at 876Hz, 1,460Hz, 2,044Hz, 2,6 8 Hz, 3,212 Hz, 3/796Hz, 4,380Hz and so on, none of which even remotely match the even harmonic frequencies recommended b physiological studies, instead, the resulting spectrum content of odd harmonics 164 generated by 292!3z digital pulse 162 contaminates much of the audio spectrum where adverse or non-beneficial interaction with man biochemical processes ma occur and interfere with desired photobiomodulation.
  • Figure 12B contrasts a 4,672Hz digital pulse 172 and its generated odd harmonies 174 to a pure tone of D in the eighth octave 171 (i.e. D8), which also has a frequency of 4,672 Hz, and eve n harmonies 173 of the pure tone D8.
  • a pure tone of D in the eighth octave 171 includes even multiples of this frequency, 1)9 and D10 at 9,344Hz and 18,688Hz, respectively, in the audio range where most photobiomodulation occurs, in contrast, at 37,376Hz, the note Dl 1 is in the ultrasonic spectrum, a range of notes above the frequency illustrated b line 175 that is too high to be heard and for most cells or tissue to react to chemically.
  • the key point of this graph is that, despite the fact that a 4,672Hz digital pulse 172 results in a whole spectrum of odd harmonics 174, only a single harmonic, the 3 rd harmonic at 14,016Hz, falls within in the audio spectrum and below the frequency specified by line 1 5. All the other harmonics are too high in frequency for most tissues to respond or react to significantly,
  • the spectral contamination resulting from digital pulses is more significant at lowe freq uencies, because above 5kHz pulse rates, most of the unwanted odd harmonics that occur are ultrasonic, above the audio frequency range and at frequencies too high to adversely impact beneficial photobiomodulation.
  • controlling a laser or an array of LEDs with a digital excitation pattern of pulses in a desired frequency range is incapable of producing chords or multiple frequencies simultaneously, thereby limiting a phototherapy device's potential for controlling or optimizing energy coupling into cells, tissue, or organs.
  • the disclosed system described herein is capable of systematicall driving arrays of various wavelength LEDs or lasers with user-selectabl arbitrary waveforms (and sequences of waveforms] comprising continuous and time-varying modulation patterns, frequencies and duty factors, free of unwanted harmonics or spectra!
  • Time varying waveforms comprise digital pulses, sinusoids, pulsed sinusoids, continuous operation, and user-defined waveforms and mathematical functions.
  • the goal of th is enhanced control is to improve treatment efficacy by adj usting device operation to synchronize to natural frequencies of particular biological processes specific to ceils, tissue, organs, and physiological systems.
  • tissue specificity can be enhanced, in order to ascertain these operating parameters, the biochemical and cytological origin of the frequenc dependence of
  • the frequency dependence of photobiomodulation and its influence on phototherapy efficacy is correlated to physical mechanisms within living cells, tissue, organs, and physiological systems.
  • NO nitric oxide
  • CCO cytochrome c oxidase
  • photobiomodulation As shown, photon 190 is absorbed, by and interacts with molecule 1 1 to make or break new bonds.
  • the energy of the impinging light depends on its wavelength as given by the Einstein relation E-hc/ ⁇ or for
  • multiple sources of energy and enzymes may assist the photon in inducing a chemical transformation.
  • a single ATP molecule may release up to 0,6eV of energy, thereby assisting singularly or collectively in fueling a photochemical reaction.
  • the result of the photobiomodulation of molecule 191 may be manifest itself in one of several mechanisms, namely electrical conduction 192, chemical transformations 193, ionic conduction 194, or thermal vibration 195. Release of free electrons 192 during ionization describes the purely electrical component of photobiomodulation. Electron transport occurring with a time constant ⁇ ( . ⁇ is relatively fast and capable of responding to stimuli from kHz up to tens of kHz.
  • Photobiomodulation inducing electrical conduction through electron emission and electron transport can be referred to as biopiiotOeleetric conduction
  • Chemical transitions 193 along with ionic electrical conduction 194 having respective time constants Xe and TQ are slower, responding to photobiomodulation in to 10Hz to the Ikllz range.
  • Chemical processes are complex;, involving a structural transform tion in the affected molecule 198 with a corresponding change in its chemical reactivity and its stored potential energy (PE) ⁇
  • Ionic processes 194 are significantly slower tha simple electron 192 conduction, because the conducting ions 197 are oftentimes large molecules conducting by diffusion (driven by a concentration gradient dN cs /dx) or b electrical conduction driven by intra- and intercellular electric field induced force qE, said electric fields existing as a result of spatially unevenly distributed ions.
  • Pliotobiomoduiation inducing electrical conduction through ionic transport can be referred to as hiophotoionic conduction.
  • pliotobiomoduiation inducing structural transformations in molecules can be referred to as hiophotoehemical transformation.
  • thermal vibrations 195 is the spread of heat, either classical kinetic energy or by quantized phonon conduction causing molecules 196 to vibrate at increased levels compared to their surroundings as energy escapes the photo-excited molec les and spreads thermally into its neighbors.
  • Transient thermal effects, vibrations spreading across tissue can occur at a rate of 1 to 10Hz while steady state conduction can take minutes to stabilize, i.e. responding to sub- Hz frequencies.
  • Thermal vibration is another important mechanism in
  • Photobiomodulation inducing the diffusion of heat between and among molecules can be referred to as "biophotothermal” conduction or thermal vibration.
  • Frequency dependent photobiomodulation results from these physical processes interacting with the modulating or pulse frequencies of incoming photons.
  • Overstimulation occurs when the digital pulse rate or light modulating frequency is fester then the physical process's ability to respond to it In such cases, the response is reduced because the cell or moiecuie simply cannot keep up with the .stimulus.
  • Such a case is analogous to a busy freeway with entrance ramp metering lights sttick-on causing more-and-more cars to jam onto the freeway until no one is able to move, Understimulation occurs when the digital pulse rate or light
  • modulating frequency is much slower than the cell's ability to absorb it in which case little or no photobiomodulation occurs. This condition is analogous to a freeway whose metering lights are allowing almost no one to get onto the freeway, with the similar result that no one gets anywhere. Only if the photobiomodulation frequency matches the system's natural response frequency is there an optimum resu lt and efficient energy transfer. For example, if the metering lights onto the freeway are timed correctly, the optimum number of cars will fill the freeway and promptly travel to thei destination without starting a traffic jam.
  • the various peak response conditions can be referred to as bioresonance even though the mechanism ma not involve energ storage and timed release as in the true resonant systems described above. Being able to stimulate these select resonant frequencies in a controlled manner free from spectral contamination is critical, especially in avoiding the inadvertent generation of frequencies causing destructive interference and loss of efficacy. Moreover, invoking multiple bioresonant mechanisms simultaneously is not possible using present-day digital pulse based phototherapy systems.
  • the disclosed new electronic drive system described herein comprises both an inventive apparatus and novel methods for realizing sinusoidal drive and arbitrary waveform synthesis of LED or laser light for phototherapy, not available or even suggested in the prior art
  • a key element in driving LEDs and laser diodes with controlled frequencies and harmonics is the circuitry and algorithms used in generating the device's waveforms, patterns, and driving conditions. While the following description details the means to drive arrays of multiple strings of series-connected LEDs, the same circuitry can be adapted to drive one or multiple semiconductor lasers,
  • the light output, of an LED depends on its current and because its brightness is poorly correlated to the forward voltage present across the LED during conduction, it is preferable to use controlled constant-sources (and current sinks) rather than constant voltage drive.
  • the LED current ILED will unavoidably vary with the total series forward voltage drop V? of ail the LEDs.
  • Figure 14 illustrates two equivalent represen tations 200a and 200b of a current sink controlling the current through a string of series-connected LEDs 205a.
  • current sink 201a represents an idealized current controlled device with sensing and feedback designed to maintain a prescribed current h.Eife in LED string 20Sa.
  • the LED string 205a comprises V anode-to-cathode series-connected LEDs, where m is a mathematical variable and not meant to represent the 13 th letter of the English alphabet
  • the schematic element 1.99a represents feedback from sensing the value of current hms and using feedback to insure the current stays constant even if the chandelierage across current sink 201a varies.
  • LED pads may contain many independently controlled strings of LEDs, namely LED output channels a, b, c, .... , n, where "n" is a mathematical variable representing the number of channeis and not the 14* letter of the English alphabet
  • FIG. 200b the series connection of "m” LEDs is symbolically replaced by a single LED with the number “m” inside the device and the voltage +Vf a iabe!ed across the LED.
  • current sink 201a is further detailed showing a analog feedback circuit comprising MOSFET driver 215a driving the gate of high- voltage MOSFE 216a, in operation, MOSFET driver 215a provides a voltage o the gate of current- sink MOSFET 216a allowing cur rent (LEOS to flow through the sensi ng circuitry contained with MOSFET driver 215a to ground.
  • This current is then compared to a multiple of the analog input current al re f set by low -voltage current source 202a, and the gate voltage on current-sink MOSFET 216a automatically adjusted by the circuitry within MOSFET driver 215a until the currents airef and liEDa match and I LEOS is at is desired value. Because of its analog closed-loop circuitry, feedback from MOSFET driver 215a is nearly instantaneous, adjusting dynamically with fluctuating voltages and programmed changes in the reference current input from current source 202a,
  • the reference current ctL t from current source 202a may be realized by a fixed, time varying, or adjustable reference voltage and a series resistor trimmed for accuracy to convert the precise voltage into a precise reference current
  • the accurate voltage source may comprise a fixed-value Zener diode or a bandgap voltage, a voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO), or a digital-to-analog converters (DAC) facilitating digital control of the analog current value output from current- source 202a
  • VCO voltage-controlled oscillator
  • DAC digital-to-analog converters
  • the digital pulse output from digital synthesizer 203a can be realized by counters and clock circuits, by programmable logic arrays (PLAs), or by a microprocessor executing firmware or software instructions.
  • circuitry Some implementations of the aforementioned circuitry are described in a previously-cited related U.S. Application No. 14/073,371. Other exemplary and novel analog, digital and mixed-mode circuits will be included herein iater in the application.
  • Figure IS illustrates the diverse variety of wa veforms that may be synthesized by the described driver circuitry.
  • graph 240a illustrates the input waveforms of current sink 201a comprising the digital Enable signal output from digital synthesizer 203a, and the reference current ire! output from current source 202a.
  • Graph 240b illustrates the resulting LED current conduction waveform with the same time references 3 ⁇ 4, etc. as graph 240a included for easy
  • the generated waveforms are examples, not intended to imply any specific operating condition attempting to avoid undesirable harmonics in phototherapy systems, but simply to illustrate that the combination of digital pulsing and analog current control offers nearly limitless control of LED excitation.
  • the digital Enable signal comprises line segments 241 through 245, and reference current ahd comprises curves 251 through 258.
  • reference current ahd comprises curves 251 through 258.
  • the instantaneous LED current is illustrated by curves 260 through 269, while the average LED current, where applicable, is represented b the dashed lines shown by line segments 271 through 275,
  • enable signal 241 is at a logic zero and reference current 251 is biased at some nominal value ⁇ , e.g. at an input current corresponding to an li.EDii output current of 20mA. Because digital enable signal 241 is at a logic zero, the LED cu rrent 260 is at zero and the string of LEDs remains off despite the non ⁇ zero value of reference current edref.
  • the LED current 262 similarly tracks the reference, jumping from 20mA to a higher value, e.g. 27mA, before settling back at 20mA at time ts, shown by LED current 263.
  • the output waveform of LED currents 262 and 263 illustrates that the reference current can be used to facilitate purely analog control of LED current and brightness with n digital pulsing whatsoever.
  • the reference current commences a controlled, small signal sinusoidal oscillation superimposed o a non-zero average DC value.
  • the perturbation in the reference current may be considered small-signal because the amplitude of the oscillation is small compared to the average value of current dm,
  • the average current remains unchanged from the DC value (shown by curve 253] of the reference current existing before the oscillations commenced. While any oscillating frequency may be considered possible, practical considerations and the value of oscillating waveforms in phototherapy suggest the operating frequency should he 20kHz or below.
  • the corresponding LED current depicted as curve 264 in graph 240b commencing at time t , tracks that of the reference current shown by curve 254, having an average current value (dashed line 271) of 20mA and varying symmetrically around the average LSD current by some fixed amount, for example ⁇ lmA, This means that the LED current varies sinusoidally, with peak-to-peak values ranging from 19mA to 21mA.
  • the minimum reference current ai reaches zero (or nearly so) while the peak reference current reaches twice the average value, i.e. twice the value f the reference current represented by curve 253.
  • the LED current tracks the value as a multiple of the reference current (curve 255) both in frequency and in wave shape, having an average LED current (dashed line 271) of 20mA with peak-to-peak oscillations around that average of nearly ⁇ 20mA, meaning the LED current varies sinusoidally from 0mA to 40mA with an a erage value of 2 OmA.
  • the same oscillatory operating conditions persist as existed in the interval ts-ts, except that the oscillation frequency of the reference current represented by curve 255 and correspond LED current represented by curve 265 is intentionally reduced to a lower oscillating frequency., shown by curve 256 for the reference current and by curve 266 for the corresponding LED current, with the output still maintaining an average LED current 71 of 20mA, the same average as previously occurred for oscillator LED currents shown by curves 264 and 265.
  • the digital enable signal commences pulsed operation with 50% duty factor, pulsing at a digital clock frequency of 1 /Ts., where Ti is the period of each repeated cycle.
  • the pulse on-time of digital enable signal increases while the period Ti and the corresponding pulse frequency remain the same as before
  • the 20mA pulses of LED current at a 50% duty factor represented by curve 267
  • an LED current become an LED current at a 75% duty factor, represented by curve 268.
  • This mode of operation comprises fixed-frequenc PWM or pulsed width modulation operation, where the average LED current varies from 50% of 20mA, i.e.
  • the instantaneous and time average value of the LED current can be controlled in numerous and flexible ways using analog control of the reference current and digital pulse control of the enable signal of the current sink schematic representations shown in Figure 14.
  • Realizing current sink 215a, reference current source 202a, and digital synthesizer 203a can be accomplished in many ways. Actual realization of these circuits must address issues of accuracy, reproducibility, and scalability into multichannel systems.
  • Such circuitry can he divided into two broad categories - analog LED control and digital synthesis,
  • controlling LED current hm-* requires analog control to implement the sense and LED drive circuitry within MOSFET driver 215a, as well as to implement precision reference current 202a,
  • Current sink 20 la comprises high- oltage MOSFET 216a biased to control the LED current keoa and MOSFET driver 215a which senses the LED current lim* compares the LED current ILEDS to the desired reference current a and
  • transconductance amplifier 208a converts into current l a feeding MOSFET driver 2 5a
  • transconductance amplifier 208b converts the same ref into current lb feeding MOSFET driver 215b, and so on.
  • the c rrent h coming from reference voltage source 207 and feeding MOSFET driver 215a is used to bias a current mirror MOSFET 210 through bias resistor 2 2 and a parallel network of trim resistors 213a through 213x,
  • the subscript "x" refers to a mathematical variable and not the 24 th letter of the English alphabet. Since the gate of MOSFET 210 is connected to its drain, i.e.
  • MOSFET 210 is "threshold connected," the gate voltage of MOSFET 210 will naturally bias itself to a voltage V1 ⁇ 2 sufficient to conduct the desired reference current L as set b series resistor 212 and a parallel trim network 220 comprising resistors 213a through 213g.
  • a differential amplifier 214 which is biased in a closed, loop with a stable voltage gain Av, drives the gate of high-voltage MOSFET 216a with a gate voltage VGI, till the current 1LED m flowing in MOSFETs 2 6a and 211 drives the difference between e and Vpiiot to zero, i.e. In this way, the reference current ]» is "mirrored" in MOSFET 211, and a controlled and constan current flows in LED string 205a even if the LED supply voltage +VL?;O changes.
  • the resistor network 220 in parallel with fixed resistor 212 is functionally trimmed to produce an accurate output current thereby eliminating the impact of variability coming from MOSFET transconductance of MOSFET 210 or in the resistor value F . of resistor 212.
  • trimming is performed by measuring the current ILED.3 and then blowing fuse links till the measured value of hm* reaches its target value, Because amplifier 214 controls the gate voltage of MOSFET 216a (and hence the current h &) and provided the size of MOSFETs 210 and 211 are equal, then the error voltage, the difference between V$e and V UK, will be driven to zero when the currents la and !LEDS are equal. Should the gate width of MOSFET 211 be larger than that of MOSFET 210, then when the error voltage i zero, the LED current hnaa will be larger than reference current L by the MOSFETs width ratio,
  • the total resistance of the resistor network 21 is at its minimum value, is higher than its target value, and therefore the value of ILEDS will also be too high, e.g. 22mA (10% above its target value of 20mA).
  • probes are electrically connected to common metal trim pad 221 and to ail the specific resistor trim pads 222.
  • trim pad 222b in series with trim resistor 213b is labeled.
  • a high current is then impressed by the tester between common trim pad 222 and a specific channel's trim pad,, e.g.
  • trim pad 222b causing the thin portion of the metal fuse link 223b in series with trim resistor 2:13b to melt and become an electrical open circuit, disconnecting resistor 213b from trim network 220.
  • the total resistance increases, the value of reference current drops , and the LED current in LED string 205a decreases by a fixed amount.
  • fuse link 223b is illustrated by a line that is thinner than the rest of the conductors shown in the schematic of Figure 16C,
  • single-pole double-throw switch 217 is shown to illustrate the digital enable function within MOSFET driver 215a.
  • differential amplifier 214 may be suspended or clamped in voltage so that it does not try to increase its output voltage in a futile attempt to increase the sense current in MOSFET 211.
  • VVhi!e resistor trimming is commonplace, trimming the size, i.e. gate width., of a network of transistors is generally easier and more accurate and reproducible than using resistors.
  • Such a circuit is shown in Figure 16D, where resistor 212 has no parallel network of trim resistors but instead current mirror MOSFET 210 includes a parallel network 230 of trim MOSFETs 225a, 225b ...225x.
  • Another advantage of using MOSFET trimming rather than resistor trimming is that network 230 is generally smaller than network 220, shown in Figure 16C.
  • fuse links illustrated by fuse link 233x
  • disconnect i.e.
  • MOSFETs 225a. conjug22SX.in parallel with current mirror MOSFET 210 For example, initially after manufacturing and immediately prior to trimming, when all of the MOSFETs 210 and 225a,.,225x are still connected in parallel, the size ratio between MOSFET 2 1 and the parallel combination of current mirror MOSFET 10 and trim network 230 is at a minimum and the current U.ED will be below its targeted value, e.g. at 18mA, 10% below its 20mA target
  • fuse Sink 23 K is blown and the gate of trim MOSFET 225x is no longer connected to the gate of MOSFET 210.
  • resistor 226x biases MOSFET 22Sx off.
  • MOSFET trim network 230 With less parallel gate width in MOSFET trim network 230., the current m irro r ratio i ncreases and for the same value of reference current L, the LED current ILED will increase conimensurately.
  • the gates of MOSFETs 210 and 211 along with those in MOSFET trim network 230 are biased by a voltage source 224 and not by connecting the gate of current mirror MOSFET 210 to its drain.
  • the advantage of this method is that the current, mirror MOSFET 211 may operate with a lower drain voltage V se using this method. While some initial accuracy may be lost using this method, functional trimming is able to correct for this deficiency.
  • the lower voltage drop across MOSFET 211 reduces power dissipation and improves overall system efficiency of the LED driver 215a, implementing a reference voltage to replace the reference current also requires analog circuitry.
  • Methods of manufacturing fixed value reference voltage sources are well known, including means to minimize variation in the voltage over temperature. Such methods include bandgap voltage references (see
  • sinusoidal waveforms can he generated digitally as described later in this application, an inventive means disclosed herein by which to synthesize a sinusoidal waveform for driving LEDs in a phototherapy system is through the use of analog synthesis.
  • digital synthesis involves pulsing an LED current on-and-off in constantly varying durations, i.e. pulse-width-modulation, to synthesize a sine wave (or chords of multiple frequency sine waves)
  • analog synthesis involves smusoida!ly varying the reference current or current bias to the LED current control circuit, i.e.
  • analog waveform synthesis is illustrated by sinusoids 254, 255 and 256 occurring at times , ts, and , and also by the arbitrary time dependent waveform representing the ability to implement any control function by waveform 2S2 at time tz,
  • the reference voltage biasing MOSFET driver 2 l5a is replaced with a fixed frequency sine-wave or sinusoidal oscillating reference voltage source 235, also known as a linear or "harmonic" oscillator.
  • Harmonic oscillators in the audio range can be made using inductor-capacitor, i.e. LC, oscillators or using resistor-capacitor, i.e. RC, oscillators circuits including RC phase shift oscillators, Wien bridge oscillators, or twin-T oscillators (see wikieducator.org/sinusoidaLosciiiator).
  • the output voltage of oscillating reference voltage source 235 must be trimmed using resistors or transistor arrays in a manner similar to the trimming of MOSFET driver 215a described previously.
  • other common RC circuits often used for dock generation comprising simple relaxation oscillators are not harmonic oscillators and are not applicable because they produce sawtooth or triangular shaped waveforms with unwanted broadband spectral content.
  • oscillating reference voltage source 235 is replaced by a controlled oscillating reference voltage source 236 with an adjustable frequency and an adjustable voltage.
  • a controlled oscillating reference voltage source 236 with an adjustable frequency and an adjustable voltage.
  • FIG 17C comprising a Wien oscillator 280 with a voltage follower 281 and a trimable variable voltage output buffe 282.
  • Wien oscillator 280 comprises two matched variable capacitors 284a and 284b and two matched programmable resistors 283a and 283b.
  • the two RC networks create a voltage divider and feedback network returning signals from the output of a high-gain differential amplifier 285 back to its positive input
  • a damping network comprising resistors 286a and 286b sets the gain and stability of the circuit to stabilize the oscillations.
  • the oscillating frequency may be adjusted b changing the resistance Rose of programmable resistors 283a and 283b or alternatively by changing the capacitance Cose of variable capacitors 284a and 284b.
  • Variable resistance may be realized by varying the gate voltage and resistance of OSFETs biased in their linear region of operation, or alternatively using a digital potentiometer comprising discrete resistors with parallel MOSFETs able to short out the various resistors.
  • Variable capacitance may be realized by varaetors comprising back-to-back PN junction diodes, one of which is reverse biased to a fixed voltage to establish the junction capacitance. Changing either the resistance or the capacitance adjusts the oscillating frequency of Wien oscillator 280,
  • variable voltage follower 281 comprising a differential amplifier 287 with negative feedback through resistor 288 provides buffering
  • the voltage VW of voltage follower 281 is then adjusted by a resistor divider comprising a fixed resistor 292 and a variable resistor 291 with resistance values Ri and Kz respectively.
  • the variable resistance 291 may comprise a trim network as well as a digital potentiometer, as described previously, The voltage at the ta point Iocated between resistors 291 and 292 and connected to the
  • V out (V uf* 2)/(Ri+R2).
  • differential amplifier 289 behaves as a voltage fol lowe faithfully reproducing the voltage waveform of its input while delivering the required current to a electrical load connected to its output Vrei t
  • this output voltage Wefout has an AC component VAC(T.) extending from zero to Its peak value of +VAc(t) with an average valu of VAc(t)/2 and contains no added DC offset (aside from the intrinsic DC average value of a sine wave).
  • the output of oscillating reference voltage source 236 may be further adj usted by the circuit shown in Figure 17D.
  • the Vn-fout output of the circuit shown in Figure 17C is fed into a voltage follower 300 comprising a differentia! amplifier 302 (or another type of voltage followe circuit) through an AC coupling capacitor 303.
  • Differential amplifier 302 operates as a voltage follower because of negative feedback on wire 301, connecting its output to its negative input.
  • the purpose of AC coupling capacitor 303 is to block any DC offsets present within the output of oscillating reference voltage source 236. If no offset is present capacitor 303 may be eliminated.
  • operational amplifier 302 is powered from logic supply +Vk.gio its negative supply rail is not connected to ground but instead is connected to a generated voltage produced by a voltage bias circuit 309, an above ground voltage that acts as the negative supply rail for differential amplifier 302, Because of this re-referencing its negative supply rail, the output voltage Vi-etoufc? of differential amplifier 302 is shifted in its voltage level from ground to a more positive voltage, As a result, the waveform of the output voltage Wesoutz appears the same as the waveform of its input Wefout but Vrejoutz is offset by a DC voltage equal to the generated voltage + ⁇ «3 ⁇ 4, or mathematically as
  • the circuit will faithfully reproduce the input so long that the sura of the DC bias (+ Vneg) and the sine wave input signal AC(t) do not exceed the supply Spotifyage +Vkigic, otherwise the top of the sine wave will be "clipped", i.e. reach a constant maximum output recreationalage at during any interval where + Wg + V re fOut2 ⁇ +V; :) ⁇ ;,c.
  • Waveform clipping results in the distorting of the output waveform, producing unwanted harmonics and spectral contamination similar to (or even worse than) that of LED drive using digital pulses.
  • differential amplifier 302 may not be able to function properly.
  • Generation of the DC lake +V may be performed in any num ber of ways including a trimmed bandgapsperage followed by a variable gain amplifier, a voltage controlled amplifier, or varying resistor or switched-capaeitorrentage divider networks.
  • One such voltage divider method is illustrated in Figure 1.7D as diverage generation circuit 309 using a resistor Kunststoffage divider technique.
  • the logic suppl voltage -V3 ⁇ 4 3 ⁇ 4 ic is connected to series resistor string comprising resistors 304a through 304x, where x is a mathematical variable and does not represent the 24 th letter in the English alphabet.
  • Resistors 304b through 304x are connected in parallel with MOSAFETs 305b through 3Q5x, respectively.
  • the number of resistors may commonly be 9, 13, or 17 allowing various 8-bit, 12,-bit and 16-bit combinations of voltage to be realized depending on the accuracy required, where the number of resistors needed equal one plus the number of bits of accuracy desired. For example, 8 bits of accuracy requires 9 resistors providing 256 levels of output voltage,
  • MOSFETs 305b through 305x are turned on and their resistance is designed to be small relative to that of the resistance value R of resistor 304a, then the output voltage t V ⁇ . 3 ⁇ 4 is near ground; if none of the transistors 305b through 305x is turned on, the output voltage becomes +Viogic, and for various other combinations an intermediate voltage may be selected.
  • the resistor network 304a through 304x can further be modified to select a voltage from only a portion of the supply range. For example, a lower voltage than +Viogic may be used to power the resistor string.
  • the series ladder of resistors 304a through 304x forms a type of digitai-to-ana!og converter because turning various MOSFETs on and off is essentially a digital function and the result is an analog , albeit quantized, voltage.
  • the number of resistors can be increased or the voltage range reduced to that the least significant bit, i.e. LSB, represents a smaller voltage gradation,
  • resistor trim network 310 comprising parallel resistors 31 ia through 311x is placed in parallel with resistor 304a to provide a means to trim the voltage accuracy during manufacturing by blowing fuse links by impressing temporary high currents on trim pads on an I
  • thin metal line 3 3 wilt act like a fuse and melt creating an electrical open-circuit and removing resistor 311b from the parallel network of resistors in trim network 310,
  • the DC offset circuit shown in Figurel7D combined with the oscillating reference voltage circuit of Figure 17C allow the electrical generation of a sine wave AC ⁇ t) of va rying frequency and magnitude offset by a DC voltage. So long as it does not exceed the supply voltage +Vk3 ⁇ 4k-., the output voltage of this newly disclosed oscillating reference voltage Is Vretoufc.
  • Voc ⁇ VAC(X)/2 - ⁇ Vrefouta Voc ⁇ VAC(X)/2 - ⁇ Vrefouta having a peak output voltage of Voc + VAc(t)/2, a minimum output voltage of Vnc - VAc(t) /2, and an average output voltage of VDC If the AC coupling capacitor 303 is removed, the average value of the output increases by the average voltage of the sign wave VAc(t)/2, reduci ng the usable operat ing voltage range of differen tial amplifier 302.
  • V rf u 2 waveform 308 using the circuit of Figure 17D or a similar circuit, the AC component of the signal is smaller than the DC offset voltage, i.e. VAC(1 ' ) ⁇ VDC. Since the main voltage component is DC and not the sinusoid, then the sine wave can be said to represent small-signal AC behavior.
  • the voltage value of V re fGut2 actually represents the reference current that determines LED brightness whenever the LED string is enabled and conducting
  • Small signal operation of the inventive circuitry represents a completely new operating mode for phototherapy - one wherein the LED string is continuously illuminated at a fixed current and then modulated sinusoidaMy at bias condition with slight increases and decreases in current and corresponding changes in
  • MOSFE'F driver 215a from a digital-to-analog (D/A) converter 315 While an number of bits ma be used to control accuracy, commonly available converters, for example those used in HDTVs, comprise 8 bits with 256 levels, 12 bits with 4096 levels,, or 16 bits with 65,536 levels. Converter speed is not high because the highest frequency required for phototherapy is 20kHz, and in most cases only 5kHz, in operation, data is written into a latch or static memory, specifically ILED register 16., and loaded into D/A converter each time the converter receives a digital clock pulse on it Load input pin, i.e. between 5kHz to 20kHz, as desired,
  • DAC D/A converters
  • One such circuit is an 8-bit resistor ladder converter 315 shown in Figure 18B comprising a precision reference voltage source 320, and a DAC resistor ladder comprising resistors 321a through 32 lx, along with DAC switches comprising OSFETs 322b through 322x controlled by decoder 323.
  • MOSFETs 322b through 322x are connected in parallel with resistors 321b through 321x, respectively.
  • a decoder 323 loads an 8-bit word from its input line 8b upon receiving a clock pulse on its digital Load input, represented by digital inverter 344, and converts the 8-bit word into instructions of which of the MOSFETs 322b through 322x should be turned-on in various combinations to produce a linear output voltage on the DAC ladder tap point between resistors 321a and 321b.
  • the DAC ladder voltage ranging from zero to Vref, is then fed to the positive input of a differential amplifier 335 configured as a voltage follower.
  • a resistor trim network 325 comprising resistors 324a through 324x, trim pads (e.g. 326 and 328) and fuse links 327, is placed in parallel with resistor 32 la in order to trim the output voltage during manufacturing, Alternatively, the internal reference voltage V re f provided by source 320 may be trimmed to provide the required precision.
  • a switched filter capacitor 342 is optionally included to filter the ripple of the output voltage VYeiOut, or i f a high speed transient is desi red to disabie the filter depending on the digital control signal on the Filter Enable input represented by digital inverter 343.
  • capacitor 342 in operation when MOSFET 340 is turned on and MOSFET 341 is disabled capacitor 342 is connected in parallel with the output of buffer ampl ifier 335 and the output of reference 315 is filtered removing high frequency noise.
  • MOSFET 340 is turned off and MOSFET 341 is enabled, capacitor 342 is disconnected from the output of buffer amplifier 335 and the output of reference 315 is not filtered.
  • MOSFET 341 the charge on capacitor 342 is discha rged to prevent the accumulation of voltage from repeated operation.
  • Other D/A converters may be employed in place of resistor ladder converter 315, as desired.
  • FIG 19A An example of an 292Hz (D4) oscillating reference voltage without any added DC offset generated in the disclosed manner is illustrated in Figure 19A comprising a 1.2V sine wave 371 with a period of 3.42msec and an average voltage output of 0,6V.
  • the peak voltage is convenient chosen to be similar to the output voltage of a bandgap voltage trimmed for a low temperature coefficient or near zero "tempco". Other voltages, however, may be employed as well to produce the desired input current to LED driver 215a.
  • sinusoid 350 as disclosed herein is synthesized, programmable, and low voltage, not the artifact of a rotating electromagnetic generator or alternator used in AC power generation in power plants. So while LEDs used in residential and commercial lighting applications can, at least theoretically, be driven directly from the 60Hz AC line voltage, the sinusoidal characteristic of the AC line voltages and its application in general lighting is completely different than the proposed sy nthesized sine wave excitation of LEDs applicable for phototherapy.
  • the AC line voltage is high-voltage, typically 110VAC or 220VAC and unacceptabiy dangerous in medical appiications where a device, in this case the LED array and pad, touches the skin, in LED drive for phototherapy, the total number of series connected LEDs is limited to operate at a maximum, voltage below 40 V, a voltage considered safe by Underwriter Laboratories (UL) for consumer and medical applications.
  • UL Underwriter Laboratories
  • the frequency of the AC line varies with loading of the utility customers and is contaminated by numerous undesirable spectral harmonics affecting the purity of t he sinusoid and rendering it unsuitable for phototherapy applications
  • the frequency of the AC line namely 60 Rz and its harmonic 120 Hz do not represent a frequency known to be beneficial in phototherapy, e.g. a multiple of 292 Hz. in fact 60Hz does not represent a multiple of any pure or chromatic tone indicated for photobiomodulation.
  • the frequency of the AC fine is fixed and is not programmable or adjustable. It cannot be adjusted or varied dynamically or to match the time constants of natural biological processes and associated time constants, ft also cannot be used to generate chords of multiple frequency sinusoids nor control the energ densit and spectral content, i.e, the mix, of multiple frequency sinusoids,
  • LEDs using in phototherapy necessarily comprise relatively narrow spectral wavelengths in the red, near infrared, or blue portion of the spectrum.
  • the LED light typically ⁇ 35nm in spectral width, emitted through the quantum- mechanical process of tunnel emission is determined by handgap engineering of the nianmade crystal used to realize the LED in manufacturing.
  • LEDs used in lighting are designed to emit a broad spectrum of light, i.e, white light, comprising a number of colors in the rainbow.
  • white light LEDs comprise blue or UV LEDs with a fens cap containing phosphor tuned to absorb blue or UV light.
  • the light emitted from the LED semiconductor material is absorbed by the phosphor atoms in the lens cap and converted into broad spectrum "white" light similar to sunlight but more white and less yellow.
  • the direct drive of LEDs using AC sinusoids in general lighting applications is actually not in commercial practice today for a variety of intractable technical problems including poor power efficiency, poor power factor, electrical shock risk, and flicker.
  • Today's LED bulbs use multistage PVV switching power supplies for power factor correction and voltage regulation. LED brightness is therefore control led by digital pulses and not using sinusoids.
  • the digital input to decoder 323 is repeatedly loaded during clocking of the Load pin, i.e. the input to inverter 344, occurring at fixed time intervals in order to generate a sine wave of an arbitrary and adjustable frequency.
  • the following table represents examples of various time points used in the waveform synthesis.
  • an 8-bit D/A converter exhibits 256 output states or 256 steps above its zero state, i.e. from 0000-0000 in binary or from 00 to FF in hexadecimal.
  • 240 steps i.e. 241 states ⁇ of the D/A converter have been employed. As such, 240 steps
  • DAC value is represented in three equivalent ways
  • MOSFETSs 322b through 322x in Fig. 18B to dynamically change the resistor divider network ratio
  • a sequence of increasing digital codes is fed into to the DAC at a regular time intervals to produce a rising output voltage.
  • a sequence of declining digital codes may be used to lower the output voltage of the DAC, i this increasing and decreasing code sequence is performed repeatedly and consistently a any periodic function can be synthesized as an output of DAC 315,
  • codes are input into the DAC at regular time intervals according to evaluation of a sine function for fixed steps of angles, e.g. 15°, then the sequence will result in a sinusoidal output from DAC 315.
  • each of the 240 steps comprises G.0142694msec.
  • the clock frequency 354 is well into the ultrasonic range and is therefore not a source of unwanted spectral contamination.
  • the harmonic spectra 353 of the 3 r ⁇ *. 5* 7 th through 13 th multiples of a 292 Hz sinusoid all have zero energy - meaning all spectral contamination in the audio band has been completely eliminated (see Table 355),
  • graph 360a shown in Figure 19 ⁇ illustrates a portion of a 18.25Hz sine wave 361 comprising a sequence of small voltage changes 362 occurring at the clock frequenc of the D/A converter, specifically 4,380 ⁇ .
  • graph 360b of Figure 19 ⁇ illustrates in histogram 363 the change in voltage at each of these steps as a percentage of the oscillation's 1,2V peak-to-peak magnitude.
  • V re f Prior to 13.7msec when the output voltage V re f is still increasing, the value of AV re i is positive. At 13.7msec the change diminishes to near zero and thereafter the change become negative in polarity.
  • the magnitude of AVref reaches its largest negative value and thereafter begins to diminish in magnitude. This peak magnitude represents less than 1.3% of the amplitude of the sine wave itself,
  • analog sy nthesis By employing analog sy nthesis as disclosed herein, a wide range of sine wave excitation patterns in the audio spectrum can be generated to drive LED arrays for phototherapy piications, free from harraonic contamination, Using the disclosed methods and apparatus in analog sinusoidal synthesis, dynamic control of waveforms in both frequency and in amplitude may be realized including independent control in peak and average current control.
  • graph 370a which shows an Enable signal 371 and reference current waveforms 375-379
  • graph 370b which shows the resulting LEI) current waveforms 385- 389.
  • These sinusoidal waveforms summarized in the following table, are not shown to imply a specific therapy or protocol but simply to illustrate the various current waveform combinations possible using analog synthesis.
  • Graphs 370a and 370b are broken into S time intervals, with a different waveform example in each interval, the intervals before time representing large signal behavior, where the LED current oscillates with a peak-to-peak variation that represents a significant fraction of the peak available supply current, and the intervals after t3 representing a small variation In current relative to the peak available supply current and relative to the average DC current hoc + Mi3. Furthermore, the frequencies f re fo and in the intervals before tt and between and t are shown to be high compared to the frequencies of the waveforms in t e other intervals,
  • the magnitude of reference current waveforms 37 S and 376 oscillate betwee zero and a peak current value of In with an average current of h$ - l r i/2 shown by dashed line 380 and with respective frequencies frefo > t ti
  • This reference current result in an LED current Ai ⁇ AI LI having an average LED current AlLiii!ustrated by dashed line 390 , a peak current 2ASu, and a minimum current of zero, i the subsequent interval from ti to ts, the large signal reference current waveform 377 decreases in peak magnitude compared to the previous intervals but stiil remains large signal, with a reference current ranging from zero to Lz with an average value he ⁇ 1(2/2 illustrated by dashed line 381.
  • the resulting small signal waveform therefore is a current oscillating sinusoidally between maximum and minimum values of ILDC + & ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 1.3, meaning that the LEDs are continuously illuminated but with sinusoidal variation in their brightness,
  • programmable voltage is fed into a network of resistors and transistors to establi sh a reference current and to mirror this current to one or multiple channels driving separate LED strings.
  • the value of the reference current may be actively trimmed during manufacture to set the precise value of current for a given voltage input by trimming a network of resistors as shown previously In lug, 16C or by trimming a network of transis tors as shown in Fig. 161).
  • the transi stors may comprise either bipolar or MOSFET type,
  • a time dependent or oscillatory LED current may be created.
  • the voltage may be varied sinusoidally or by any other regular periodic function by operating the voltage reference in an oscillatory circuit.
  • the voltage can be constantly changed using d igital control of a voltage-output type DAC to "synthesize" the desired waveforms.
  • transconductance amplifiers are larger and more expensive to implemen than sing current mirrors.
  • a programmable current-mode DAC can be employed to synthesize a periodic time varying current, but to drive multiple LED strings, it still is beneficial to feed the DAC output current into a transistor current mirror not only to buffer the current to a higher value but to conven iently produce mul tiple channels of well matched LED drive.
  • the sum of sine waves can be expressed by the series sum of multiple sine waves of varying magn itude Ax, freq ency ⁇ * and duration (or decay rate), namely
  • LEDs driven by polyphonic excitation will simultaneously and concurrently exhibit multiple frequencies, with the ability to effectively couple energy into comparable bioresonant frequencies.
  • FIG. 22A One means by which to synthesize polyphonic chords in shown in Figure 22A comprising an analog mixer circuit 405 summing oscillating reference voltages Vvefii and V ; ,-n> produced by oscillators 236a and 236b, respectively, to produce a time-varying voltage resulting in oscillating reference current as an input to MOSFET drive 215a.
  • Oscillators 236a and 236b, having different frequencies of oscillation, may be synchronized to prevent unwanted frequency drift and aliasing.
  • analog sources may be used to generate a polyphonic reference current comprising one or more chords or even music.
  • any polyphonic audio sou rce 408 including a music synthesizer, radio decoder, or audio recording player may be used to generate the reference current ahei, provided that the analog voltage output of the audio source 408 and series resistance of the circuit are adj usted to limit the peak value of lt er to the input range acceptable for MOSFET driver 215a to prevent signal distortion.
  • the analog voltage output of audio source 408 may be scaled in voltage by a voltage divider including resistors 407a and 407b followed by audio preamplifier 406 to produce the time varying current cdvef.
  • a voltage divider including resistors 407a and 407b followed by audio preamplifier 406 to produce the time varying current cdvef.
  • One way to implement such a circuit is to employ a fixed reference current of value h f and to scale this current to a higher or lower current with a current amplifier having current gain a, where the gain a is modulated in response to the analog output of analog audio source 408,
  • the analog audio source 408 may comprise a tape player, a digital audio player, a CD player, or digitally streamed music.
  • Another method, shown in Figure 22C, to derive an analog audio source is to directly translate a digital source 413 such as digital streamed audio, digitally encoded data, or a CD audio and to convert the specific data encoding format into a parallel or serial digital data using format conversion in an audio codec 412.
  • This stream of 1-bit data or sequence of 16 ⁇ bit parallel words is then processed using custom algorithms in a digital signal processor (DSP) 411 and loaded at regular intervals into a D/A converter 410 to create the desired time varying reference current aire;.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • D/A converter 410 To avoid audio distortion, digital words should be loaded into D/A converter 410 at a minimum frequency of 44kHz if the entire audio spectru m is to be preserved.
  • the function of digital audio players is to reproduce an audio signal driving a magnetic coil or piezoelectric crystal to move air and produce sound, not to produce light.
  • the mass of a speaker or transducer acts as a natural filter, its inertia responsible for removing man unwanted frequencies and spikes.
  • the inductance of a speaker coil naturally forms a simple low-pass filter.
  • audio reproduction favors low frequencies and has to be driven with high currents produced by means of power amplification, in order to faithfully reproduce high frequency tones.
  • the amplifier is intentionally driven into distortion as long as the harmonics sound "good",
  • the harmonic spectral content, used for driving LEDs in phototherapy is key to achieving bioresonance with specific biophysical process such as electron conduction, ionic transport, molecular bonding, transient thermal conduction, and steady-state heating of cells, tissue and organs., regardless of whether analog or digital synthesis is used is generating the waveforms for the phototherapy.
  • DSP 411 may be used to selectively filter certain frequencies and notes from an audio stream while suppressing other tones that may be adverse to phototherapeutic treatment, for example odd harmonics created by cymbal crashes. Therefore, the data rate at which D/A converter 410 is loaded with new data should be equal to no less than twice the highest frequency being reproduced as LED current modulation by MOSFET driver 215a.
  • D/A converter 410, DSP converter 411, and audio codec 412 ma be synchronized b a common digital clock signal 414, often generated by dividing down the oscillations of a crystal (xtai ' j oscillator.
  • While digital filtering may make music and tones reproduced on a speaker or headphone sound unSistenable to the human ear, removing unwanted harmonics and spectral content from LED drive waveforms in phototherapy is important in achieving tissue specificity and high treatment efficacy during phototherapy treatments,
  • Another inventive method disclosed herein to avoid the complexit and added costs of analog signal processing, digital filtering, or aud io mixing to produce chords of tones is to combine an analog synthesized waveform with a second digital pulse frequency achieved by digitally "strobing" an analog oscillating waveform,
  • a method employs the single frequency oscillator 236 to feed the reference current input of MOSFET driver 215 while strobing the MOSFET driver on and off using digital synthesizer 203a.
  • Figure 23 A illustrates the case wherein the frequency of the clock signal is higher than the frequenc rd of the sinusoidal!y oscillating reference current, i.e. the first of the methods described above.
  • a 2921 lz oscillating sinusoidal, reference current 421 (D4) with a period T3 ⁇ 4 - 3.42msec and an average value 422 clearly has a longer period and. lower frequency than the digital pulses of an Enable signal 423 having a clock period Tcsock.
  • the specific frequency of the digital pulses of Enable signal 423 may be any value provided that fdo k is at least double the sine wave frequency fref.
  • MOSPET driver 215 outputs zero volts, i.e. ground, whenever Enable 423 is at a logic zero and the analog value of oscillating reference current 421 whenever Enable signal 423 is a logic one or "high” state.
  • the resulting waveform is equivalent to multiplying the analog sine wave by the digital multiplier of "1" or "0" for each moment of time, essentially “chopping” a sine wave into pieces.
  • the LED current waveform shown in graph 420b comprises small pulses of current of varying height, where the collection of pulses forms an envelope 425a, 425b, 425c, or 42Sd (individually and collectively as 425 ⁇ having the same frequency and phase as oscillating reference current 421.
  • the difference of these envelopes is a variation only in amplitude depending on the ratio of ton to of Enable signal 423,
  • the duty factor of the Enable signal 423. i.e., ton/Tcioe*. acts as PWM brightness control, controlling the average current of the sinusoidal envelope 425 and hence LED brightness by pulse width modulation, without changing the frequenc or phase of the sinusoidal reference current 421,
  • Figure 24 illustrates the case vhere the Enable signai is digitally strobed at a frequency friw.it that is lower than the frequency IV. ⁇ i of the sinusoidally oscillating reference current, i.e. where faiKk ⁇ f ⁇
  • a fixed-frequency constantly oscillating reference current 462 with period n-f and average value 464 oscillates with longer period and lower freq uency than digital pulses of Enable 4 1 having a clock period Tciock.
  • Each clock period Tciock is subdivided into two intervals - toff when Enable 461 is at a logic zero or biased in an "off" condition, and i-m when Enable 461 is biased at a logic one or "high” state.
  • MOSFET driver 215 outputs zero volts, i.e. ground, whenever Enable 461 is at a !ogic zero.
  • MOSFET driver 2 IS outputs the time varying analog values of oscillating reference current 462.
  • the output of the MOSFET driver 215a does not result in a single, constant LED current but whatever portion of the sinusoidal, oscillation in voltage and current is occurring at that time.
  • the resulting waveform is equivalent to multiplying the analog sine wave by the digital multiplier of " " or "0” for each moment of time,, essentially “chopping” the sine wave into short intervals or “snippets” of oscillation.
  • the LED current waveform shown in graph 460b comprises the same intervals of duration t ⁇ m, where the LED cu rrent 466 completes one or several oscillating cycles before it is is shut off as shown by line 467, for a duration toff and thereafter repeating the entire cycle.
  • reference current waveform 463 includes a DC offset with an average value 465, as shown in graph 460a
  • the resulting LED current waveforms 468 shown in graph 460b, exhibit identical AC oscillator behavior, except that the magnitude of the oscillation is reduced, resulting in oscillator perturbations in brightness of an LED string that repeatedly conducts for a duration ton and then temporarily is interrupted for a duration toff before resuming its conduction and small signal oscillations. Note that the absence or presence of a DC offset in the oscillatory reference current has no impact on the harmonic spectra of the two-note chord,
  • the method can be implemented at low cost as show in Figure 26 because the oscillator 236 used to create the sine wave can also be used to drive a simple divide by 2, 4 or 8 counter 482 to simply generate the digital clock pulses needed as the Bnable signal input to MOSFET driver 215a. Because the oscillating reference 36 exhibits sinusoidal transitions too slow for cleaning triggering counter 482, an intervening Schmidt trigger or comparator 481 with hysteresis and high input impedance is inserted between the oscillator 236 and the counter 482, Each factor of 2 in frequency division implemented by counter 482 represents an octave in musical notes, e.g. D8 divided by 2 is D7, D8 divided by is D6 and so on.
  • analog synthesis involves sinusoidal ly varying the reference or bias current to the LED current control circuit
  • digital synthesis involves pulsing the LED current on-and-off in constantly varying durations to synthesize a sine wave (or chords of multiple frequencies of sine waves).
  • Pulse modulation techniques include both fixed-frequency "pulse width modulation”, commonly referred to by the acronym PWM, and variable-frequency “pulse frequency modulation”,, referred to by the acronym PFM.
  • pulsed digital waveforms 243 througii 258 do not specifically illustrate digital sinusoidal synthesis
  • the ability to change the average LED current from a level shown by dashed line 272 to a higher level 273 simply by increasing the LED current pulse width 267 to a l nger pulse width 268. Since the frequency of both of pulses 267 and 268 is equal to 1/ ⁇ , this represents the principle of "pulse width modulation", also known as fixed-frequency PWM, one means by which to perform sinusoidal synthesis digitally.
  • the alternative method of digital synthesis is exemplified b comparing pulses 268 and 269 at times te and t ⁇ s used to increase the average LED current from a level shown by dashed line 273 to 274 by varying the LED on-time and frequency, L esammlung since T2 is greater than ⁇ , the frequenc of pulse 268 (1/Ti) is greater than the frequency of pulse 269 (I/T2),
  • Variable frequency PFM methods ma comprise fixed -on time or fixed-off time modulation schemes, Variable frequency PFM methods are often avoided because of concerns of time-varying signals contributing to dy namically changing electromagnetic interference resulting in noise that is difficul to filter.
  • the enable signal produced by the digital synthesizer circuitry has a large digital "fan-out,” meaning that one digital synthesizer can foe used to control many channels and MOSFET drivers.
  • FIG. 27C An example of a large fan-out is illustrated in Figure 27C where digital synthesizer 203 has a single output and is used to drive the Enable input of numerous MOSFET drivers from 215a through 2 l5n, where n is a variable and does not necessarily represent the 1 th letter of the English alphabet, i n this example, where digitai synthesizer 203 has a single output, all the channels of LED drivers will exhibit the same digital waveform and synthesize the same sinusoids synchronously.
  • This centralized approach allows one digitai synthesizer to connect to all the MOSFET drivers using a shared conductive signal path, whether a wire, conductive printed circuit hoard (PCB) trace, or a data bus.
  • PCB conductive printed circuit hoard
  • FIGs 27A, 2 IB, and 27C illustrate and contrast various combinations of digital synthesizers and independent channels of LED drive
  • each MOSFET driver 215a through 215n is controlled by its own corresponding digital synthesizer 203a through 203n (collectively as digital synthesizer 203), where the subscript "n" rep resents a mathematical variable and not the 14 th letter of the Engl ish alphabet.
  • digital synthesizer 203 collectively as digital synthesizer 203
  • These various digital synthesizers shown may occupy one, several, or completely independent integrated circuits representing either a centralized, clustered, or fully distributed system.
  • each LED channel and associated MOSFET drive are controlled by their own dedicated digital synthesizer, this implementation offers complete flexibility in synthesizing sinusoids of channel- unique frequency, magnitude, and duration should it he desired, As such, it is important that the channels be synchronized to a common clock reference, or noise may result from channei-to-channel interactions and aliasing, in this independent and autonomous approach, each of d igital synthesizers 203a-203n must connect to its corresponding one of MOSFET drivers 2 lSa-2 ISn with a dedicated wire or conductive PCS trace.
  • FIG. 27B Another method which minimizes duplication of circuitry and minimizes IC real estate without sacrificing flexibility is a centralized method of control shown in Figure 27B comprising a single digital synthesizer 203 having multiple
  • the centralized digital synthesizer 203 must uniquely address every MOSFET driver with a separate and distinct wire or conductor, if discrete wires or conductive PCB traces are employed, the digital synthesizer must be located near, i.e. in the physical vicinity of, the MOSFET drivers or otherwise a iarge number conductors of extended length will be required.
  • a data bus may be employed to distribute the data for ail channels, but then each channel requires a decoder circuit to uniquely identify its particular control signal from the others. .
  • FIG. 28A One implementation of the digital synthesizer 203a of Figure 27A is schematically represented in Figure 28A, comprising a digital counter 503, a latch 506,, and a digital buffer string comprising inverters 507a and 507b, with the output of digital synthesizer 203a controlled by ciock signals 501 and parallel data bus 502 generated by microcontroller pC 500, Inverters 507a and 507b are shown to illustrate that the output of latch 506 comprising minimum size logic transistors must be buffered to drive the input capacitance of one or more MOSFET drivers 215a, as well as to compensate for any parasitic resistance and capacitance present in the conductive interconnect between digital synthesizer 203a and electrical load, represented by current sink circuit 201a. As such, the current drive capability and the corresponding gate width of the MOSFETs used in inverter 507b should be sized accordingly to drive the Enable line at the requisite speed.
  • pC 500 writes data from its pattern EPROM onto parallel output lines 502.
  • pC 500 also generates clock signals on lines 501, comprising a Sync pulse and dock signal ⁇ .
  • a Sync pulse sets the output of iatch 506 to logic " " which, buffered by inverters 507a and 507b enables MOSFHT driver 215a into an on state, driving the gate of MOSFET 216a to produce a programmed current ILED and illuminating LED string 205a to a fixed brightness.
  • the Sync pulse causes digital counter 503 to load the data present on parallel data bus 502 into the counter's register 504, shown by example as an 8-blt word.
  • Pulses of clock signal 8 cause digital counter 503 to count down linearly, decrementing the remaining count by one with each pulse. When the count reaches zero, digital counter 503 generates a pulse on output line 505, resetting the output of latch 506 to "0" and disabling MOSFET driver 215a.
  • the timing diagram of Figure 28B illustrates digital synthesizer operation of digital counter 503 in graph 510a and operation of latch 506 in graph 51 b.
  • digital counter 503 loads data 512 upon load instruction 511 triggered by the Sync pulse on one of clock signal lines 501.
  • Repeated pulses of the clock signal ⁇ subsequently decrement the counter register 504 once for each interval Te, eventually counting down to zero count at time 513, During this time, the output of the digital synthesizer 203a outputs a logic "1" state as shown by waveform 516.
  • digital counter 503 is binary and may comprise a ripple counter or a sy nchronous counter.
  • the counter 503 may be realized by software within pC 500, eliminating the need for hardware counters and latches, but still performing similar functions.
  • the PWM counter function within digital synthesizer 203a may be implemented discretely, or using a dedicated timer function within pC 500, or implemented in software within pC 500. When software timers are employed, however, care must be maintained to insure that interrupts do not suspend or delay regular counter operation, or an incorrect frequency may be synthesized.
  • the resulting LED current waveforms of the disclosed LED drive system comprise pulses of controlled widths and varying duration repeated at a fixed clock rate.
  • the average current in an LED string can be controlled digitally.
  • Such a method can be referred to a fixed- frequency pulse width modulation or PWM control Examples of fixed-frequency PW generation of pulses of varying on-time are illustrated in Figure 28C.
  • PWM average current control can be used for dynamic brightness adjustment of digitally pulsed LED currents as shown in Figure 8B and described in previously cited U.S. Application No. 14/073,371.
  • PWM methods disclosed herein can be used for digital synthesis of sinusoidal waveforms, driving LED strings in an inventive manner free from spectral contamination in the audio spectrum,
  • pulse 5Z0 comprises an on-time tonso which is half that of the clock period T3 ⁇ 4>.nc specifically with a digital value of '"1" for the portion 520 of the waveform and with a digital value of "0" for the remaining portion 521 of the T&ync period.
  • the on-time ton 50%*Ts>- «c
  • the off-time ton? - 1- ton 50% «Tsy»c, and in this particular case ⁇ ton;
  • the bottom row of waveforms show Figure 28C illustrate pulses with duty factor less than 50%, specifically duty factors of 39%, 29%, 21%, 18% and 1%.
  • the dashed line 529 representing the average value and the on -time shown by pulse 528 are not drawn to scale in order to bette illustrate the variables.
  • Each example in the top row is located above it complementary waveform in the bottom row, i.e. the mirror image condition around the 50% condition.
  • waveform 524 with an on-time tto»6i and an a 61% duty factor has a duty factor 11% above the 50% center value
  • waveform 527 with an on-time t >. «: ⁇ , 5 « and an a 39% duty factor has a duty factor 11% below the 50% center value.
  • any mathematical function can be generated from PWM modulated digital pulses.
  • a series of digital pulses 590 of varying width e.g. too, tons2, t ⁇ m2i, etc.
  • si ne wave 592 ca n be synthesized to have any freq uency and period independent of the clock frequenc l/Tsync, provided that the clock frequency 1/Tsym-is higher than the highest frequency 1 Tsynt being synthesized.
  • the clock frequency fsym- * 1 Tsync is chosen to be near or greater 22kf3 ⁇ 4 neither the digital clock frequency nor its harmonics are present in the audio spectrum, and the resulting digital synthesis produces no spectral contamination that could adversely impact phototherapy efficacy.
  • a 21,024 Hz clock can be employed to synthesize a 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave with 24 independen Tsym- lime intervals.
  • D6 1,168Hz
  • Such an approach is equivalent to breaking a 360° sine wave into 24 pieces of 15° and 35.7 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ each as illustrated in graph 600 of the digital synthesizer's normalized magnitude versus time shown in Figure 29B.
  • the magnitude of each pulse determi ned by the PWM duty factor has the same average amplitude as that of a D/A converter with the same resolution.
  • the actual analog value is not present in the ampiitude of a waveform but in its duration determined by the time average value of the current or voltage.
  • This duration is illustrated by waveforms 604a through 604d having PWM duty factors of 50%, 100%, 75% and 25% corresponding to arc angles of 0°, 90°, 150° and 330° respectively.
  • the a erage value 602 of any 15° time increment comprises a portion of time when the output is at the full scale of 100% and a the remainder of the period where the output is at 0%,
  • the average value shown as sinusoid 600 is in between, varying in proportion to the duty factor of each time slice,
  • FIG. 29C A direct comparison between analog synthesis and fixed-frequency PWM digital synthesis of a sinusoid is shown in Figure 29C, where the vertical axis represents the ampiitude of the synthesized sine wave in a given interval while the horizontal axis represents time within the interval
  • D AC D/A converter
  • the amplitude of the signal shown in graph 620a controlled by the DAC output remains at a constant voltage for the entire period T . ⁇ , ⁇ ) ⁇ .> ⁇ . in any given interval
  • the normalized DAC output has a value V ⁇ >a /1.2V ranging from 0% to 100% and may vary in the next time increment by a change in magnitude 622.
  • These magnitude changes generally comprise linear steps of ⁇ , +2 ⁇ , etc, according to any desired resolution comprising 256 levels for an 8-hit DAC, 4096 levels for a 12- bit DAC and 65,536 steps for a 16-bit DAC. Since the instantaneous voltage of the waveform is set fay the DAC and not fay a PWM counter, then the highest required clock frequency to implement analog synthesis is l/Tsync with the period T-.vm- adjusted in accordance with the highest frequency to be reproduced with fidelity.
  • the on-time ton is dynamically adjusted i n linear increments of time ⁇ At, ⁇ 2 ⁇ , etc, set by a 8-bit, 12- bit, or 16-bit counter having a resolution of 256, 4096 or 65,536 steps respectively according to the desired resolution unless otherwise limited by available clock freq uencies.
  • each time interval e.g. 604a, includes a portion of the time current is flowing in the LED and a portion of time where the drive current is zero.
  • the cells in living tissue cannot respond to the presence of this high frequency, especially since it represents a small signal change in the average current from one interval to the next in essence the cells provide natural filtering.
  • Another filtering effect occurs because of capacitance in the LEDs and the MOSFET drive circuit which unavoidably softens the driving current waveform edges and filters hig frequency noise, particularly harmonics beyond the audio spectrum, Lastly additional capacitance can be added to the LED drive channels if required.
  • Sinusoidal reconstruction with good fidelity i.e. sinusoidal synthesis with minimal harmonics from distortion of the waveform from its mathematically ideal shape, requires a sufficient number of intervals of the highest sinusoidal frequency being reproduced fsym:>(max).
  • this clock frequency f S y» c is given by the relation.
  • ⁇ intervals is the number of ti me intervals per 360° for the highest frequency waveform being synthesized and f S y»th(max) is the highest frequency waveform being synthesized.
  • This hyperbolic relationship that smaller angles require more time intervals to describe one full 360° cycle of a sine wave, means in PWM synthesis higher resolution, requires a faster clock.
  • This faster PW clock signal fe may be generated from an even higher fixed, frequency oscillator f -, preferably temperature compensated to minimize drift, using either a constant or dynamically adjustable frequency ratio.
  • the process of dividing the synthesized sinusoidal waveform into small rectangles of fixed duration and of height equal to the magnitude of the function is analogous to the mathematical procedure called "integration" in calculus, in integral calculus, as the time increments "dt" become infinitely thin, the synthesized waveform is reproduced precisel and the area under the curve, the energy and harmonic content of the phototherapy excitation, is precisely controlled.
  • T sy nc is identical for both analog and digital synthesis.
  • the Sync clock used to load D/A converters in analog synthesis or to load the digital counter in digital PWM synthesis has a frequency fv..- ; > ⁇ - of 21 ,024Hz, a frequenc sufficiently high that it and all its harmonics occur at the extreme upper range of the audio frequency range and beyond,
  • Graph 640a in f i ure 29D illustrates a plot of the clock frequency required in the system as a function of the maximum frequency sine wave to be synthesized, shown ranging from D4 to D8.
  • the y-axis represents the highest frequency clock which in the case of analog synthesis represented by line 641 is the sync pulse used to load the D/A converter at a frequency of f S y «c and in the case of digital PWM synthesis is the digitai counter dock having a frequency f «.
  • the digital counter clock is 4,096 times that of f S ync or over 86 MHz, too high to be shown on the graph.
  • Graph 640b also shown in Figure 29D illustrates the linear impact of increasing the number of time intervals used to synthesize 360° of the highest frequency sine wave being generated, where the number of intervals varies from 8 to 30. As shown fay line 645 the clock rate required to synthesize a 2,336Hz (D7) sine wave remains below 5MHz for employing a 6-bit counter offering 64
  • line 647 illustrates that a 10-bit PWM counter can only be used with a small number of intervals, 8 or less, while remaining below 25MHz.
  • Using fewer than .1,2 intervals per 360° results in distortion in the synthesized sinusoid not compensated for by higher bit precision, meaning the benefit of more precisely setting the average voltage in a given time interval by using 12-bit PWM counters or iarger, is not worth sacrificing the number of time intervals used to construct the sinusoid.
  • the number of time intervals for practical considerations ranges from 12 time-intervals each 30° wide, to 24 intervals of 15°.
  • the following tables details the clock frequency required to synthesize a 4,672Hz (08 ⁇ sinusoid using a various sized PWM counters,
  • the shaded boxes are not viable either because the clock frequency exceeds 25MHz or because the number of time intervals are too few.
  • This analysis suggests that the optimum condition is a 21,5MHz PWM clock driving a 8 ⁇ bit PWM counter to synthesize a 4,672Hz (D8) sinusoid from 18 time intervals, each 20° in width.
  • Timing source and clock generator circuit 660 made in accordance with this invention is illustrated in Figure 30, comprising oscillator 661, digital counters 662 and 664 and trim register 693 to create clock signals 501 used to drive the digital synthesizer 203 shown in. Figure 28A.
  • Oscillator 661 may he realized using a. crystal oscillator, a R-C relaxation oscillator, a ring oscillator, or a silicon MEMs oscillator.
  • a crystal oscillator comprising a crystal shard of quartz mechanically tuned to resonate a specific frequency is advantageous for its temperature independence, but it is unfortunately relatively fragile compared to semiconductors.
  • a R-C relaxation oscillator employs a resistor-capacitor network to charge the capacitor at a set rate, discharging the capacitor rapidly after reach ing a comparator or Schmidt trigger threshold, and repeating the process interminably.
  • timing source 660 are fully integrated into ⁇ € 500 (shown in Figure 2 A) and are entirely user-programmable in firmware o software.
  • Clock precision is achieved by trimming the resistor in an R-C oscillator and/or using materials that are relatively temperature independent.
  • Another alternative is the to create a time source using a large number of inverters connected head-to-tail, i.e. output to input, to form a loop or ring. When powered, the signal propagates around the inverter ring at a frequency i accordance to the inverters' propagation delays. An od d number of inverters are required to insure the oscillations continue.
  • MEMs silicon micromachine devices
  • cantilever small vibrating spring or diving board
  • eapacitive coupling or peizo-resistive variation monitored electrically by eapacitive coupling or peizo-resistive variation and tuned to resonate according to its specific mass.
  • the oscillator 661 produces a 25 Hz oscillating signal which is then adjusted to any lower desired frequency, e.g.
  • counter 662 can be preset to a fixed value by software, if however, the frequency of oscillator 661 varies with manufacturing, functional trimming using trim register 663 is normally performed during manufacturing, in functional trimming, measurement of frequency fe is made repeatedly while the count being loaded into counter 662 by the digital value stored in trim register 663 is adjusted until the desired frequency is achieved and the frequency source calibrated.
  • This PWM clock frequency is supplied to the digital synthesizer and also to the input of programmable counter 664, converting the PWM clock frequency into the Sync p lse having a frequency f syn c that is, as shown, 256 times lower than fa
  • the divide by factor for counter 664 shou ld match the desired resolution of the PWM output, e.g. 8-bits, iO-bits etc. in this manner the PWM digital counter 664 will count pulses corresponding to the frequency fe and the Sync pulse occurring 256 pulses later will reset the LED driver and restart the count.
  • the effective resolution of sinusoidal generation using the disclosed invention can be estimated by multiplying the number of time intervals used in constructing the sinusoid times the number of PWM duty factors possible, Le. the bit resolution of the PWM counter. Multiplying 18 time increments, approximately equivalent to 4-bit precision, times 256 possible values of D generated from an 8-bit counter means for sinusoids up to 5,425Hz, the total resolution is approximateiy equivalent to 12-bits or 4096 combinations.
  • bandwidth the digital synthesizer's resolution declines in proportion to the sinusoid's frequency, declining to 11-bit precision at 9,344Hz (09) and maintains at least 10-bit resolution a ll the way to the upper edge of the audio spectrum.
  • the bandwidth limitation and its impact is illustrated graphically in Figure 31 wherein curve 671 shows the aggregate synthesizer resolution versus the maximum synthesized frequency f nth (max) in both the number of possible combi nations and in their bit equivalence.
  • the accuracy of digital synthesizer 203a remains constant at a value exceeding 12-bits until the frequency of 5.425kHz, the digital synthesizer's bandwidth, i reached (line 673), above which the resolution declines proportionately with f sy n «i ⁇ max).
  • the digital synthesizer 203a still maintains an overall resolution of ID-bits. If the number of time intervals used to synthesize the highest frequency sine wave is maintained at intervals ⁇ 18, then the drop in aggregate resolution 671 must be accompanied by a decrease in PWM counter resolution as shown by line 672. Even operating above synthesizer 203a's bandwidth, up to the edge of the ultrasonic spectrum 175, the PWM counter resolution still exceeds 6-bits.
  • the clock pulses used to control the PWM on- time (line 678 ⁇ and the clock pulses used to generate it (line 677) occur in the MHz range and are not presen in the LED drive excitation waveforms whatsoever,
  • synthesizing any sine wave having a frequency fsym3 ⁇ 4 below 917Hz with 15° time intervals or below 1,222 Hz with 20° time intervals mean that the Sync clock pulse frequency f s »c will be sufficiently low that it fails below the frequenc represented by line 175 and into the audio band, specifically shown as points 684a and 684b, creating the potential for unwanted spectral contamination affecting phototherapy efficacy.
  • microcontroller ⁇ xC 500 is shown as the source
  • Data registers may comprise static or dynamic memory, i.e. SRAM or DRAM, but since they are modified, i.e. "written" frequently and rapidly during synthesis, the data registers operate at a frequency too high for non-volatile memory such as EPROM, P OM or flash, used to store the phototherapy patterns and algorithms.
  • step 702a the register 705 containing data that represents the first time interval Tsync is loaded into the Tsync counter 664, shown in Figure 30.
  • step 702b the data in register 706,
  • PWM counter 503 representing the on-time of the pulse within the time interval lY -ac, is loaded into PWM counter 503 shown in Figure 28A.
  • step 702c the output of PWM latch 506 is set “high” enabling MOSFET driver 215a and illuminating LED string 205a, Concurrently, Tsym- counter 664 and PWM counter 503 commence countingmodules from the 3 ⁇ 4 clock.
  • step 702d PWM counter 503 counts down to zero while the Tsync counter continues unabated.
  • step 702c the output of PWM latch 506 is reset "low” disabling MOSFET driver 215a and turning off LED string 205a as described by the step entitled “Reset Latch, Disable LED, Continue , ⁇ .3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ Count” (step 702c).
  • the Tsyn counter continues to count through the step entitled “Decrement T&ypc Counter to Zero” until the Tsync count reaches zero.
  • the size of counters 702a and 702b are adjustable, able to synthesize a single cycle of a sinusoid or multiple cycles.
  • the duty factor of a given pulse may be cal culated as the ratio of the on-time determined by the count stored in register 706 and the ⁇ 3 ⁇ 4-; ⁇ time interval stored, in register 705. While in fixed frequency PWM synthesis, the sync time interval i register 70S remains constant and the on-time in register 706 is adjusted to control the duty factor, the Tsync period can be adjusted to synthesize any given sinusoid of an arbitrary frequency i ⁇ , V nv;- > .
  • the algorithm shown in Figure 33 accommodates changing the value of Tsym.- in accordance with the frequency of the sinusoid being synthesized and to maintain a desired resolution. For example, f S y «r. can be
  • a 292Hz (D4) sinusoid may be synthesized using an 8-bit PWM counter and either 24 or 18 time intervals, in graph 730 of Figure 34A, sinusoid 73 la is synthesized using 24 evenly-spaced intervals each corresponding to 15° of arc and having a duration of 140.7 ⁇ 56 €. Each interval has an average value shown by steps 731b determined by an 8-bit PWM counter having 256 durations summarized in t ble 732.
  • the sinusoidal waveform 73 " la will result In operation, at the first time point representing: 0°, the PWM counter is loaded with hex number 80 for 50%, the sin of 50°, Because of a quantization error in the counter, i.e. 128/255, the nearest duty factor is 50.2%, the synthesizer exhibiting a slight discrepancy from its ideal average output.
  • the PWM counter After 14 sec, one Tsync time Interval, the PWM counter is loaded with a new value AO hex (160 decimal) changing the duty factor to 62.7%, The process continues sequentially driving the average magnitude higher till at 0.86ms the PWM counter is loaded with FF hex reaching a duty factor of 100%. Thereafter the PWM duty factor declines reaching a minimum value at 2.57ms of 0 corresponding to the sin of 270°. The process then repeats to synthesize additional cycles of sinusoids.
  • the major negative aspect of this sinusoidal synthesis is the noise generated by f c - 7,008Hz shown in table 732. While it does not comprise an entire spectrum of audio frequency harmonics present in presen t day digital pulsed systems intentionally operating in the audio band, it still represents audio spectral contamination.
  • sinusoid 736a is synthesized using 18 evenly- spaced intervals each corresponding to 20° of arc and having a duration of
  • Each interval has an average value shown by steps 7 6b determined by an 8-bit PWM counter having 256 durations summarized in table 737.
  • the sinusoidal waveform 736a will result
  • the advantage of dividing a sine wave into 20° intervals of time over that of 15° intervals is the lower resolution allows a higher frequency sinusoid to he synthesized with a clock frequency fe.
  • the disadvantage of employing 20° Intervals is that the nearest points to the maximum and minimum values on the sinusoid at 90° and 270° occur at 80°, 100°, 260° and 280° causing some flattening of the synthesized sine wave, slight distortion appearing as if the waveform was "clipped".
  • FIG. 34C A time graph of PWM pulses 739 used to synthesize sinusoid 736a and its sequence of average value steps 736b is shown in greater detail in Figure 34C.
  • the average value of each step 736b is listed as a percentage for each interval along with the corresponding decimai equivalent, of the binary count loaded into the 8-bit PWM counter.
  • Figure 34 D illustrates synthesis of a single cycle of 1,168Hz (D6) sinusoid 741a with PWM average value shown by steps 741b comprising IB time intervals of 20°.
  • the PWM ciock frequency fe and the sync interval T, m are adjusted from fe ⁇ 1.3 6 hz to 5.198MHz and from syne - 1 ⁇ .3 5 to 49.3 ⁇ , commensurate with the decrease in the period of the synthesized sinusoid from 3.42ms to 0.86ms as summarized in table 742.
  • the PVVM counter sequence used to synthesize sinusoid 741a is described in table 743 both in hexadecimal form and its decimal equivalent Since the Syne frequency is f e ⁇ 20,304Hz, no audio spectrum noise is generated.
  • Figure 34E illustrates the same data for synthesizing a 4,672Hz (D8) sinusoid 746a shown in graph comprising steps 746b formed in accordance with PWM count sequence shown in tabie 748 and clock periods shown in table 747. Comparing these conditions with the synthesis of lower frequency sinusoids tikistrates that the minimum frequency ciock rate requirements for the PWM ciock S3 ⁇ 4 change with synthesis accuracy, i.e. the number of ti me intervals used to synthesize the sinusoid (intervals), and with the frequency of the sinusoid being synthesized fsynth.
  • the PWM clock frequency fe increases in proportional to the frequency being synthesized with synthesis at 15° increments carrying a 33% overhead in added clock rate compared to 20° resolution.
  • This added accuracy only becomes limiting when synthesizing the 4,672Hi (DS ' J frequency or higher, because 28.7MHz exceeds the common clock frequency 2S H?. used in microcontrollers and for Ethernet
  • the table also clarifies that synthesis of a 292 ⁇ sine wave using the minimum frequency v, K results in noise in the audio spectrum,, at approximately 5kHz and 7kHz. This problem can be avoided using over-sampling, discussed below.
  • the magni tude of the synthesized sine wave can be reduced simply by changing the sequential PWM code, as shown in table 753 in Figure 35A.
  • the average value of the function is +25% and varies with an amplitude 754 of ⁇ 25%, ranging in total from 0% to 50%, i.e. with a sinusoidal output of 25% ⁇ 25%.
  • the magnitude and the mean value of the digitally synthesized sinusoid can be controlled simply by adjusting the PWM code sequence labeled "Hex" in table 753 to lower magnitude numbers.
  • modification of the PWM code as shown in table 773 can be used to further limit the AC swing to a small signal level, e.g. ⁇ 10% variation.
  • This AC com onent 774 can be considered small signal when compared to the DC component 765 of the waveform 7 1, comprising +60% offset 765 in the entire sinusoid.
  • the resulting spectrum is shown in Figure 35D illustrating a sinusoid of limited amplitude (line 781) at frequency of 1, 168Hz (D6) (line 780).
  • the sinusoid of limited amplitude (Sine 781) sits atop a DC offset (line 782).
  • direct current or DC has a frequency of zero Hertz.
  • the Sync clock has a frequency (line 783) of 28kHz, well outside the audio spectrum,
  • An LED phototherapy drive system made in. accordance with this invention is also capab!e of digitally synthesizing chords of multiple frequencies for driving LED strings.
  • more than one frequency pattern e.g. a higher-frequency sine wave o period Tsyntiu and a lower-frequency sine wave of period Tsymh-2.
  • the duration of the pattern is chosen to synthesize at least one cycle of the lower frequency.
  • This means the overall time of the pattern has a duration of at least Tsym-ha and over the same interval more than one 360° cycle of the higher frequency sinusoid will necessarily occur.
  • the rati o of the sinusoids is an integer, i.e.
  • T e resulting curve 801 shown in graph 800 comprises the same pattern of synthesized duty factor and digital PWM codes described in table 803a for the duration from 0 to 0.214ms and then repeats in columns 803b, 803c, and 803d for the corresponding time intervals from 0.214ms to 0.428ms, from 0.428ms to 0.642ms, and from 0.642ms to 0.856ms.
  • each function in order to accurately add two or more waveforms together to form a chord in digital synthesis disclosed herein, each function must have a defined value at the same time points, even if the value must be interpolated from other time points.
  • both sine waves must have a corresponding value at each ti me increment of 0.214ms. So while synthesis of one 360° cycle of higher-frequency sine wave 801 will comprise onl 18 time intervals, the lower frequency sine wave will comprise 72 time intervals, many more than required for its high-fidelity synthesis. Synthesis of a waveform with more time intervals than is practically needed for high fidelity reproduction is herein referred to as "oversarapiing".
  • amplitude of two or more sinusoids of differing frequencies may be added to digitally synthesize a chord of frequencies.
  • pattern tables 815a, 815b, and 815c shown in Figure 37B defining the PWM counts used to synthesize sinusoid 811, only the shaded rows are needed to synthesize the waveform with fidelity. The rest of the PWM counts represent oversampled data. Since only one-in-four PWM counts are needed to accuratel produce the desired sine wave, the drive data is 4X, Le, four-times, oversampled. in this case, such a waveform can be directly added together with sinusoid 801 of Figure 36 to produce a new waveform comprising a chord of two sine waves.
  • FIG. 38 The process of adding waveforms to produce a new waveform comprising a chord of the two component fre uencies is shown graphically in Figure 38 where graph 820a illustrates the two component frequencies of the chord, namel one cycle of 1,168Hz (D6) sinusoid 811 and four-cycles of 4,672Hz (D8) sinusoid 801, each equal in amplitude having a peak-to-peak amplitude of 1.00% and an average duty factor of 50%.
  • D6 1,168Hz
  • D8 4,672Hz
  • 4-cycle sinusoid 801 has a period ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ 0.21ms sliown by line 821
  • lower frequency sinusoid 811 has a period l ⁇ ya m - 0,86 shown by line 822, four times longer than Tsyntiu. Because the two curves are integral multiples of one another, oversanipling facilitates easy addition of the PW counts at each time interval in order to synthesize the chord of the two notes.
  • the resulting composite frequency representing a chord of the component frequencies is shown by waveform 823 in graph 820b in Figure 38,
  • the sinusoidal nature of the waveform and its constituent frequencies are not easily identified from the time waveform shown in graph 820b, In the frequency spectrum shown in Figure 39, however, it can readily be seen that the synthesized frequencies represented by Sines 828 and 827 equal to the 6 th and 8 th octaves of D are of equal amplitude and the only synthesized frequency below the upper limit of the audio spectrum (line 175),
  • the sync clock occurs at a frequenc 18 times that of the highest frequency, i.e. 18 ⁇ 4,672 ⁇ ⁇ 84,096Hz (line 829) well into the ultrasonic spectrum.
  • the column arc degrees ⁇ combined with the frequency of the synthesized waveform fs n h, e.g. fsyafc « 4,672 Hz, results in a calculated time 0.012ms.
  • time interval table 843 comprising a column of angles versus corresponding time points, if two cycles are desired, i.e. number of cycles ⁇ ⁇ 2, then the height of time interval table 843 is doubled where the time column extends from 0ms to 0.428ms in increments of 0,012ms and the corresponding arc angle ranges from 0° to 720 s in increments of 20°.
  • the time interval table 843 of time versus arc angle ⁇ is next processed line- by-line by normalized mathematical function 840, in the example by sinusoid function A»(sin[4>) + 1) + B] ⁇ 100%.
  • the function is normalized, i.e., represented as a percentage from 0% to 100%.
  • A represents the amplitude and 8 the offset of the sine wave.
  • the amplitude A is calculated from the vertical midpoint between the peak-to-peak values of the sine wave; the offset B is calculated from the minima of the sine wave.
  • the multiplier A 0,5 and B ⁇ 0 so that the output of normalized mathematical function 840 is ⁇ 0.5 ⁇ ( ⁇ )+1) + 0] having values ranging from 0% to 100% with an a erage value of 50%
  • the output of normalized mathematical function 840 is [0.25 ⁇ sin( ) +1 ⁇ + 0] and ranges from 0% to 50% with an average value of 25%
  • the output of normalized mathematical function 840 is [0.25«(sln( ⁇ t » )+l ⁇ + ⁇ 0.25] having values ranging from 25% to 75% with an average value of 50%
  • normalized mathematical function 840 is given by [0,i 0»(sin(4>)+l) + 0.60] with values ranging from 60% to 80% and an average value of 70%.
  • the preferred LED excitation pattern is a distortion free sinusoidal waveform with even harmonics, in other cases such as piiotodynamic therapy, ie. using photons to excite or chemically activate a chemical compound or pharmaceutical, or in efforts to target cellular destruction of bacteria or viruses, other waveforms may also be beneficial.
  • normalized mathematical function 840 may therefore represent any time varying and preferably cyclical, function and is not limited to sinusoids. Regardless of the function, it is convenient to scale the analog output of this operation to "exact values" ranging between 0% to 100%, i.e. normalized data. While normalization is not actually required, limiting the data range by scaling and normalizatio to a range of 0% to 100% makes
  • the term ' " ' " exact values" for the purposes of this disclosure means greater accuracy than the LSB, i.e. the least significant bit of the digitization process in subsequent steps of the pattern generating process.
  • the resulting output includes an analog duty factor ranging from 0% to 100%. in the event that the sinusoid has
  • analog sine table 844 is then inputted into an analog-to-digital converter 841, wherein each percentage value of the function (A «sm(4>) + 1) + B is converted into a equivalent digital duty factor to later he used in a PWM counter to generate sinusoids.
  • the conversion process is chosen to match the bit resolution of the intended PWM counter.
  • the duty factor is a digitized value or count ranging from 0 to 255 in decimal format shown in digitized sine table 845.
  • the data may also be represented by a hexadecimal equivalent of this count ranging from 00 to FF, but in actual use, the PWM counter operates digitally using base- 2 Boolean logic. The process of digitization naturally rounds the exact analog value to its nearest digital equivalent value, the PWM count with an analog value closest to the original analog value input to analog-to-dfgltaS converter 841.
  • the decimal equivalent of the analog value stored in a nalog sine table 844 is then loaded into PWM counter emulator 842 to generate the quantized output "synthesized duty factor" a key component of pattern table 846 used to synthesize sinusoids in real time.
  • the synth dut factor column in pattern table 846 represents the analog synthesized value closest to the original exact value in analog sine table 844, the small different being the digitization error resulting by the conversion process of analog-to-digital converter 841. This error can be reviewed when creating pattern table 846 to determine if the agreement with the original is acceptable. If not, a higher bit resolution may be used with the caveat that the maximum frequency of the synthesized sinusoid may be reduced by employing higher resolution data conversion. While the decimal equivalent of the duty factor is used to drive the PWM counter controlling LED drive, the analog value in pattern table 846 is useful to drive display graphics,
  • chords of two or more sinusoids can be generated in real time or made in advance and stored in the pattern library as shown in the algorithm of Figure 42A.
  • the time interval table is generated from the input conditions for both sinusoid A having frequency fsymhA and sinusoid B having frequency syrithE.
  • the number of time interva ls and hence the gradation of arc angle ⁇ must be chosen to meet the minimum acceptable number of intervals on the higher frequency sinusoid.
  • the two sine waves should have the same time scale.
  • the lower frequency sine wave will be oversampied such as the one shown in Figure 37A, having a greater num ber of time intervals and a finer gradation of arc angles ⁇ than is required for synthesis with high fidelity.
  • Bach time-interval table is then converted into exact values of magnitude G(4 ) using normalized mathematical functions 850a and 850b and outpu in their corresponding analog sine tables (not shown] whereby
  • scalar multipliers 851a and 851b CA and Cs are then scaled by scalar multipliers 851a and 851b CA and Cs, After scaling, the magnitudes are added arithmetically together with any DC offset CDC using arithmetic logic unit (ALU) 851 or equivalent programs to facilitate a weighted-sum addition of the componen analog waveform data outputted from the normalized mathematical function generators 8S0a and 850b.
  • ALU arithmetic logic unit
  • Weighted Average (20 ⁇ ( ) + ⁇ ( ⁇ + ij/4
  • ALU 852 After mixing, the output of ALU 852 is then digitized using analog-to-digital converter 853, resulting in the signal magnitude represented by a digitai code used to control the on-time of a PWM counter. To complete the chord pattern table 855, the digital code is converted by PWM counter emulator 854 back into an analog value representing the duty factor. The only error introduced by this process is the single digitization error that occurs from rounding the weighted average output of ALU 852.
  • the algorithm of Figure 42A offers superior accuracy. This accuracy is especially beneficial when synthesizing complex pattern files for inclusion in a pattern library and used later for subsequent playback.
  • One disadvantage of the algorithm is complexity introduced by numerical weighted averaging of multiple analog values and requiring subsequent digitization, making it less amenable to real time synthesis of chords than purely digital signal
  • FIG. 42B An alternative approach using purel digital reconstruction to create chords, shown in Figure 42B, utilizes the algorithm described in Figure 41 to generate individual sinusoidal pattern files using normalized mathematical function A 860a and analog ⁇ to-digitaS conversion 861a to create sinusoid A pattern table 862a and similarly using normalized mathematical function B 860b and analog-to-digital conversion 861b to create sinusoid B pattern file 862b.
  • These individual pattern tables can be saved i digitai form in the pattern library and used later for generating chords.
  • the individual sinusoid pattern tables 862a and 862b are scaled, i.e. multiplied digitally by EA digital multiplier 860a and EB digital multiplier 860b respectively.
  • These scaled files are then added digitally to the digital EDC DC offset 863c and added using Boolean algebra in ALU 864, whose output is converted into a synthesis chord pattern by PWM counter emulator 854.
  • the data can be fed directly into a PWM counter to provide rea 1 time control of LE Ds.
  • One complexity of digital chord synthesis is creating files wherein the mathematical function of the composite waveform is continuous in amplitude and in slope, i.e. in its 1 st derivative, from the end of one pattern and the beginning of the next pattern.
  • This goat is most easily addressed by sinusoids having composite frequencies that are integral multiples of one another, i.e. where ⁇ is an integer, as illustrated in the examples of Figure 43.
  • the lower freq ency sinusoid 870 is com ined with higher frequency sinusoids 872, 873, 874, 875, 876 and 878 representing higher frequencies that are integral ⁇ muitipies of the frequency of sinusoid 870, specifically where ⁇ equals 2, 3, , 5, 6, and 8,
  • each of the sinusoids begins and ends at the same value, namely D - 50.2%.
  • the reason the dut factor is 50.2% rather than 50% is an artifact of the digitization process.
  • the PWM counter has 256 levels including 0 volts for a zero code, the number of maximum intervals is 255 steps, i.e. that 255 represents 100%. So code 128 is not exactly half of 255 steps, but instead is 128/255 ⁇ 50,2%
  • a chord comprising any mix of these two component frequencies will have the same amplitude at the beginning and end of the synthesized pattern and when repeated sequentially will form, a piecewise continuous waveform in amplitude and in its 1 st derivative function.
  • even m ultiple sinusoids 872, 874, 876 and 878 are preferred.
  • the sinusoids 872, 874, and 878 specifically being: multiples of two of the frequency of sinusoid 870, represent octaves of the fundamental,
  • One simple solution to overcoming discontinuities in fractional values of ⁇ > 1 is to employ more than one cycle of the lower fundamental frequency 3 ⁇ 4- ⁇ 2 - 1 Tsynth2 to define the total period of the pattern pTsymha.
  • the minimum number of required cycles can be determined by converting the decimal ratio into a fraction with the lowest common denominator. This lowest common denominator defines the numbe of cycles of the lower f equency fundamental in the pattern while the numerator defines the nu mfoer of the complete cycles of the higher frequency.
  • two sinusoids having a frequency ratio of 1.5 or fractionally as 3 /2 comprises two-cycles of lower frequency sinusoid f S ynt 2 shown by curve 880 and three-cycles of high frequency sinusoid sym-hi shown by curve 881 having the same start and end values. Because the component sinusoids start and end with the same value, any chord combining the two will also be continuous in magnitude and in its slope, i.e. its 1 st derivative, across repeated patterns. While the pattern may also be stored comprising an integer multiple of this fraction, e.g.
  • Patterns comprising scalar multiples of lowest-common-denominator based fractions are therefore only beneficial in matching other patterns in a pattern library having the same total pattern duration and not for their fidelity or harmonic content
  • Fractions comprisi ng the lowest-common-denominator are applicable for any frequency where the total pattern duration and underlying data file is manageable.
  • the component of the chords comprise three- cycles of lower frequency sinusoid i s ⁇ shown by curve 882 and seven-cycles of high-frequency sinusoid fk3 ⁇ 4th i shown by curve 883 having the same start and end values. Because the component sinusoids start and end with the same value, any chord combining the two will also be continuous in magnitude and in slope, i.e. i its 1 st derivative, across repeated patterns. Because more cycles are required to construct a repeating pattern maintaining continuity throughout than in the example of where 8 - 1.5, the data file of such a pattern is naturally larger and longer. Whi!e even long duration patterns have manageable file sizes, they are less flexible In forming new combinations.
  • One brute-force solution is to employ an interpolated gap fill 894 where sinusoid 891 is modified into curve 893 with a constructed interpolated Sine segment 895, created manually or by some
  • the full scale output current of the LED driver is shown by l ine 905a, After time ti when the reference current is increased to current 903b, the full scale output current of the LED driver correspondingly increases to current level 905a. Since digital synthesis only controls the LE D enable signal of the driver, the actuai current flowing when the LED driver is conducting is set by the reference current value.
  • a distributed LED driver system comprises separate digital synthesizers 203a through 203n independentl controlling the current in multiple channels of LEDs through the enable input of OSFET drivers 215a through 2l5n. Constructed using dedicated counters and latches, these digital synthesizers can operate independently but require a proper sequence of PWM codes to he repeatedly loaded into the counters to synthesize the desired sinusoid. In this regard, collectively digital synthesizers 203 therefore require some centralized control able to uniquel access each digital synthesizer 203a through 203n at high speeds. One such means to implement this kind of control and communication is through a high-speed digital bus.
  • a bus- controlled LED driver is used to generate programmable square wave pulses.
  • any digital pulse drive circuit used in LED drives may be repurposed for sinusoidal synthesis.
  • the circuit of Figure 48 illustrates one such implementation of an LEI) driver including a bus- programmable reference current source 930a comprising a D /A converter 932a, which converts an 8-bit digital word stored in I LED register 931a into an analog current aim quantized into 256 levels. If greater resolution is required a greater number of bits, e.g. 3.2 bits for 4096 quantized levels or 16 bits for 65,536 quantized levels, may be used.
  • the data setting the current aU-a may be loaded into the latch of I LED register 931a from a software or firmware program residi ng in a central controller or microprocessor 920 and passed to ILED register 931a through digital communication bus 923.
  • a decoder 925a is included to detect and store "channel -a" only analog information into digital registers 931a (along with digital synthesis data for registers 927a and 928a ⁇ , thereby ignoring data for other channels,
  • Control of the bus is managed through bus control circuitry 920b contained within microcontroller 920.
  • This information is communicated by a data bus 921 generally using a standardized protocol such as SPI (serial peripheral interface) or other high-speed alternatives to the various ICs connected to the bus.
  • SPI serial peripheral interface
  • Each iC communicates with the bus through an SPI interface 922 and translates the serial information into serial or parallel data specifically formatted for communication inside the integrated circuit, delivering the information to decoder 925a and other channels through an internai bus 923.
  • Internal bus data structures such as internal bus 923 generally comprise parallel data needing a large number of conductors while system bus protocols such as SPI bus 921 used to connect various Cs together generally comprise high-speed serial data in order to minimize the numbe of connecting wires.
  • microcontroller 920 to SPI interface 922 through SPI bus 921, while it could contain algorithmic information and programs, generally only comprises the operating settings needed to instruct the LED driver IC how to drive the LEDs, e.g. the registe data for data registers 927a, 928a and 930a.
  • microcontroller 920 contains within its pattern library 920a the waveform synthesis algorithms executed by the LED driver channel as shown by precision gate bias and control circuit 935a and high-voltage MOSFET 936a.
  • This waveform pattern information generated by microcontroller 920 is relayed from its internal bus interface 920b to one or more LED driver ICs, using the high-speed Pl bus 921.
  • the SPl bus has become an industry standard in LCD and HDTV backlighting systems, and a common interface for LED driver ICs in large displays (but not in small displays used in handheld electronics).
  • this drive electronics can be repurposed for LED drive in phototherapy, and in accordance with the methods disclosed herein, may be adapted for sinusoidal synthesis despite the fact that such ICs were never intended for such purposes,
  • each LED driver 1C has its own unique chip !D code
  • All data packets broadcast from microcontroller 920 on SPl bus 921 include this unique chip S D in the header of the data stream as an a type of address - an address employed to direct the data to one and onl one LED driver 1C, i.e. the target LED driver 1C, Only data matching a particular chip ID will be processed by the corresponding target LED driver IC even though all drive ICs receive the same data broadcast.
  • the chip ID is typically hardware-programmed for each LED driver IC with one or two pins on the IC.
  • an multistats analog comparator interprets the analog level and outputs a 2-bit digital code.
  • a 4-bit binar word i.e., a binary nibble
  • a 4-bit binar word uniquely identifies one of 4 2 or 16 chip IDs.
  • each LED driver channel comprising a set of "n" channel drive circuits is generally realized as a single integrated circuit with its own unique "chip ID” used to direct instructions from the microcontroiler 920 directly to that specific IC and to the LED drive channels contained within.
  • chip ID used to direct instructions from the microcontroiler 920 directly to that specific IC and to the LED drive channels contained within.
  • the same communication from microcontroller 920 is ignored by all other LED drivers made in integrated circuits without the matching eh ip ID,
  • SPI interface 922 receives the instructions from SPI bus 921 then interprets and distributes this informatio to decoder 925a and other channel decoders through internal digital bus 923, which instructs the individual LEI) driver channels on drive conditions (including channel by channel timing and LED biasing).
  • internal digital bus 923 comprises some combination of serial and parallel communication. Since bus 923 is dedicated and internal to the LED driver of an LED pad, bus 923 may conform to its own defined standards and is not subject to complying with any pre-established protocol.
  • digital data registers present within each individual LSD driver channel.
  • respective elements within a given channel utilize the same Ietter designator as the channel, for example, counter 227 is labeled as 227a In chan el-a and as 227b in channel-b (not shown),
  • These registers may be realized with S-type or D-type flip-flops, static latch circuitry, or SRAM cells known to those skilled in the art
  • the decoded data for each channel includes a 12-bit word defining the channel's on-time ton, a 12-bit word defining the phase delay ⁇ , and a 8-bit word defining the LED current, stored respectively in ton register 927a, ⁇ register 928a, and km register 93 la and corresponding to «, ⁇ and ILEO registers in the other channels (not. sho n).
  • the decoded output of decoder 925a comprising the t im> ⁇
  • ILED data for channel-a is loaded into registers 927a, 928a, and 931a, respectively.
  • the on-time t (J » of LED string 940a, along with the signals Ok 0 and Syne on clock line 924 combine to set the LEDs' brightness through the corresponding PW duty factor D, and in waveform synthesis to set the pulsed frequency f sy »th of the synthesized pattern of photo-excitation. While in pulse synthesis the t OT! , ⁇ , and m data loaded in their corresponding registers change infrequently, in sinusoidal sy nthesis they are updated with every Sync pulse to load a new PWM value into counter 929a.
  • decoded output of decoder 925b (not shown) comprising the too, ⁇ , and ILED data for channe!-b is loaded into its corresponding registers 927b, 928b, and 931 b (not shown) respectively, and the decoded output of decoder 925n comprising the ⁇ , and ILED data for channel-n is ioaded into registers 927n, 928n, and 93 i n respectively (aiso not shown).
  • These data registers may operate as clocked latches loading data only at predefined times, e.g. whenever a Sync pulse occurs, or may be changed
  • Synchronizing the data loading and execution to a clock pulse is known herein as “synchronous” or “latched” operation while operating the latches and counter where the data can be changed dynamically at any time is referred to as “asynchronous” or “non-latched” operation.
  • Latched operation limits the maximum operating frequency hut exhibits greater noise immunity than asynchronous operation.
  • sinusoidal waveform synthesis performed by LED drive can be realized by either method - using either latched or asynchronous methods, in display applications, however, only latched operation is employed because of an LCD image's severe sensitivity to noise,
  • the data received over SPl bus 921 for channei-a is decoded and immediately loaded into the ton, ⁇ , and km registers 927a, 928a and 93 la and the corresponding registers in the other channels through registers 927n, 928n and 931n in channel-n.
  • the count being executed in counter 929a is allowed to complete its operation, before new data is loaded into counter 927a and a new count commences.
  • counter 929a commences immediately counting pulses on the Clk ⁇ line of clock line 924, first by turning off LED string 940a if it was on, then counting the number of pulses in ⁇ register 928a before toggling precision gate bias and control circuit 935a and OSFET 936a back on. After turning LED string 940a back on. counter 929a then counts the number of counts loaded from >n register 927a on Clk 8 line 223b before shutting LED string 940a off again. The counter 929a then waits for another instruction,
  • asynchronous operation is not a viable option i LCD backlighting.
  • non-latched operation is a viable option especially for generating higher frequency LED excitation patterns, i.e. fo higher values of f 3 ⁇ 4 ⁇ «th.
  • the counter 927a toggles on precision gate bias and control circuit 935a, biasing the gate of current sink MOSFET 936a to conduct a prescribed amount of current ⁇ thereby illuminating LED string 940a to a desired level of brightness.
  • Counter 929a su bsequently counts the number of Clk ⁇ pulses loaded from ton register 927a until the count is complete, and then toggles precision gate bias and control circuit 935a to shut off current MOSFET 936a and terminate illumination.
  • LED string 940a may remain off f the remainder of the Ts m- period, i.e. until the next Sync pulse appears on clock line 924, or alternatively repeatedl toggle on and off at the value loaded into ton register 927a until the next Sync pulse occurs on line 223a.
  • the Sync pulse serves several purposes. First, it is an instruction to load the data from the on register 927a and the ⁇ register 928a into the programmable digital counter 227a, Second, it is an instruction to reset the counter 929a and commence counting in counter 929a, first to pass a period of time corresponding to the phase dela ⁇ , and then to turn on the LED string 940a for the number of clock counts loaded into the corresponding trm register 927a. Thirdly, it is an instruction to load the value in the km register 93ia into the D/A converter 932a, precisely setting the analog value of current ⁇ ,-, , Simila r operations are performed in the corresponding counters, D/A converters, and Lm. ⁇ and !LED registers in the other channels. Finally, it prevents noise from overwriting the data in the registers 927a, 928a and 931a midstream jumbling the count
  • phofobiological processes in tissue repair and immune response can be stimulated with a greater degree of precision, control and tissue specificity, free from spectral contamination present in pulsed LED drives.
  • the generation of sinusoidal drive waveforms may be performed using analog synthesis, digitally-controlled analog synthesis (PCM), or by purely digital synthesis methods, preferably using fixed frequency PW techniques.
  • the LED driving waveforms may include a simultaneous mix and/or a programmed sequence of audio-frequency square wave pulses, sine waves, chords of sinusoids, and any other time-varying waveforms such as ramp and triangle waves, filtered audio sources, or combinations thereof
  • the disclosed methods may be used for driving any wavelength LED or laser diode, including long infrared, near infrared, visible light including deep red, red, blue and violet, as weli as driving near ultra-violet LEDs.
  • Far UV and beyond are excluded because of the detrimental health risks of ionizing radiation.
  • the methods and apparatus facilitate control of key parameters for phototherapy, namely
  • the control may be performed dynamically or in prescribed patterns made in advance of their use and stored in pattern libraries.
  • a strategy consistent with the principles of bioresonance and photobioiogieal time constants can be realized,
  • An example of a phototherapeutic strategy is graphically illustrated in 3D in Figure 49, where the x-axis represents the peak-to-peak amplitude of an oscillatin LED current from 0mA to 30mA, the y-axis represents the constant DC component of the LED current ranging from 0mA to 30mA, and the z-axis represents the AC frequency of sinusoidal oscillations ranging from 0.1Hz (nearly DC] to over lOkt z,
  • the locations of the various physiological structures and conditions, shown by the numerals 960 through 983, HI us irate the areas of possible maximum beneficial effects from particular combinations of the amplitude, sinusoidal frequency and DC component of the current used to illuminate the LED string.
  • the graph illustrates in general terms the prior observation that electron transport 960 can occur at higher frequencies, in the range of kHz and beyond, ionic transport 961 occurs i n tens- to- hundreds of Hertz, and chemical transformations 962 occur in the single-digit Hem range. Also in the single-digit range, albeit specifically at higher DC currents or higher low-frequency AV currents, transient thermal effects are manifest Steady state thermal processes 964 occur at even high DC currents from increased heating at frequencies from 0.1 Hz to DC, i.e. 0Hz.
  • Neurological response such as neural 982 and relaxation 981 benefits from higher frequencies and moderate AC currents with minimal DC offset.
  • Photodynamic therapy 980 where photons are being used to stimulate or activate a photochemical process, or anti-bacterial treatments where energy is attempting to impede normal bacterial metabolism require a combination of high excitation frequencies and high AC LED current Photodynamic therap also benefits from high total light intensity, meaning brighter and hence higher DC currents are better.
  • the ability of the disclosed apparatus of methods to generate and control the frequency and amplitude o sinusoidal exxitation of LEDs is expected to profoundly improve phototherapy control and efficacy beyond that of any prior art digitally pulsed LED or laser system.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Pathology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Radiology & Medical Imaging (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Radiation-Therapy Devices (AREA)
  • Led Device Packages (AREA)

Abstract

The LEDs in a phototherapy LED pad are controlled so that the intensity of the light varies in accordance with a sinusoidal function, thereby eliminating the harmonics that are generated when the LEDs are pulsed digitally, in accordance with a square-wave function. This is accomplished analogically by using a sinusoidal wave to control the gate of a MOSFET connected in series with the LEDs or by using a digiltal-to-analog converter to control the gate of the MOSFET with a stair step function representative of the values of a sinusoidal function at predetermined intervals. Alternatively, pulse-width modulation is used to control the gate of the MOSFET in such a way that the average current through the LEDs simulates a sinusoidal function. In additional to using a simple sine wave function, the LED current may also be controlled in accordance with "chords" containing multiple sine waves of different frequencies.

Description

Sinusoidal Drive System and Method for Phototherapy
Scope of invention
This Invention relates to biotechnology for medical applications, including photobiomodulation, phototherapy, and bioresonance.
Background of Invention
Introduction
Biophotonics is the biomedical field- relating to the electronic control of photons, i.e. light, and its interaction with living cells and tissue. Biophotonics includes surgery, imaging, biometrics, disease detection, and phototherapy.
Phototherapy is the controiled application of light photons, typically infrared, visible and ultraviolet light for medically therapeutic purposes including combating injury, disease, and immune system distress. More specifically, phototherapy involves subjecting cells and tissue undergoing treatment to a stream of photon of specific wavelengths of light either continuously or in repeated discontinuous pulses to control the energy transfer and absorption behavior of Hying cells and tissue,
History ofPtdsed Phototherapy Technology
For more than a century, doctors, researchers, and amateur experimentalists have dabbled with the response of living cells and tissue to non-ionizing energy, including ultraviolet and visible light, infrared light and heat, microwaves, radio waves, alternating current (specifically microcurrents), ultrasound and sound. In many cases, the energy source is modulated with oscillations or pulses, reportedly resulting in "biomodulation" effects that are different from the effects resulting from the steady application of energy. Even the famous scientist and father of alternating current Nicholas Tesla was known to have subjected himself to high-frequency modulated electrical shocks or "lightning strikes" in theatrical public
demonstrations to showcase the supposed benefits of AC technology an d oscillato ry energy. Unfortunately, despite all the interest and activity, rather than producing a systematic comprehensive knowledge of the cellular interactions with constant and oscillatory directed energy, the consequence of these sensationalized and poorly controlled experiments has produced a confusing, and even self-contradictory, mix of science, pseudo-science, mysticism, and religion. Promulgating these conflicting and sometimes extraordinary claims, today's publications, literature, and web sites range from hard science and biotechnology research to holistic medicine and spiritua!ism, and often represent sensational pseudo-science (devoid of tech nical evidence) purely for the purpose of enticing clients and promoting product sales.
Topically, white the greatest interest in direeted-energy therapy today is focused on low-level pulsed light for healing (i.e. phototherapy), the earliest studies concerning the influence of oscillator energy on the process of healing in animal and uman tissue did not utilize Sight, but instead involved stimulating tissue with sinusoidal electrical microcurrents. Performed by the acupuncturist Dr. Paul Nogier in the mid 1950s, this poorly-documented empirically-based work concluded that certain frequencies stimulate healing faster than others and manifest tissue- specificity. The studies were performed in the audio frequency range from zero (DC) to 20kHz.
Absent clear documentation of the treatment conditions and the apparatus employed, to our knowledge, exact scientific reproduction of ogier's experiments and verification of his results have not occurred and no scientific technical reports appear in the refereed published literature. So rather than constituting a specific method to cure disease or combat pain, Nogier's reported observations have served as a roadmap, Le, a set of guiding principles, i n the subsequent exploration and development of the field, including the following premises:
* In human patients, the healing of injured or diseased tissue and a patient's perceived pain varies with the oscillating frequency of electrical stimulation (especially 292 Hz or "D" in the musical scale) » Specific frequencies In the audio range of 20kHz and below, a pear to stimulate different tissue and organs more than others, i.e. tissue specificity Is frequency dependent * Doubling a given frequency appears to behave similar to the original frequency in tissue specificity, in effect, and in efficacy, It is curious to note in the last bullet point, that even-multiples of a frequency behave similarly, implies harmonic behavior in cellular biology and physiological processes. Such harmonic behavior is analogous to the design of a piano and its keyboard, where doubling or halving a frequency is musically equivalent to the same note one octave, i.e. eight whole tones, higher or lower than the original. Also, the reported benefit o f "even" harmonics is consistent with mathematical analysis of physical systems showing even-harmonics couple energy more efficiently, and behave more predictably than circuits or systems exhibiting odd harmonics.
While Nogier's observations have become a serious research topic in the medical research community (especially in its applicabilit to phototherapy], they also have fueled fanatical claims promoting highly-dubious metaphysical and religious principles that life comprises a single pure frequency, that anything that disturbs that frequency represents disease or injury, and that eliminating or cancelling these bad frequencies somehow will restore health. Even though such incredulous claims for maintaining healt have been debunked scientifically, proponents of this theory continue to offer for profit products or services for "enhancing" a person's healthy frequency using so-called "bioresonance" for better health and longer life.
in the context of this application, any discussion of bioresonance herein does not refer to this metaphysical interpretation of the word but instead refers to well defined biochemical processes in cells and in tissue resulting from
photobiomodulation, In fact, scientific measurements reveal that not one, but many dozens of frequencies simultaneously coexist in a human body. These measured frequencies ~ some random, some fixed frequency, and some time-varying, exist mostly in the audio spectrum, i.e. below 20 kHz. These naturally occurring frequencies include ECG signals controlling heart function, EEG signals in the brain controlling thought, visual signals carried by the optic nerve, time-varying muscle stimulation in the peripheral muscles, peristaltic muscle contractions in the intestines and uterus, nerve impulses from tactile sensations carried by the central nervous system and spinal chord, and more. Similar signals are observed in humans, other mammals and in birds. So clearly there is no one frequenc that uniformly describes a healthy condition for life.
Starting in the late 1960s, medical interest turned from microcurrents to phototherapy, as pioneered the Russians and the Czechs and later in the 1980s by NASA-sponsored research in the United States. In the course of researching phototherapy, also known as low- level light therapy (LLLP), the same question of modulating frequency arose, comparing pulsed light to continuous irradiation for phototherapy treatmen The efforts primarily focused on red and infrared light pulsed at frequencies in the audio range, i.e. below 20 kHz.
Numerous studies and clinical trials have since compared various pulsed infrared laser methods to continuous wave treatments for phototherapy. In the journal paper " Effect of Pulsing in how-Level Light Therapy" published in Lasers Surg, Med, August 2010, volume 42(6), pp. 450-466, the authors and medical doctors Hashmi et al. from Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, and other hospitals, critically reviewed nine direct comparative trials of pulsed wave (PW) and continuous wave (CW) tests. Of these trials, six studies showed pulsed treatments outperformed continuous illumination, and only in two cases did the continuous wave treatment outperform light pulsing. 1 n these published works, however, no agreement o consensus was reached defining the optimum pulse conditions for therapeutic efficacy.
One such study showing that puSsed-Sight phototherapy outperforms continuous light, published hi Laser M ed lea I S ci ne , 10 September 2011, entitled "Comparison of the Effects of Pulsed and Continuous Wave Light on AxonaS
Regeneration in a Rat Model of Spinal Cord Injury," by X, Wn et ai addresses the subject of nerve repair. Excerpts include an introduction stating: "Light therapy (LT) has been investigated as a viable treatment for injuries and diseases of the central nervous system in both animal trials and in clinical trials. Based on in vivo studies, LT has beneficial effects on the treatment of spinal cord injury (SCI ), traumatic brain injury, stroke, and neurodegenerative diseases," The study then concentrated its effect on a comparison of continuous wave (CW) light therapy versus pulsed wave (PW) treatments on SCI. The rats were transcutai eously irradiated within 15 minutes of S'Cl surgery with an 808n ni (infrared) diode laser for 50 minutes daily and thereafter for 14 consecutive days. After an extended discussion, the authors reported; "in conclusion, CW and pulsed laser light support axonal regeneration and functional recovery after SCL Pulsed laser light has the potential to support axonal regrowth to spinal cord segments located farther from the lesion site. Therefore, the use of pulsed light is a promising non-invasive therapy for SCI"
While the majority of these studies utilized pulsed lasers., similar systems were subsequently developed using digitally pulsed light-emitting diodes (LEDs). These studies (e.g. Laser Med. SeL, 2009) showed that, all things being equal, LED phototherapy matches or outperforms laser phototherapy. Moreover, LED therapy solutions are cheaper to implement and intrinsically offer greater safety than laser methods and apparatus. Given these considerations, tills application shall focus on LE D based systems, but with the caveat that many of the disclosed inventive methods are equally applicable for both LED or semiconductor-laser based solutions,
Pulsed IE Phototherapy Systems
Figure 1 Illustrates elements of a phototherapy system capable of continuous or pulsed light operation including an LED drive 1 controlling and driving LEDs as a source of photons 3 emanating from LED pad 2 on tissue 5 for the patient Although a human brain is shown as tissue 5, any organ, tissue or physiological system may be treated using phototherapy. Before and after, or during treatment, doctor or clinician 7 ma adjust the treatment by controlling the settings of LED driver 1 in accordance with monitor observations,
While there are many potential mechanisms, as shown in Figure 2, it is generally agreed that the dominant photobiological process 22 responsible for photobiomodulation during phototherapy treatment occurs within mitochondria 21, an organelle present, in every eukaryotie cell 20 comprising both plants and animals including birds, mammals, horses, and humans. To the present understanding, photonics logical process 22 involves a photon 23 impinging, among others, a molecule cytochrorne-c oxidase (CCO) 24, which acts as a battery charger increasing the cellular energy content by transforming adenosine monophosphate (AMP) into a higher energy molecule adenosine diphosphate (ADP), and converting ADP into an even higher energy molecule adenosine triphosphate (ATP), in the process of increasing stored energy in the AMP to ADP to ATP, charging sequence 25, eytoehrome-c oxidase 24 acts similar to that of a battery charger with ATP 26 acting as a cellular battery storing energy, a process which could be considered animal "photosynthesis". Cytochrome-c oxidase 24 is also capable of converting energy from glucose resulting from digestion of food to fuel in the ATP charging sequence 25, or through a combination of digestion and photosynthesis.
To power cellular metabolism, ATP 26 is able to release energy 29 through an ATP-to-ADP-to-A discharging process 28. Energ 29 is then used to drive protein synthesis including the formation of catalysts, enzymes, DMA polymerase, and other biomolecules.
Another aspect of photohiological process 22 is that cytochrome-c oxidase 24 is a scavenger for nitric oxide (NO) 27, an important signaling molecule in neuron communication and angiogenesis, the growth of new arteries and capillaries.
i!iu mination of cytochrome-c oxidase 24 in cells treated during phototherapy releases NO 27 in the vicinity of injured or infected tissue, increasing blood flow and oxygen delivery to the treated tissue, accelerating healing, tissue repair, and immune response.
To perform phototherapy and stimulate cytochrome-c oxidase 2 to absorb energy from a photon 3, the intervening tissue between the light source and the tissue absorbing light cannot block or absorb the light, The electromagnetic
radiation (EM ) molecular absorption spectrum of human tissue Is illustrated in a graph 40 of absorption coefficient versu s the wavelength of electromagnetic radiation λ (measured in nrn) as shown in Figure 3, Figure 3 shows the relative absorption coefficient of oxygenated hemoglobin (curve 44a), cleoxygenated hemoglobin (curve 44b), cytochrome c (curves 41a, 41b), water (curve 42) and fats and lipids (curve 43) as a function of the wavelength of the light. As Illustrated, deoxygenated hemog!obin (curve 44b) and also oxygenated hemoglobin, i.e. blood, (curve 44a] strongly absorb light in the red portion of the visible spectrum , especially for wavelengths shorter than 650 nra, At longer wavelengths in the infrared portion of the spectrum, i.e. above 950 nm, EMR is absorbed by water (H2O} (curve 42], At wavelengths between 650 nm to 950 nm, human tissue is essentially transparent as illustrated by transparent optical window 45.
Aside from absorption by fats and lipids (curve 43), EMR comprising photons 23 of wavelengths λ within in transparent opti cal window 45, is directly absorbed by cytochrome-c oxidase (curves 41aa, 41b). Specifically, cytochrome-c oxidase 24 absorbs the infrared portion of the spectrum represented by curve 41b unimpeded by water or blood, A secondary absorption tail for cytochrome-c oxidase (curve 41a) illuminated by light in the red portion of the visible spectrum is partially blocked by the absorption properties of deoxygenated hemoglobin (curve 44b), limiting any photobioiogicai response for deep tissue but still activated in epithelial tissue and ceils. Figure 3 thus shows that phototherapy for skin and internal organs and tissue requires different treatments and light wavelengths, red for skin and infrared for internal tissue and organs,
Presen t Photonic Delivery Systems
In order to achieve maximum energy coupling into tissue during
phototherapy, it is important to devise a consistent delivery system for illuminating tissue with photons consistently and uniformly. While early attempts used filtered lamps, lamps are extremely hot and uncomfortable for patients, potentially can burn patient and doctors, and are extremely difficult" in maintaining uniform illumination during a treatment of extended duration s. Lamps also suffer short lifetimes, and if constructed using rarified gasses, can also be expensive to replace regul rly.
Because of the filters, the lamps must be run very hot to achieve the requ ired photon flux to achieve an efficient therapy in reasonable treatment durations.
Unfiitered lamps, like the sun, actually deliver too broad of a spectrum and limit the efficacy of the photons by simultaneously stimulating both beneficial and unwanted chemical reactions, some involving harmful rays, especially in the ultraviolet portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. As an alternative, lasers have been and continue to be employed to perform phototherapy. Like lamps, lasers risk burning a patient, not through heat, by exposing tissue to intense concentrated optical power. To prevent that problem, special care must be taken that laser light is limited in its power output and that undu Sy high current producing dangerous light levels cannot accidentally occur. A second, more practical problem arises from a laser's small "spot size", the
illuminated area. Because a laser illuminates a small focused area, it is difficult to treat large organs,, muscles, or tissue and it is much easier for an overpower condition to arise.
Another problem with laser light results from its "coherence," the property of light preventing it from spreadi g out, making it more difficult to cover large areas during treatment. Studies reveal there is no inherent extra benefit from
phototherapy using coherent light. For one thing, bacterial, plant and animal life evolved on and naturally absorbs scattered, not coherent light because coherent light does not occur naturally from any known light sources. Secondly, the firs two layers of epithelial tissue alread destroy any optical coherence, so the presence of coherence Is really relegated to light deliver but not to its a bsorption.
Moreover, the optical spectrum of a laser is too narrow to fully excite a il the beneficial chemical and molecular transitions needed for to achieve high efficacy phototherapy, The limited spectrum of a laser, typically a range of ±3nm around the laser's center wavelength value, makes it difficult to properly excite all the beneficial chemical reactions needed in phototherapy, It is difficult to cover a range of frequencies with a narrow bandwidth optical source. For example, referring again to Figure 3, clearly the chemical reactions involved in making the CCO absorption spectra (curve 41b) is clearly different than the reactions giving rise to absorption tail (curve 41a], Assuming the absorption spectra of both regions are shown to be beneficial it is difficult to cover thi wide range with an optical source having a wavelength spectrum only 6 nm wide,
So just as sunlight is an excessively broad spectrum, photobiologically exciting many competing chemical reactions with many EMR wavelengths, some even harmful, laser light i too narrow and does not stimulate enough chemical reactions to reach full efficacy in phototherapeutic treatmen This subject is discussed in greater detail in a related application entitled "Phototherapy System And Process including Dynamic LED Driver With Programmable Waveform", by Williams et al. (U.S. Application No. 14/073,371), incorporated herein by reference, To deliver phototherap by exciting the entire range of wavelengths in the transparent optical window 45, i.e. the full width from approximately 650 nra to 950 run, even if four different wavelength light sources are employed to span the range, each light source would require a bandwidth almost 80nm wide. This is more than an order of magnitude wider than the bandwidth of a laser light source. This range is simply too wide for lasers to cover in a practical manner. Today, LEDs are commercially available for emitting a wide range of light spectra from the deep infrared through the ultraviolet portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. With bandwidths of ±30nm to ±40nm, it is much easier to cover the desired spectrum with center frequencies located in the red, the long red, the short near infrared (N.i.R) and the mid 3 S R portions of the spectrum, e.g. 670nm, ?5G nm, 825nra, and 9O0nm,
Figure 4 illustrates a preferred solution to light delivery problem is to employ a flexible LED pad, one that curves to a patients body as shown in pictograph 59. As shown, flexible LED pad 50 is intentionally bent to fit a body appendage, in this case leg comprising tissue 61, and pulled taught by Veicro strap 57. To prevent slippage, flexible LED pad 50 includes Veicro strips 58 glued to its surface, in use, Veicro strap 57 wrapped around the pad attaches to the Veicro strips 58 holding flexible LED pad 50 firmly in position conforming to a patient's leg, arm, neck, back, shoulder, knee, or any other appendage or bod part comprising tissue 61.
The resulting benefit, also shown in Figure 4 illustrates that the resulting light penetration depth 63 into subdermal tissue 62 from LEDs 52 comprising flexible pad 50 is perfectly uniform along the lateral extent of the tissue being treated, Unlike devices where the light source is a stiff LED wand or inflexible LED panel held above the tissue being treated, in this example the flexible LED pad 50 comes in contact with the patient's skin, i.e. epithelial 61. To prevent inadvertent spread of virulent agents through contact to LED pad 50, a disposable aseptic sanitation barrier 51, typically a clear hypoallergenic biocompatible plastic layer, is inserted between light pad SO and the tissue 62, Close contact betwee the LEDs 52 and the tissue 50 is essential to maintain consistent illumination for durations of 20 minutes to over 1 hour, an interval too long to hold a device in place manually. This is one reason handheld LED devices and gadgets, including brushes, combs, wand, and torchlights,, have been shown to offer little or no medical benefit for
phototherapy treatment,
A prior art phototherap system for controlled light delivery available today and shown in the pictograph of Figure 5 comprises an electronic driver 70 connected to one or more sets of flexible LED pads 71a-71e through cables 72a and 72b and connected to one other through short electrical connectors 73a-7 d.
Specifically, one electrical output of electronic LED driver 70 is connected to center flexible LSD pad 71a by electrical cable 72a, which is in turn connected to associated side fiexibie LED pads 71b and 71c through electrical connectors 73a and 73b, respectively, A second set of LBDs pads connected to a second eiectricai output of electronic driver 70 is connected to center flexible LE D pad 71c by electrical cable 72b, which is in turn connected to associated side flexible LED pads 91d and 91e through electrical connectors 73c and 73d, respectively, located o the edge of LED pad 71c perpendicular to the edge where eiectricai cable 72b attaches. The use of flexible LED pads and the abilit of electronic LED driver 70 to independently drive two sets of LED pads with up to 900mA of current, with each comprising a set of three pads., renders the phototherapy system a best- in-class product offering today.
Despite its technical superiority, the prior art phototherapy system suffers from numerous limitations and draw backs, including poo reliability for its LED pads, the inability to control LED current (and therefore light uniformity) across the LED pads, limited control in the excitation patterns driving the LEDs, limited safety and diagnostic features, and the inability to communicate or receive updates via the internet, wirelessly, or by cloud services. These various inadequacies are addressed by a number of related patents. improving the reliability of the flexible LED pads is addressed in detail in a related application entitled "Improved Flexible LED Light Pad for Phototherapy," .K. Williams et. al. (U.S. Application No. XX /ΧΧΧ,ΧΧΧ, filed YYY YY, 2014) and incorporated herein by reference. Figure 6A illustrates a view of the improved flexible LED pad set, which virtually eliminates all discrete wires and any wires soldered directly into PCBs within the LED pads (except for those associated with center cable 82) while enabling significantly greater flexibility in positioning and arranging the flexible LED pads upon a patient undergoing phototherapy.
As shown, the LED pad set includes three flexible LED pads comprising center flexible LED pad 80a with associated electrical cable 82, and two side flexible LED pads 80b and 80c. All three LED pads 80a-80c include two connector sockets 84 fo connecting pad-to-pad cables 85a and 85b. Although connector socket 84 is not visible in this perspective drawing as shown, Its presence is easily Identified by the hump 86 in the polymeric flexible LED pad 80b, and similarly in flexible LED pads 80a and 80c, Pad-to-pad cables 85a and 85b electrically connect center LED pad 80a to LED pads 80b and 80c, respectively,
Industry standard USB connectors maintain high performance and consistent quality at competitive costs manufactured through a well established high-volume supply chain, using sockets 84 that securely mount to a printed circuit board, and USB cabies 85a and 85b, thereby integrating electrical shielding and molded plugs and resisting breakage from repeated flexing and bending. Moreover, the USB connector cables 85a and 85b are capable of reliabl conducting up to 1A of current and avoid excessive voltage drops or eleetromigratlon failures during extended use, Aside from USB cables, other connector and cable set options include min-USB, lEEE-1394, and others. In the example shown in Figure 6A, an 8-pin rectangular USB connector format was chosen for Its durability, strength, and ubiquity,
in the embodiment shown in Figure 6a.. center flexible LED pad BOa is rectangular and includes a strain relief 81 for connecting to cable 82 and two USB sockets 84, al l located on the same edge of center LED pad 80a,. shown as the pad edge parallel to the x-axis. Similarly, each of side LED pads 80b and SOcis also rectangular and includes two USB sockets also located on the same edge. This connection scheme is markedly different from the prior art device shown in Figure 5, where the connector sockets are proprietary and l ocated on edges of the LED pads71a-71e and 71c-71e that face one another.
The benefit of this design change greatly improves a physician's or clinician's choices in positioning the LED pads on a patient being treated. Because the connector sockets do not face one another as they do in prior art devices, connector cables 85a and 85b need not he short in order to allow close placement of the LED pads. In fact, in the example shown, LED pads 80a, 80b and 80c may, if desired, actually abut one another without putting any stress on the cables 85a and 85b whatsoever, even if long cables are employed. With the LED pads touching, the versatility of the disclosed flexible LED pad set offers a doctor the ability to utilize the highest number of LEDs in the smallest treatment area.
Alternatively, the flexible LED pads may be placed far apart, for example across the shoulder and down the arm, or grouped with two pads positioned closely and the third part positioned farther away. With electrical shielding in cables 85a and 85b, the pads may be positioned far apart without suffering noise sensitivity plaguing the prior art. solutions shown previously.
The design shown in Figure 6A also makes it easy for a clinician to position the flexible LED pads 80a-8Qc, bend them to fit to the patient's body, e.g. around the stomach and kidneys, and then secure the pads 80a-80c by Velcro belt 93 attaching to Velcro straps 92 attached firmly to the LEI) pads 80a-30c, The bending of the individual flexible LED pad 80a-8Oc and the Velcro belt 93 binding them together is illustrated in Figure 6B, where the belt 93 and the pads 80a-80c are bent to fit ar und a curved surface with curvature in the direction of the x-axis. In order to bend In the direction of the x-axis, no rigid FfCB oriented parallel to the x-axis can be embedded within any of the LED pads 80a-80c.
In center LED pad 80a, cable 82 and an )45 connector 83 are used to electrically connect the LED pads 80a-80c to the LED controller in order to preserve and maintain backward compatibility with existing LED controllers operating In clinics and hospitals today. If an adapter for converting j45 connector 83 to a USB connector is included, flexible LED pad 80a may be modified to eliminate cable 82 and strain relief 81, instead replacing the center connection with a third USB socket 84 and replacing cable 82 with another USB cable similar to USB cable 85a but typically longer in length.
Methods of controlling LED current to improve light uniformity, providing enhanced safety and self-diagnostic capability while augmenting control of LED excitation patterns are described in the above-referenced U.S. patent Application No, 14/073,371.
Control of LED Excitation Patterns
To precisely control the excitation patter of the Sight pulses requires more sophisticated phototherapy system comprising advanced electronic control Such circuitry can be adapted from pre-existing drive electronics, e.g. that used in HDTV LED backlight systems, re-purposed for application to phototherapy.
As shown in Figure 7, one such advanced electronic drive system adapted from LED TV drive circuitry employs individual channel current control to insure that the current in every LED string is matched regardless of LED forward conduction voltages. As shown, current sinks 96a, 96b, ... , 96n are coupled to power N LED strings 97a, 97b, 97N, respectively, acting as switched constant current devices having programmable currents when the are conducting and the ability to turn on and off an individual cha nnei or combination thereof dynamically under control of digital signals 98a, 98b, ,., , 98N respectively. The number N can be any number of channels that are practical
As shown, controlled current in current sink 96a is set relative to a reference current 99 at a magnitude Iref and maintained by a feedback circuit monitoring and adj usting the circuit biases accordingly in order to maintain current keoa in the string of M series-connected LEDs 7a. The number can be any number of LEDs that are practical The current control feedback is represented symbolically by a loop and associated arrow feeding back into current sink 96a. The digital enable signals are then used to "cho p" or pulse the LBD current on and off at a controlled duty factor and, as disclosed in the above-referenced U.S. patent Application No. 14/073,371, also at varying pulse frequencies. An LED controller 103 is powered by low-dropout (LDO) linear regulator 102 and instructed by microcontroller 104 through a SPI digital interface 105. A switch mode power supply 100 powers LED strings 97a-97N at a high voltage +¾ED which may be fixed or varied dynamically.
Despite employing analog current control, the resulting waveforms, and PWM control are essentially digital waveforms, i.e. a string of sequential pulses as shown in Figure 8A, controlling the average LED brightness and setting the excitation frequency by adjusting the repetition rate and LED on-times. As shown in the simplified timing diagram of Figure 8A, a string of clock pulses is used to generate a sequential waveform of LED light, which may comprise different wavelength LEDs of wavelengths Aa, Ah, and Ac,, each illuminated at different times and different durations.
As shown by the illustrative waveforms 110 and 111 in Figure 8A, a pulse generator within LED controller 103 generates clock pulses at intervals Ta and a counter located within LED controller 103 associated with generating the waveform 111 counts 9 clock pulses and then turns on the specific channel's current sink and As LED string for a duration of 4 pulses before turning it off again. As shown by waveform 112, a second counter, also within LED controller 103, turns on the > channel immediately after one clock pulse for a duration of 8 clock pulses, and then turns the channel's LED string off for a duration of 4 clock pulses (while the Α» LED string is on) and then turns the Ab LED string on again for another 3 clock pulses thereafter. As shown by waveform 113, a third counter in LED controller 103 waits 22 pulses before turning on the Ae LED string for a duration of 4 puises then off again,
In this sequenced manner, h LED string conducts for a duration Δη (8 clock pulses), then i LED string conducts for a duration Δ-.2 (4 clock pulses), then when it turns off λ··> LED string conducts for a duration A (3 clock pulses), waiting for a duration Δ when no LED string is conducting, and followed by λ,- LED string conducting for a duration Ats ( clock puises). The timing diagrams 110-113 illustrate the flexibilit of the new control system in varying the LED wavelength and the excitation pattern frequency,
The improved LED system allows precise control of the duration of each light pulse emitted by each of LED strings ..„ Ab and Ac. In practice however, biological systems such as living cells can not respond to single sub-second pulses of light, so instead one pattern comprising a single wavelength and a single pattern frequency of pulses is repeated for long durations before switching to another LED wa velength and excitation pattern frequency. A more realistic LED excitation pattern is shown in Figure 8B, where the same clock signal (waveform 110) is used to synthesize, i.e. generate, a fixed frequency excitation pattern 116 of a single Aa wavelength light with an synthesized pattern frequency of fsynt , where
fs tnh ~ 1/nTe,
where the time Te is the time interval at which successive clock pulses are generated, and "n" is the number of clock pulses in each period of the synthesized waveform. As shown in waveform 116, until time ti the LED string is on 50% of the time so the duty facto D is 50% and the brightness of the LED is equal to one-half of what it would be if it were on ail the time. After the time ti, the duty factor is increased to 75%, increasing average LED brightness but maintain the same synthesized pattern frequency fsywh,
Timing diagram 17 illustrates a similar synthesized waveform of a single λ* wavelength light at a fixed brightness and duty factor D = 50% until time ti.
However, instead of varying the brightness at time t?, the synthesized pattern frequency changes from f&Yn ~ 1/nTe to a higher frequency fsy»&2 - 1/mTe, m being less than n, So at time b, the synthesized frequency increases from l ¾i to fsyntta, even though the duty factor (50%) and LED brightness stay constant In summary, the i mproved LED dri ve system allows the controlled sequencing of arbitrary pulse strings of multiple and va rying wavelength LEDs with control over the brightness and the duration and digital repetition rate, i.e. the excitation or pattern frequency.
To avoid any confusion, it should noted that the pattern frequency hy is not the LED's light frequency. The light's frequency, i.e. the color of the emitted light, is equal to the speed of light divided by the light's wavelength λ, or mathematically as UE R * c/ λ * (3 » 10¾i/s)/(0.8« 10-%i)=:3.8» 10" cycles/s - 380THz
For clarity's sake, the light's frequency as shown is referred to by the Greek letter nu or V and not by the small letter f or Syn¾. As calculated, the light's electromagnetic freq uency is equal to hundreds of a THz (i.e. tera-Hz) while the synthesized pattern frequency of the digita l pulses fsyi si is general in the audio or "sonic" range (an d at most in the ultrasound range} i.e. below 1 OOkHz, at least nine orders-of-magnitude lower. Unless noted by exception, throughout the remainder of this application we shall refer to the "color" of light only by its wavelength and not by its frequency. Conversely, the pulse rate or excitatio pattern frequency shall only be described as a frequency and not by a wavelength,
Summary of Limitations i Prior-Art Phototherapy
Prior-art phototherapy apparatus remain limited by a number of
fundamental issues in their design and implementation including
· use of lasers (instead o LEDs) limited by their intrinsically narrow bandwidth of emitted light unable to simultaneously stimulate the required range of chemical reactions necessary to maximize photobiostimulation and optimize medical efficacy,
* safety concerns in the use of lasers
♦ LEDs mounted in a rigid housing unable to conform to treatment areas
* poor., improper, or ineffective modulation of phototherapy excitation patterns
The last subject, ineffective modulation of phototherapy excitation patterns represents a major challenge and opportunity for improving photobiomodulation and treatment efficacy, one which represents the focus of this disclosure.
Brief Summary of the Invention
in accordance with this invention, the intensity of light used in phototherapy is varied gradually and repeatedly with regular periodicity rather than being administered as a series of square-wave pulses that are either ON or OFF. In many embodiments the light is generated by strings of light-emitting diodes (LEDs), but in other embodiments other types of light sources, such as semiconductor lasers, may be used. In a preferred embodiment, the light is sometimes varied in accordance with a single frequency sinusoidal function, or a "chord" having two or more sine waves as components, but it will become apparent that the techniques described herein can be employed to generate an infinite variety of intensity patterns and funct ons.
i n one group of embodiments, the intensity of light emitted by a stri ng of LE Ds is varied by analogically control ling the gate voltage of a current-sink MOSFET connected in series with the LEDs, A gate driver compares the current i the LED string against a sinusoidal reference voltage, and the gate voltage of the current-sink MOSFET is automatically adjusted b circuitry within the MOSFET driver until the LED and reference currents match and the LED current is at is desired value. I this way, the LED current mimics the sinusoidal reference current. The sinusoidal reference current can be generated in a variety of ways; for example, with an LC or C oscillator, a Wien bridge oscillator or a twin T oscillator.
in an alternative version of these embodiments, the gate voltage of the current-sink MOSFET is varied using a digital-to-analog (D/A) converter. The D/A converter is supplied with a series of digital values that represent the values of a sine wave at predetermined i nstants of time, e. g. 24 values in a full 360s cycle. The digital values may represent not only a sine wave but also may be generated by o from a CD or DVD,
in a second group of embodiments, the LED current is controlled digitally, preferably using pulse-width modulation (PWM). As in the previous embodiment, a sine wave is broken down into a series of digi tal values that represent i ts level at particular intervals of time. These intervals are referred to herei as having a duration sync, A pulse is generated for each T«>-nc interval, its width representing the value of the sine wave in that interval. To do this, each Tsync interval is further broken down into a number of smaller intervals (each having a duration referred to herein as T&) , and the gate of the current-sink MOSFET is controlled such that the LED current is allowed to flow during a number of these smaller Te intervals that represent the value of the sine wave. Thus, the current-sink MOSFET is turned ON for part of each sync interval and turned OFF during the remainder of each Tsync interval. As a result, the level of the LED current is c eraged (smoothed out) into th e form of a s i ne wave. The gate of the current-sink MOSFET may he controlled by a precision gate bias and control circuit that receives reference current from a reference current source and an enable signal from a digital synthesizer. The digital synthesizer contains a counte that is set to a number representative of the number of small To intervals during which the current-sink MOSFET is to be turned ON, The current- sink MOSFET is turned ON, and the counter counts down to zero. When the counter reaches zero, the current-sink MOSFET is turned OFF. The current-sink MOSFET remains OFF for a number of Ί¾ intervals equal to the total number of Te intervals in a Tsync: interval less the number of Te intervals during which the current-sink MOSFET was tu rned on,
At the beginning of the next Ts>m- interval, a new number representative of the next value o the sine wave is loaded into the counter in the precision gate bias and control circuit, and the process is repeated.
Controlling the LEDs in accordance with a sinusoidal function eliminates the harmonics that are produced when the LEDs are pulsed ON and OFF according to a square wave function, many of which ma fall within the "audible" spectrum
(generally less than 20,000Hz) and may have deleterious effects on a phototherapy treatment. Using the technique of this invention, the frequencies of the smaller intervals used in producing the sinusoidal function (1/ 'I - and 1/ Te) can typically be set at above 20,000 Hz, where they generally have little effect on phototherap treatments,
Chords containing multiple sinusoidal functions may he generated by adding the values of the component sine waves together. With the analog technique, the sine waves may be added together with an analog mixer, or a chord may be generated using a polyphonic analog audio source in lieu of an oscillator. With the digital technique, the numerical values representing the component since waves may be added together using an arithmetic logic unit (ALU). Another way of creating a chord is to combine an analog synthesized waveform with a second digital pulse frequenc by "strobing" the analog waveform ON and OFF at a strobe frequency. The strobe frequency may be either higher or lower than the frequency of the analog waveform. The strobe pulse may be generated by feeding an analog sine wave to a divide by 2, or 8 counter to produce a second waveform 1, 2 or 3 octaves above the analog sine wave, respectively,
An advantage of using a D/A converter to generate an analog voltage or using the digital technique is that treatment sequences (e.g., for particular organs or tissues) may be stored digitally in a memory (e.g., an EPROM) for convenient retrieval and use by a doctor or other clinician,
Brief Description of the Drawings
Fig. 1 is a simplified pictorial representation of a phototherapy treatment, Fig. 2 is a simplified pictorial representation of photobiomoduiation of cellular mitochondria,
Fig. 3 is a graph showing the absorption spectra of cytochrome-c (CCO), blood (lib), water and lipids,
Fig. 4 is a photographic example and schematic representation of a LED pad being used in a phototherapy treatment
Fig. 5 is a view of a pho totherapy system comprising a controller and six flexible polymeric LED pads.
Fig. 6A is a schematic representation of a set of three flexible polymeric LED pads connected together and attached to a Ve! ro strap.
Fig. 6B is a schematic representation of the set of flexible polymeric LED pads shown in Fig, 6A, bent slightly to conform to a patient's body,
Fig. 7 is an electrical schematic diagram of a current controlled LED pulsed phototherapy system.
Fig. 8A is an exemplary timing diagram, showing the sequential pulsed excitation of multiple wavelength LEDs with varying durations.
Fig. 8B is an exemplary timing diagram, showing the sequential pulsed excitation of multiple wavelength LEDs with various combinations of duty factor and frequency.
Fig. 9A illustrates the time domain and Fourier frequency domain
representation of a digital (square wave) pulse. Fig, 9B iliustrates a discrete Fourier transform representation using varying numbers of summed sine waves.
Fig, 9C illustrates the measured current harmonic con tent of a digitally pulsed power supply.
Fig, 9D illustrates a measured Fourier spectrum of amplitude harmonics. Fig, 9E illustrates a Fourier transform of a limited time sample of a measured amplitude data revealing the frequenc "spurs" resulting from the short duration sample.
Fig, 9F illustrates the magnitude of odd and even harmonics and the cumulative energy over the spectrum of a continuous Fourier transform of a digital (square wave) pulse.
Fig, 10 illustrates a graph of the frequency response of an oscillatory system having two resonant frequencies.
Fig. 11 illustrates the summation of two synchronized digital pulses of varying freqiie n ey ,
Fig, 12A illustrates a graph of spectral content of a 292 Hz digital pulse contaminating the audi spectrum to that of idealized octaves of D4 in the same range,
Fig, 12B illustrates a graph showing that the spectral content of a 4,671Hz digital pulse mostly contaminates the ultrasonic spectrum,
Fig. 13 iliustrates various physical mechanisms of photobiomodulation
Fig. 14 illustrates two equivalent circuits of a singie channel LED driver with current control.
Fig. 15 iliustrates various example combinations of reference current and enable signals and the resulting LED current waveforms.
Fig. 16A schematically illustrates the problem of current sharing among multiple loads from a single reference current
Fig. 16B schematically illustrates the use of transconductance amplifiers for distributing a reference current among multiple loads. Fig, 16C schematscaily illustrates one implementation of a controlled current sink comprising a high voltage MOSPKT and MOSFBT driver circuit with resistor trimming.
Fig, 16D schematicall iilustrates one implementation of a controlled current sink comprising a high voltage MQSFET and MOSFKT driver circuit with MOSFET trimming.
Fig, 17A schematically represents the use of a fixed-value voltage source to generate an oscillating current reference,
Fig, 17B schematica lly represents the use of a adjustable voltage source to generate an oscillating reference curre t
Fig, 17C schematically represents a frequenc and voltage adjustable voltage source comprising a ien-bridge used to generate an oscillating reference current.
Fig, 17D schematically represents a programmable level shift circuit using a resistor ladder,
Fig, ISA schematically represents an implementation of a single-channel current-controlled LED driver using a D/A converter to generate a reference current
Fig. 18B schematically represents an implementation of a D/A converter using a resistor lad der .
Fig. 19A illustrates a 292 Hz sine wave synthesized from a D/A converter. Fig. 19B iilustrates the harmonic spectra of 292Hz sine wave synthesized using a D/A converter generated reference current,
Fig. 19C illustrates an expanded view of digital steps present in a 292Hz sine wave synthesized from a D/A converter generated reference current,
Fig. 19C Illustrates an expanded view of digital steps present in a 18,25 Hz sine wave synthesized from a D/A converter generated reference current.
Fig. 19D illustrates a portion of a 18.25Hz sine wave comprising a seq uence of voltage changes occurring at a clock frequency of a D/A converter,
Fig. 19E Illustrates the harmonic spectra of a 18.25Hz sine wave synthesized using a D/A converter generated reference current, Fig, 20 illustrates various combinations of sinusoidal reference currents and resulting LED current waveforms.
Fig, 21 iilustrates the sum of two sinusoidal waveforms and the resulting waveform.
Fig, 22A schematically illustrates the use of an analog mixer to generate a polyphonic oscillatory reference current for phototherapy LED drive.
Fig, 22 B schematically represents the use of an analog audio source to generate a polyphonic reference current for a phototherapy LED drive.
Fig, 22C schematically represents the use of a digital audio source to generate a polyphonic reference current for a phototherapy LED drive.
Fig, 2 A iilustrates the synthesized polyphonic waveform generated from a sinusoidal reference current and a higher frequency digital puise.
Fig, 23 B iilustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 292Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 4,672Hz digital pulse.
Fig, 23C illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from 292 Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 9,344Hz digital pulse.
Fig, 23 D illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 292Hz sinusoidal reference current and an ultrasonic digital pulse,
Fig, 23E illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 292Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 18,688Hz digital pulse,
Fig. 24 iilustrate the synthesized polyphonic waveform generated from a sinusoidal reference current and a lower frequency digital pulse,
Fig, 25A illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 9,344Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 4,672Hz digital pulse,
Fig, 258 illustrates the polyphonic harmonic spectra generated from a 584Hz sinusoidal reference current and a 292H¾ digital pulse.
Fig. 26 schematicaily illustrates implementation of a poly phonic LED current drive for phototherapy from a single oscillator,
Fig. 27A schematically illustrates multiple digital synthesizers controlling mutlipie corresponding LED drivers. Fig, 27B schematically illustrates a centralized digital synthesizer separately controlling multiple LED drivers.
Fig, 27C schematically il iustrates a single digital synthesizer controlling multiple LED drivers with a common signal.
Fig, 28A illustrates a circuit diagram of a digital synthesizer.
Fig, 28B is a timing diagram of digital synthes izer operation.
Fig, 28C illustrates synthesized pulses of a fixed frequency and varying duty factor.
Fig, 29A illustrates an LED drive waveform comprising a fixed frequency PW synthesized sinusoid.
Fig, 29B illustrates examples of digitally synthesized sinusoids,
Fig, 29C illustrates a comparison of the output waveforms of a D/A converter versus PWM control over a single time interval.
Fig. 290 graphically illustrates interrelationship between PWM hit resolution, the number of time intervals, and the maximum frequency being synthesized to the required counter clock frequency.
Fig, 30 schematically illustrates a clock generator circuit,
Fig. 31 graphically illustrates the dependence of overall digital synthesis resolution and PWM bit resolution on the maximum frequency being synthesized, Fig. 32A illustrates the frequency spectrum of a d igitally synthesized
4,672 Hz sinusoid.
Fig. 32B illustrates the frequency spectrum of a digitally synthesized 292Hz sinusoid,
Fig. 32C graphically illustrates the dependence of the Sync and PWM counter frequencies on the synthesized frequency.
Fig. 33 illustrate a flow chart of sinusoidal waveform generation using the disclosed digital synthesis methods.
Fig. 34A graphically illustrates digital synthesis of a 292 Hz (D4) sine wave using 15° intervals.
Fig. 34B graphicall illustrates digital synthesis of a 292Hz (D4) sine wave using 20° intervals. Fig, 34C graphically iilustrates the PWM intervals used in the digital synthesis of a 292 Hz (D4) sine wave using 20° intervals.
Fig, 34D graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168 Hz (D6) sin e wave using 20° intervals,
Fig, 34E graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 4,672Hz (D6) sine wave using 20° intervals,
Fig, 3S A graphically il lustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz £D6) si ne wave with a 50% amplitude,
Fig, 35B graphically iilustrates the digital synthesis of 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave with a 50% amplitude offset by +25%.
Fig, 3SC graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz (06) sine wave with a 20% amplitude offset by +60%.
Fig, 3SD il lustrates the frequency spectrum of a digitally synthesized 1,168Hz (D63 sinusoid with a 20% amplitude offset by +60%,
Fig, 36 graphicall illustrates the digital synthesis of 4~cycles of a 4,472Hz (1)8) sine wave using 20° intervals,
Fig, 37A graph ically illustrates the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave using 4X oversampling,
Fig, 37B iilustrates the pattern file for the digital synthesis of a 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave using 4X oversampling,
Fig. 38 graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a chord of 4,472Hz (08) and 1, 1672Hz (D6) sinusoids of equal amplitude.
Fig, 39 iilustrates the frequency spectrum of digitally synthesized chord of 4,472Hz {08} and 1,1672Hz (D6) sinusoids of equal amplitude.
Fig, 40 graphically illustrates the digital synthesis of a chord of 4,472Hz (D8) and 1, 1672Hz (136) sinusoids of differing amplitudes.
Fig. 41 illustrates an algorithm for generating a synthesis pattern file,
Fig. 42A illustrates an algorithm for generating chords of two or more sinusoids in real time or in advance for storage in a pattern library. Fig, 42B illustrates an alternative way of creating chords utilizing the algorithm described in Fig, 41 to generate individual sinusoidal pattern files with normalized mathematical functions.
Fig, 43 illustrates sinusoids of frequencies that are integral multiples of one another.
Fig, 44 illustrates sinusoids of frequencies that are fractional multiples of one another.
Fig, 45 illustrates the use of mirror phase symmetry to generate a chord consisting of sinusoids whose frequencies have a ratio of 11.5.
Fig, 46 illustrates the use of an interpolated gap fill to generate a chord consisting of sinusoids aving frequencies that are in an irregular ratio (1.873) to one another.
Fig, 47 illustrates generating a sinusoid using PWM while varying the reference current ahet
Fig, 48 illustrates how a prior art digital pulse circuit used to drive LED strings may he repurposed for the synthesis of sinusoidal waveforms,
Fig, 49 illustrates various physiological structures and conditions that may be amenable to treatment with phototherapy, as a function of the amplitude, frequency and DC component of the sinusoidal current used to illuminate the Li: Us. Description of the Invention
Harmonic Spectra of Synthesized Patterns
As described previously, the pulsing of light at prescribed frequencies in prior art phototherapy is based on empirical evidence and doctors' observations that pulsed laser light works better than continuous light in reducing pain and healing tissue. As stated previously, while this general conclusion appears credible, no consensus exists on what digital pulses produce the best, results and highest treatment efficacies. To date, studies of laser phototherapy did not consider arbitrary waveforms (such as sine waves, ramp waves, sawtooth waveforms, etc.) but were restricted to direct comparisons between continuous wave laser operation (CW) to pulsed wave (PW) laser operation, i.e. square waves, likely because most lasers are designed only to operate by being pulsed o n or off digitally. The pulse rates used were chosen to operate at a ra e near the time -constants of specific, empirically-observed photobioiogical processes, i.e. in the audio range below 20kHz.
In these studies, experimenters report the digital pulse rate and erroneously assume that this square-wave pulse frequency used to modulate the light is the only frequency present in the test. From communication theory, physics,
electromagnetics, and the mathematics of Fourier, however, it is well known that digital pulses do not exhibit only the digital pulse frequency, but in fact exhibit an entire spectrum of frequencies. So, while it may seem reasonable to assume digital pulses operating at a fixed clock rate both emit and conduct only a single frequency - the fundamental switching frequency, this self-evident truth is, in fact, incorrect, In fact, the harmonic content in switched digital systems can be significant both in energy and in the spectrum the harmonics contaminate - some harmonics occurring at frequencies that are orders of magnitude higher than the fundamental frequency. In electromagnetics, these harmonics are often responsible for unwanted conducted and radiated noise, potentially adversely affecting circuit operating reliability. At higher frequencies, these harmonics are known to generate
electromagnetic interference, or EMS, radiated into the surroundings,
Mathematical analysis reveals that the speed of the digital on-and-off transitions (along with any possible ringing or overshoot] determine the generated harmonic spectra of a waveform, in power electronic systems such as the LED or laser drivers used in phototherapy systems, the problem is compounded b high currents, large voltages and high power delivered in such applications because more energy is being controlled. In fact unless the precise rise time and fall time of a string of digital pulses is accuratel recorded, the frequenc spectrum resulting from the string of pulses is unknown.
The origin and magni tude of these unexpected frequencies can best be understood mathematically. Analysis of any physical system or an electrical circuit may be performed in the "time domain", Le, where time is the key variable b which everything is measured and referenced, or alternatively in the "frequency domain", where every time-dependent waveform or function is considered as a sum of sinusoidal oscillating frequencies. In engineering, both time and frequency domains are used interchangeably, essentially because some problems are more easily solved in the time domain and others are better analyzed as frequencies.
One means to perform this translation between time and frequency is based on the 18* century contributions of the French mathematician and physicist Jean Fourier which revealed that generalized functions may be represented by sums of simpler trigonometric functions, generally sine and cosine waveforms (a. cosine may be considered as a sine wave shifted by 90° in phase). The methodology is bidirectional - Fourier analysis comprise decomposing or "transforming" a function into its simpler elements, or conversely, synthesizing a function from these simpler elements. In engineering vernacular, the term Fourier analysis is used to mean th e study and application of both operations.
A continuous Fourier transform refers to the transform of a contin uous real argument into a continuous frequency distribution or vice versa. Theoretically, the continuous Fourier transform's ability to convert a time varying waveform into the precise frequency domain equivalent, requires summing an infinite number of sine waves of varying frequency and sampling the time dependent waveform for an infinite period of time. An example of this transform is shown in Figure 9A, where graph g(t) illustrates a repeating time dependent waveform 118, The equivalent frequency domain spectrum is shown by graph G(f) illustrating that a simple square wave results in an continuous spectrum 119 of frequencies of varying magnitu des centered around the fundamental frequenc f = 0.
Of course, taking data samples for infinite time and summing an infinite number of sine waves are both idealized impossibilities. In mathematics and control theory, however, the word "infinite" can be safely translated into a "very large number", or even more practically in engineering to mea a "large number compared to what is being analyzed". Such an approximation of a series sum of a limited number of "discrete" sinusoids is referred to as a discrete Fourier transform or "Fourier series". In practice, measuring a regularly repeating time domain waveform for 2 to S periods can be very accurately emulated with the sum of less than 50 sinusoids of varying frequencies. Moreover, in cases where the original time-domain waveform is simple, regular and repeating for extended duration., reasonable approximations can occur by summing only a few sinusoids.
This principle is illustrated in Figure 9B in a graph of signal magnitude, in this case LED current, versus time in four different cases approximating square wave 117 using the discrete Fourier transform method, i the four cases shown the number of sine waves K used in the transform vary from K - 1 to K - 49, Clearly, in the case of K=l, the single sinusoid onl vaguely resembles square wave 1.17, When the number of sine waves of varying frequency used in the transform is increased to K ~ 5, the resulting reconstructed waveform 121 and its match to square wave 117 improves dramatically. At K = 1 h the match of waveform 121 very closely tracks the original 117, while at - 49 the transform reconstruction and the original waveform are nearly indistinguishable.
Through Fourier analysis, then, physicists can observe what frequencies are present in any time varying system or circuit by looking at the constituent components and the a mount of energy present in each component, This principle is exemplified h the graph of Figure 9C showing the measured spectral components of current i n a power circuit compris ing a 150Hz square wave. The Fourier transform was performed by the measuring device employing a real time analytical algorithm called a FIT or fast Fourier transform to immediately estimate the measured spectra from a minimal data sample. As shown b spike 125, the fundamental pulse frequency is at 150Hz and has an amplitude of 1.2A, The fundamental frequency is accompanied by a series of harmonics at 450Hz, 750H¾ 1050Hz, a nd 1350H¾ corresponding to the 3n 5th, 7th and 9th harmonics of the fundamental frequency. The 9th harmonic 127 has a frequency well into the kHz range despite the low fundamental pulse rate. Also, it should be noted the 3f(i harmonic 126 is responsible for 0.3A of the current in the waveform, a su bstantial portion of the current flowing in the system. As shown, the circuit also included a 2.5A DC component of current 128, i.e. at a frequency of 011?.. A steady DC component does not contribute to the spectral distribution and can be ignored in a Fourier analysis. Figure 9D illustrates another example of a f FT, this time wit the signal amplitude measured in decibels (dB), As shown, the IkHz fundamental is accompanied by a sizeable 3rd harmonic 131 at 3kHz and includes spectral contributions 132 above -30dB beyond 20kHz. in contrast, Figure 9E illustrates a less idealistic looking FFT output of a 25QHz square wave with a fundamental frequency 135 of 250 Hz, a 3rd harmonic 136 of 75Hz, and a 15th harmonic 137of 3750 Hz. The lobes 138 around each significant frequency and the inaccuracy of the frequency can be caused to be two phenomena, either a small and inadequate time based sample measurement possibly with jitter in the signal itself, or the presence of high frequency fast transients that do not appear in normal oscilloscope waveforms but distort the waveform, in this case, as in ever prior example shown, the FFTs of a square wave, i.e. a repeating digital pulse, exhibit purely odd harmonics of the fundamental
The behavior of a square wave or a string of digital pulses is summarized in the discrete Fourier transform calculation of a square wave shown in Figure 9F, where the fundamental frequency 140 is accompanied only by odd harmonics 141, 142., 143. ,.144 corresponding to the 3(iS, 5th, 7 .... 19* harmonics. All even harmonics 145 of the fundamental frequency ft carry no energy, meaning their Fourier coefficient is zero, I.e. they do not exist if the y-axis also represents the cumulative current or energy of the fundamental and each harmonic component, then assuming the total current is present in the first 20 harmonics and all other harmonics are filtered out, the fundamental alone represents only 47% of the total current as shown by curve 146, This means that less than half the current is oscillating at the desired frequency. Including the 3rd harmonic 141, the total current is 63%, while adding the 5* and the 7th increases the content to 72% and 79% respectively,
While even harmonics, e.g. 2nd, 4th, 6th, ... >(2n)t , tend to produce reinforce their fundamental frequency, it is well know that odd harmonics tend to interfere, i.e. fight', with one another, in the audio spectrum, for example, vacuum tube amplifiers produce even harmonic distortion, a sound that sounds good to the human ear. Bipolar transistors, on the othe hand produce odd harmonics that interfere with one another, in the audio spectrum producing a scratchy uncomfortable sound, wasting energy. Whether these frequencies are exciting an audio membrane, e.g. a speaker transducer, a microphone transducer, or the human ear drum, or whether they are exciting a m olecule or a group of molecules, the result is the same - orderly oscillations of even harmonics exhibit constructive
interference enforcing the oscillations, while competing random oscillations of odd harmonies result in random and even time-varying waveforms manifesting destructive wave interference, producing erratic inefficient energy coupling in a system, and sometimes even giving rise to unstable conditions in the system.
Such is the case in any physical system that can absorb and temporarily store energy then release the energy kineticaily. To understand the interaction of such a physical system excited with a spectrum of frequ encies, however, the concept o oscillatory behavior and resonance must he considered. Thereafter, the behavior of chemical and biological systems, which follow the same laws of physics, can more thoroughly be considered,
Principles of Oscillations and Resonance
in any physical system capable of manifesting both kinetic energy, i.e. the energy of motion, and potential energy, i.e. stored energy, there exists the capability of oscillatory behavior and "resonance". Oscillations occur when energy repeatedly transfers from one form of potential energ into another, In mechanical examples the compression and expansion of a spring represent an oscillatory system where the spring's tension represents stored energy and where a swinging door represent the kinetic energy of motion and its associated friction leading to energy loss. A similar example is a pendulum or a child swinging in a swing, each time stopping at the top of each arc (where kinetic energy is zero and potential energy is maximum) and then falling back to earth as the swing reaches the bottom of its arc (where the potential energy is at is minimum value and the velocity and kinetic energy of the swing is at its maximum value), i such an example the potential energy is stored in the force due to gravity. Similar phenomena occur in buildings and bridges, sensitive to both wind and seismic vibrations. Each time the object oscillates friction removes some of the energy and the system loses its total energy. U nless that energy is replenished the system will eventual !y lose all of its energy and cease oscillating.
The mechanism of oscillatory behavior is also manifest in electrical circuits with magnetic and capacitive elements, where the energy may be stored in a magnetic field, or an electric field or some combination thereof. The current and voltage in inductive and capacitive elements are intrinsically out of phase and once energized, spontaneously oscillate, with stored energy being redistributed from the inductor to the capacitor, or vise versa. During the oscillations, whenever current is flowing between the energy storage elements, some of the system's energy is lost as heat as a result of electrical resistance.
At sufficiently high oscillating frequencies, however, the electric field and magnetic field can no longer be contained within the circuit elements. The resulting electro-magnetic field propagates through space as an electromagnetic "traveling" wave, also known as electromagnetic radiation or EMR. Depending on the
oscillatory frequency, EM may comprise radio waves, microwaves, infrared radiation, light, ultraviolet light, X-rays, or gamma-rays. In the vacuum of space EMR can travel indefinitely. By contrast, for any EMR traveling through matter, the wave is gradually attenuated and energy is lost as it travels, in a manner similar to the energy loss due to friction in mechanical systems or to losses due to resistance in electrical circuits.
In any system capable of exhibiting oscillatory behavior, the timing of when energy is put into the system determines its response, In the swing example, if an adult pushes the swing before the it has returned fully to the apex of its height, the pushing force will act against the swing's swinging motion and reduce its energy lowering the maximum height to which the swing reaches on its next cycle. The action of pushing too early impedes or interferes with the swing's motion and can be referred to as destructive interference. Conversely, if the adult waits till after the swing reaches its peak height where the swing reverses direction, pushing at that time will put energ into the swing and reinforce the oscillation making the swing reach a higher height, on its next oscillatory cycle. The action of pushing at just the right time, thereby reinforcing the swing's motion, can be referred to as constructive interference. If the pushing is done cyclically at just the right moment the swing will go higher wit each cycle and the benefit from pushing at the right time maximizes the energy transfer into the swing's oscillations. The swing is said to be oscillating near its "resonant" frequency.
The same thing is true in an electrical system. I a system LC oscillatory circuit or RLC "tank", energy "sloshes" back and forth between the inductor L and the capacitor C (hence the metaphor of water sloshing to and fro in a "tank"). If an oscillating source of energy such as an AC voltage source driving the network oscillates with a frequency approaching the value 1/ SQRT(LC), the oscillations will reach their maximum magnitude and the energy coupling from the AC voltage source into the tank circuit will he greatest. The presence of resistance R causes a loss in energy in the tank circuit. Any excitation frequency below or above the resonant frequency will couple energy into the circuit less efficiently than at the resonant freq ency.
To better envision this behavior, the frequency of the oscillating voltage source exciting the oscillating tank circuit is swept starting from a low frequenc below resonance up and increased constantly to a higher value. At very low frequencies (near DC) the tank circuit may not react at all As the frequency ramps, energy couples into the system and current begins to oscillate between the inductor and capacitor. As the driving frequency continues to increase, the response of the tank to the excitation and the corresponding magnitude of the oscillations wili grow, steadily at first and then rapidly as the resonant frequenc is approached. When the driving voltage source reaches the circuit's resonant frequency the oscillations will hit their peak value and most efficient energy transfer. Continuing to ramp the frequenc beyond resonance will reduce the magnitude of the oscillations,
While the example cited describes a system with a single resonant frequency, oftentimes a system contains more than two energ storage elements, conditions or mechanisms and may therefore exhibit two or more natural resonant frequencies. An example of a system with two resonant frequencies is shown in the graph of Figure 10 as a plot of the magnitude of an oscillation G(f) on y-axis and with frequency f on the x-axis. As shown, response curve 151 includes a lower-frequenc resonant peak 152 at a frequency fl and a second higher-frequency resonant peak 153 at a frequency Γ2. As shown, resonant peak 152 is greater in magnitude and broader in frequency than resonant peak 153, which exhibits a lower magnitude and a sharper sensitivity to frequency. The magnitude of the system's response between the two resonant peaks never reaches zero, meaning the entire system of energy storage elements are interacting at those excitation frequencies.
So using the prior analytical method, sweeping a single AC voltage source from low to high frequency, will trace out curve 151 starting with an increase in G(f| until resonant peak 152 at frequency fl is reached then declining and flattening at a lower magnitude until the response again grows as the driving frequency
approaches f2 and resonant peak 153, beyond which the response declines. In many instances, physical systems include resonant peaks that are never observed because they are never excited under normal conditions. A classic example of this behavior is a building that sways harmlessly at a fixed frequenc in the wind, but in an earthquake resonates severely at a lower frequenc leading to building collapse. So in any oscillatory system, if the resonant frequencies are not known it is difficult to analyze a system's response to excitation, especially unintended excitation,
Even worse, if the energy source providing the excitation itsel f includes a broad and unknown spectrum of frequencies, i is difficult to predict, understand, or even interpret the system's response, Such is the problem with digital p lse excitation of an oscillatory system with multiple resonant frequencies. Since each digital pulse generates a fundamental frequency and a spectrum of harmonics, the various frequencies may stimulate unknown, unwanted, or even potentially harmful harmonics,
in other cases, it may be desirable to intentionally stimulate severa l specific resonant frequencies hut not others. In such cases, digital pulses are also
undesirable since the harmonic cover a range of frequencies and may stimuiate unwanted resonances, Ideally then, it is preferable in such circumstances to generate oscillations at the two target frequencies, e.g. at fl and f2. Unfortunately, even ignoring the problem of harmonics, another limitation of digital pulse control to generate pulses at or near a desired frequency, is that the fundamental excitation frequency is intrinsically monophonic, i.e. comprising a single frequency, pitch., or note.
For example, as shown in Figure 11, if a system continuously generates digital pulses 191 at 60Hz, and then we add a second series of digital pulses 155 at 1201Hz on top of and synchronized to the original 60Hz pulses 156, the resulting waveform 193 is identical to the digital pulses 157 at 120Hz with no 60Hz component, This means for even mu ltiples of synchronized digital pulses, only the highest frequency multiple is manifest. In essence, when using digital pulses modulated at or near a desired frequency, it is only possible to excite a circuit or an energy conversion device (such as a laser or LED) with one single fundamental frequency, so it is not possible to produce chords or multiple frequencies
simultaneously with the digital technology and methods used in today's
phototherapy apparatus.
Limitations of Pulsed Phototherapy
in conclusion, Fourier analysis reveals that using digital pulses to control the brightness and pattern frequency of an electrical load., such as an LED or a laser used in a phototherapy system, resul ts in a spectrum of frequencies wel l beyond that of the fundamental frequency used to pulse the energy conversion device. The resulting harmonic spectrum, comprising odd harmonics, wastes energy and potentially compromises a phototherapy device's ability to acutely control and deliver a specific desired frequency of operation for an electronic circuit or in an energy conversion device (such as a laser or LED),
Applying principles of oscillation and resonance to phototherapy, digital modulation of LED or laser light results in a broad spectrum of frequencies potentially exciting various chemical and photobiological processes in an
uncontrolled manner. Since the frequencies needed to activate particular chemical reactions in the healing process are not accurately known, stimulating tissue with an uncontrolled spectrum of harmonics renders identification and isolation of key beneficial frequencies and the systematic improvement of treatment efficacy impossible. Along with ambiguity stemming from inadequately reported test conditions., harmonic spectral contamination resulting from square-wave pulsing of a light source during phototherapy experiments represents an uncontrolled variable responsible, at least in part, for the conflicting results and inconsistent efficacies observed reported in published studies attempting to optimize pulsed wave phototherapy. Assuming that most photobiological processes occur in the audio spectrum,, i.e. below 20kHz, then analysis shows the impact of spectral
contamination from pulsed operation should be worse at lower digital pulse frequencies because unwanted harmonic spectrum generated more significantly overlaps and influences the frequencies sensitive to photobiological stimulation.
For example, the harmonic spectrum of a 292Hz square wave pulse contaminates most of the audio spectrum, while significant harmonics generated from a 5kHz square wave pulse occur in the ultrasonic range, i.e. >20kHz, and beyond a cell's ability to react to such rapid frequencies,
To elaborate on this point, Figure 12A graphicall contrasts the harmonic content of a 292 Hz digital pulse to that of a pure tone of 292Hz, i.e. the fourth octave of D (or D4) and even multiples of this frequency, as recommended by Nogier's studies on healing. Using pure tones, a 2 2Hz fundamental frequency 161 would exhibit constructive interference and improved energy transfer when blended with other harmonic multiples of D in the audio spectrum 163, for example D5, D6, D7, and 1)8 at corresponding frequencies of 584Hz, 1,168Hz, 2,336Hz, and 4,672Hz. Instead, a 292Hz repeating digital puls 162 results in odd harmonics 164 comprising 3rd, 5th, 7th, 9lh, 11th, 13th, 15lh, harmonic frequencies at 876Hz, 1,460Hz, 2,044Hz, 2,6 8 Hz, 3,212 Hz, 3/796Hz, 4,380Hz and so on, none of which even remotely match the even harmonic frequencies recommended b physiological studies, instead, the resulting spectrum content of odd harmonics 164 generated by 292!3z digital pulse 162 contaminates much of the audio spectrum where adverse or non-beneficial interaction with man biochemical processes ma occur and interfere with desired photobiomodulation.
While digital pulses produce unwanted harmonics, not ail pulse frequencies should have an equally significant impact on biological processes and pbotobiomodulation. Figure 12B contrasts a 4,672Hz digital pulse 172 and its generated odd harmonies 174 to a pure tone of D in the eighth octave 171 (i.e. D8), which also has a frequency of 4,672 Hz, and eve n harmonies 173 of the pure tone D8. Specifically, a pure tone of D in the eighth octave 171 includes even multiples of this frequency, 1)9 and D10 at 9,344Hz and 18,688Hz, respectively, in the audio range where most photobiomodulation occurs, in contrast, at 37,376Hz, the note Dl 1 is in the ultrasonic spectrum, a range of notes above the frequency illustrated b line 175 that is too high to be heard and for most cells or tissue to react to chemically. The key point of this graph is that, despite the fact that a 4,672Hz digital pulse 172 results in a whole spectrum of odd harmonics 174, only a single harmonic, the 3rd harmonic at 14,016Hz, falls within in the audio spectrum and below the frequency specified by line 1 5. All the other harmonics are too high in frequency for most tissues to respond or react to significantly,
In conclusion, the spectral contamination resulting from digital pulses is more significant at lowe freq uencies, because above 5kHz pulse rates, most of the unwanted odd harmonics that occur are ultrasonic, above the audio frequency range and at frequencies too high to adversely impact beneficial photobiomodulation.
Also, aside from producing undesirable harmonics, controlling a laser or an array of LEDs with a digital excitation pattern of pulses in a desired frequency range is incapable of producing chords or multiple frequencies simultaneously, thereby limiting a phototherapy device's potential for controlling or optimizing energy coupling into cells, tissue, or organs.
What Is needed is a means to control the excitation pattern operation of a laser or LED array to synthesize a specific desired frequency or group of frequencies (chords} without spectral contamination from unwanted and uncontrolled harmonics, especially those contaminating the audio spectrum, i.e. below 20kHz. improving Photobiomodulation through Harmonic Control
in order to provide complete control of photobiomodulation during phototherapy treatments (low-level light therapy or LLLT), the disclosed system described herein is capable of systematicall driving arrays of various wavelength LEDs or lasers with user-selectabl arbitrary waveforms (and sequences of waveforms] comprising continuous and time-varying modulation patterns, frequencies and duty factors, free of unwanted harmonics or spectra!
contamination. Time varying waveforms comprise digital pulses, sinusoids, pulsed sinusoids, continuous operation, and user-defined waveforms and mathematical functions.
The goal of th is enhanced control is to improve treatment efficacy by adj usting device operation to synchronize to natural frequencies of particular biological processes specific to ceils, tissue, organs, and physiological systems. By timing the energy delivery and controlling its frequencies and harmonics, tissu specificity can be enhanced, in order to ascertain these operating parameters, the biochemical and cytological origin of the frequenc dependence of
photobiomodulation must first be considered, starting with present-day knowledge and available technical literature,
Origin of Photohlomoduiatioti Frequency Dependence
The frequency dependence of photobiomodulation and its influence on phototherapy efficacy is correlated to physical mechanisms within living cells, tissue, organs, and physiological systems.
According to the previously cited paper, "Effect of Pulsing in Low-Level Light Therapy" published in Lasers Surg. Med. August 2010, volume 42(6), pp. 450-466, "if there is a biological expla nation of the improved effect of pulsed light it is either due to some fundamental frequency that exists in biologicai systems in the range of tens to hundreds of H¾ or alternatively due to some biologicai process tha has a time scale of a few milliseconds."
This paper cites various natural frequencies occurring within living organisms, including electroencephalography studies identifying four distinct classes of brain waves, namely alpha waves at 8- 13 Hz, beta waves a t 14-4QHz, delta waves at 1-3 Hz, and theta waves at 4~7Hz. These various waves are present during different conditions or sleep, rest, meditation, visual, and cognitive mental activity and are affected by illness, concussion and traumatic brain injury, and age. The authors surmise "The possibility of resonance occurring between the frequency of the light pulses and the frequency of the brain waves may explain some of the results with transcranial LLLT using pulsed light"
Similar observations have been made by other authors in regards to electrocardiogram signals and regulation of heart function. Resting heart rates typically occur in the 60 to 100 beats per minute, or roughl IHz to 2Mz, depending on a person's age and health, Peristaltic contractions in the intestines ca occur in sub IHz frequencies. These systems and their optimum response conditions do not represent simple chemical or electrical reaction rates because they are operating as a clocked system with their own time regulation, generall electrochemical in nature. For example, through an electrochemical process, potassium is intimately involved in setting the heart's natural pulse rate in humans,
Another entire y different class of mechanisms present within ceils and potentially responsible for the photobiomodulatio frequency dependence appears related to chemical or ionic reaction rates and ionic transport. The Hash mi et al, paper continues, "the time scale for opening and closing of ion channels is of the order of a few milliseconds;" with referenced citations having time constan ts for ion channels ranging from 0.1 to 100 milliseconds, ie, 100Hz to 10H¾ including potassium and calcium ion channels in mitochondria. Other papers suggest sarcoiemma, the lipid bi layer plasma membrane providing scaffolding for muscle cells, may also be responsible for photobiomodulation frequency dependence, since such membranes often serve as ion pumps.
On a cellular level another rnecha isra responsible for photobiomodulation frequency dependence is the photodissociation of nitric oxide (NO) from a protein bonding site (heme or copper) found in cytochrome c oxidase (CCO). CCO acts as a NO scavenger molecule providing negative feedback and MO regulation. As described earlier in reference to Figure 2, in the presence of photobiomodulation, NO is released only where it is subjected to phototherapy, presumabl only in the locale of diseased or injured tissue. The observed benefit of pulsed phototherapy, it is postulated, occurs because pulsed Sight can trigger multiple photodissociation events, while in continuous wave f CW) mode the release of NO will stabilize at. a lower fixed rate, balancing NO release with the counter-reaction of NO reattachment.
Figure 13 schematically summarizes the physical mechanisms of
photobiomodulation. As shown, photon 190 is absorbed, by and interacts with molecule 1 1 to make or break new bonds. The energy of the impinging light depends on its wavelength as given by the Einstein relation E-hc/λ or for
convenience sake by the relation E= 1 ,24eV-pm/A where λ is measured i μηι. Fo 6S0nm red light E~1.91eV per photon while for 9S0nm NIR light £-131 eV. While most chemical bonds, including hydrogen, ionic, and most covalent bonds range in bond energies from 0.2eV to lOeV, the making or breaking of a chemical bond from the energy of a photon is complicated by the fact that molecules and especially crystals comprise groups of atoms with many bonds working collectively, mea ning breaking a single bond does not necessaril induce a bond transformation.
Moreover, depending on the reaction, multiple sources of energy and enzymes may assist the photon in inducing a chemical transformation. For example, a single ATP molecule may release up to 0,6eV of energy, thereby assisting singularly or collectively in fueling a photochemical reaction.
The result of the photobiomodulation of molecule 191 may be manifest itself in one of several mechanisms, namely electrical conduction 192, chemical transformations 193, ionic conduction 194, or thermal vibration 195. Release of free electrons 192 during ionization describes the purely electrical component of photobiomodulation. Electron transport occurring with a time constant τ(.· is relatively fast and capable of responding to stimuli from kHz up to tens of kHz.
Photobiomodulation inducing electrical conduction through electron emission and electron transport can be referred to as biopiiotOeleetric conduction,
Chemical transitions 193 along with ionic electrical conduction 194 having respective time constants Xe and TQ are slower, responding to photobiomodulation in to 10Hz to the Ikllz range. Chemical processes are complex;, involving a structural transform tion in the affected molecule 198 with a corresponding change in its chemical reactivity and its stored potential energy (PE)< Ionic processes 194 are significantly slower tha simple electron 192 conduction, because the conducting ions 197 are oftentimes large molecules conducting by diffusion (driven by a concentration gradient dNcs/dx) or b electrical conduction driven by intra- and intercellular electric field induced force qE, said electric fields existing as a result of spatially unevenly distributed ions. Pliotobiomoduiation inducing electrical conduction through ionic transport can be referred to as hiophotoionic conduction. Similarly pliotobiomoduiation inducing structural transformations in molecules can be referred to as hiophotoehemical transformation.
The other mechanism, thermal vibrations 195 is the spread of heat, either classical kinetic energy or by quantized phonon conduction causing molecules 196 to vibrate at increased levels compared to their surroundings as energy escapes the photo-excited molec les and spreads thermally into its neighbors. Transient thermal effects, vibrations spreading across tissue can occur at a rate of 1 to 10Hz while steady state conduction can take minutes to stabilize, i.e. responding to sub- Hz frequencies. Thermal vibration is another important mechanism in
photobiomodulation because thermal excitation increases reaction rates by causing interacting ions and molecules to bump into one another more frequently and rapidly, the molecular version of stirring reactant chemicals in solution.
Photobiomodulation inducing the diffusion of heat between and among molecules can be referred to as "biophotothermal" conduction or thermal vibration.
Frequency dependent photobiomodulation results from these physical processes interacting with the modulating or pulse frequencies of incoming photons. Overstimulation occurs when the digital pulse rate or light modulating frequency is fester then the physical process's ability to respond to it In such cases, the response is reduced because the cell or moiecuie simply cannot keep up with the .stimulus. Such a case is analogous to a busy freeway with entrance ramp metering lights sttick-on causing more-and-more cars to jam onto the freeway until no one is able to move, Understimulation occurs when the digital pulse rate or light
modulating frequency is much slower than the cell's ability to absorb it in which case little or no photobiomodulation occurs. This condition is analogous to a freeway whose metering lights are allowing almost no one to get onto the freeway, with the similar result that no one gets anywhere. Only if the photobiomodulation frequency matches the system's natural response frequency is there an optimum resu lt and efficient energy transfer. For example, if the metering lights onto the freeway are timed correctly, the optimum number of cars will fill the freeway and promptly travel to thei destination without starting a traffic jam.
As detailed,, understimulation at too low of a frequency and overstimulation at too high of a frequency results in a diminished photobiomodulation response, and only in between, at the optimum pulse rate or excitation frequency can the photobiomodulation response and phototherapeutic efficacy be maximized. This peak response condition occurring at a particular frequency appears very similar to the resonant curve of Figure 10, especially since the prior analysis reveals multiple time constants exist in any cells, tissue or organs, each optimized to induce specific electrical, ionic, chemical and thermal mechanisms.
Therefore, the various peak response conditions can be referred to as bioresonance even though the mechanism ma not involve energ storage and timed release as in the true resonant systems described above. Being able to stimulate these select resonant frequencies in a controlled manner free from spectral contamination is critical, especially in avoiding the inadvertent generation of frequencies causing destructive interference and loss of efficacy. Moreover, invoking multiple bioresonant mechanisms simultaneously is not possible using present-day digital pulse based phototherapy systems. The disclosed new electronic drive system described herein comprises both an inventive apparatus and novel methods for realizing sinusoidal drive and arbitrary waveform synthesis of LED or laser light for phototherapy, not available or even suggested in the prior art
Waveform Synthesis System for Phototherapy
A key element in driving LEDs and laser diodes with controlled frequencies and harmonics is the circuitry and algorithms used in generating the device's waveforms, patterns, and driving conditions. While the following description details the means to drive arrays of multiple strings of series-connected LEDs, the same circuitry can be adapted to drive one or multiple semiconductor lasers,
Because the light output, of an LED depends on its current and because its brightness is poorly correlated to the forward voltage present across the LED during conduction, it is preferable to use controlled constant-sources (and current sinks) rather than constant voltage drive. For example if an series-connected string of LEDs is powered by a voltage source connected through a series resistor, the LED current ILED will unavoidably vary with the total series forward voltage drop V? of ail the LEDs. Provided the power supply voltage +VLED is higher than the forward voitage drop Vr of the LED string, i.e. + Vim > V¾ then the LEI) current ΚΕΏ is given by the series relation ILED = (+VLED - Wj/R illustrating that any change in the LED voltage will result in changes in LBD current and. hence in LED brightness. Since LED voltages cannot be accurately controlled or matched, unless each LED string comprises sorted LEDs with matched total voltages, an given LED string will invariably he brighter or dimmer than the next.
Figure 14 illustrates two equivalent represen tations 200a and 200b of a current sink controlling the current through a string of series-connected LEDs 205a. In schematic 200a, current sink 201a represents an idealized current controlled device with sensing and feedback designed to maintain a prescribed current h.Eife in LED string 20Sa. As shown, the LED string 205a comprises V anode-to-cathode series-connected LEDs, where m is a mathematical variable and not meant to represent the 13th letter of the English alphabet The schematic element 1.99a represents feedback from sensing the value of current hms and using feedback to insure the current stays constant even if the voitage across current sink 201a varies.
When conducting the value of the LED current ii.r;o.: is proportional to an analog input current aiwi set by low-voltage current source 202a. When current sink 201a is not conducting, i.e. when current source 202a is not enabled, the voltage across the LEDs is minimal and the voltage supported across current sink 201a approaches the value +Vim, a relatively high voltage, e.g. 40V, compared to the lower voltage of
Figure imgf000043_0001
typically 3 V to 5V. Current sink 201a may he digitally toggled on or off, i.e. conducting or not conducting, through its digital enable pin labeled "Enable" connected to digital synthesizer 203a. Note that the subscript "a" represents one on multiple channels driving separate series-connected strings of LEDs in an LED pad. LED pads may contain many independently controlled strings of LEDs, namely LED output channels a, b, c, .... , n, where "n" is a mathematical variable representing the number of channeis and not the 14* letter of the English alphabet
in schematic circuit 200b, the series connection of "m" LEDs is symbolically replaced by a single LED with the number "m" inside the device and the voltage +Vfa iabe!ed across the LED. As shown, current sink 201a is further detailed showing a analog feedback circuit comprising MOSFET driver 215a driving the gate of high- voltage MOSFE 216a, in operation, MOSFET driver 215a provides a voltage o the gate of current- sink MOSFET 216a allowing cur rent (LEOS to flow through the sensi ng circuitry contained with MOSFET driver 215a to ground. This current is then compared to a multiple of the analog input current alref set by low -voltage current source 202a, and the gate voltage on current-sink MOSFET 216a automatically adjusted by the circuitry within MOSFET driver 215a until the currents airef and liEDa match and I LEOS is at is desired value. Because of its analog closed-loop circuitry, feedback from MOSFET driver 215a is nearly instantaneous, adjusting dynamically with fluctuating voltages and programmed changes in the reference current input from current source 202a,
The reference current ctL t from current source 202a may be realized by a fixed, time varying, or adjustable reference voltage and a series resistor trimmed for accuracy to convert the precise voltage into a precise reference current The accurate voltage source may comprise a fixed-value Zener diode or a bandgap voltage, a voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO), or a digital-to-analog converters (DAC) facilitating digital control of the analog current value output from current- source 202a, The digital pulse output from digital synthesizer 203a can be realized by counters and clock circuits, by programmable logic arrays (PLAs), or by a microprocessor executing firmware or software instructions.
Some implementations of the aforementioned circuitry are described in a previously-cited related U.S. Application No. 14/073,371. Other exemplary and novel analog, digital and mixed-mode circuits will be included herein iater in the application.
Figure IS illustrates the diverse variety of wa veforms that may be synthesized by the described driver circuitry. As shown., graph 240a illustrates the input waveforms of current sink 201a comprising the digital Enable signal output from digital synthesizer 203a,, and the reference current ire! output from current source 202a. Graph 240b illustrates the resulting LED current conduction waveform with the same time references ¾, etc. as graph 240a included for easy
comparison. The generated waveforms are examples, not intended to imply any specific operating condition attempting to avoid undesirable harmonics in phototherapy systems, but simply to illustrate that the combination of digital pulsing and analog current control offers nearly limitless control of LED excitation.
As shown in graph 240a, the digital Enable signal comprises line segments 241 through 245, and reference current ahd comprises curves 251 through 258. In the corresponding output of LED current: in graph 240b, the instantaneous LED current is illustrated by curves 260 through 269, while the average LED current, where applicable, is represented b the dashed lines shown by line segments 271 through 275,
To understand the interaction between the analog and digital control of LED excitation, we will compare the two graphs I each corresponding time interval. Specifically, before time ti, enable signal 241 is at a logic zero and reference current 251 is biased at some nominal value ^, e.g. at an input current corresponding to an li.EDii output current of 20mA. Because digital enable signal 241 is at a logic zero, the LED cu rrent 260 is at zero and the string of LEDs remains off despite the non~ zero value of reference current edref.
Between time ti and b digital enable signal 242 Jumps from a logic zero state to a logic one state while the value of reference current 251 remains biased at a value of aim for example at 20mA to 30mA. As a result, LED current 261 jumps to the value of reference current 251. The off-to-on transition in LED conduction at time ti illustrates the effect of digitally "toggling" an analog current sink.
While digital enable signal 242 remains on, at time iz the analog magnitude alrrf of reference current 252 jumps to a higher value and then declines in specific but user settable manner until it finally settles at a value 253, which is the same as its original value 251. The LED current 262 similarly tracks the reference, jumping from 20mA to a higher value, e.g. 27mA, before settling back at 20mA at time ts, shown by LED current 263. The output waveform of LED currents 262 and 263 illustrates that the reference current can be used to facilitate purely analog control of LED current and brightness with n digital pulsing whatsoever.
At time , as shown by curve 254, the reference current commences a controlled, small signal sinusoidal oscillation superimposed o a non-zero average DC value. The perturbation in the reference current may be considered small-signal because the amplitude of the oscillation is small compared to the average value of current dm, As a symmetric oscillation, the average current remains unchanged from the DC value (shown by curve 253] of the reference current existing before the oscillations commenced. While any oscillating frequency may be considered possible, practical considerations and the value of oscillating waveforms in phototherapy suggest the operating frequency should he 20kHz or below. The corresponding LED current, depicted as curve 264 in graph 240b commencing at time t , tracks that of the reference current shown by curve 254, having an average current value (dashed line 271) of 20mA and varying symmetrically around the average LSD current by some fixed amount, for example ±lmA, This means that the LED current varies sinusoidally, with peak-to-peak values ranging from 19mA to 21mA.
At time ts, as shown by curve 255, the small signal oscillations in the reference current during the prior interval - grow into large signal oscillations shown by curve 255 and having the same frequency of oscillatio as the prior interval. In the example shown the minimum reference current ai reaches zero (or nearly so) while the peak reference current reaches twice the average value, i.e. twice the value f the reference current represented by curve 253. As before, since the value of the digital enable signal (line segment 242) rema ins at a logic one state, the LED current (curve 265) tracks the value as a multiple of the reference current (curve 255) both in frequency and in wave shape, having an average LED current (dashed line 271) of 20mA with peak-to-peak oscillations around that average of nearly ±20mA, meaning the LED current varies sinusoidally from 0mA to 40mA with an a erage value of 2 OmA. Starting at time ¾, the same oscillatory operating conditions persist as existed in the interval ts-ts, except that the oscillation frequency of the reference current represented by curve 255 and correspond LED current represented by curve 265 is intentionally reduced to a lower oscillating frequency., shown by curve 256 for the reference current and by curve 266 for the corresponding LED current, with the output still maintaining an average LED current 71 of 20mA, the same average as previously occurred for oscillator LED currents shown by curves 264 and 265.
At time t?, the roles of the digital enable signal and the reference current aird are reversed, whereby the value of reference current becomes constant at some nominal value (shown by line segment 257) and the digital enable signal begins pulsed operation. Specifically at time t?> the digital enable signal (shown by curve 243) commences pulsed operation with 50% duty factor, pulsing at a digital clock frequency of 1 /Ts., where Ti is the period of each repeated cycle. At time ts, as shown by curve 244, the pulse on-time of digital enable signal increases while the period Ti and the corresponding pulse frequency remain the same as before As a result, the 20mA pulses of LED current at a 50% duty factor, represented by curve 267, become an LED current become an LED current at a 75% duty factor, represented by curve 268. This mode of operation comprises fixed-frequenc PWM or pulsed width modulation operation, where the average LED current varies from 50% of 20mA, i.e. 10mA average LED current (represented fay dashed line 272], to 75% of 20mA or 15mA average LED current (represented by c shed line 273) at time ta, At time t¾ while the value of the reference current remains unchanged (curve 257), the period of the pulses of the digital enable signal increases to a value T¾ as does the pulse on time, as shown by curve 245, This is reflected fay the waveform of the LED current (curve 269), As shown, the duty factor, the pulse on time of the digital enable signal represented fay curve 245, divided fay the total period T2 also increases, resulting in the LED current having a higher average value (shown by dashed line 274), corresponding to an increase of duty factor to 90%. The reduction in operating frequenc from 1/Ts during the interval between times t? to t¾ to the lower operating frequency I/T2 thereafter is an example of variable frequency PWM operation, and clarifies that PWM dut factor can be varied independently of the digital pulse frequency.
in the final waveform shown in Figure IS., at time tie the value of reference current increases to a higher value (represented by the transition from curve 257 to curve 258], while the waveform of digital enable signal remains the same as it was in the prior interval tg-tio. The result is that the instantaneous value of the LED output current increases, as shown by the transition from curve 269 to curve 270 and the average LED current also increases, as shown by the transition from the dashed line 274 to the dashed line 275. Despite increasing the average and instantaneous LED brightness, the dut factor and the pulse frequency of the LED current remain unchanged from the corresponding values in the time interval fe-tio, in conclusion, the instantaneous and time average value of the LED current can be controlled in numerous and flexible ways using analog control of the reference current and digital pulse control of the enable signal of the current sink schematic representations shown in Figure 14. Realizing current sink 215a, reference current source 202a, and digital synthesizer 203a can be accomplished in many ways. Actual realization of these circuits must address issues of accuracy, reproducibility, and scalability into multichannel systems. Such circuitry can he divided into two broad categories - analog LED control and digital synthesis,
A nalog LED Curren t Control
Referring again to Fi ure 14, controlling LED current hm-* requires analog control to implement the sense and LED drive circuitry within MOSFET driver 215a, as well as to implement precision reference current 202a,
Current sink 20 la comprises high- oltage MOSFET 216a biased to control the LED current keoa and MOSFET driver 215a which senses the LED current lim* compares the LED current ILEDS to the desired reference current a and
dynamically adjusts the gate voltage on high-voltage M OSFET 216a until the LED current Iusoa matches a predefined scalar multiple of the reference current 202a, Measurement and feedback must operate in a closed loop manner to adjust for any manufacturing variations in high-voltage MOSFET 216a affecting its transconductance and channel-to-channel matching such as threshold voltage and gate oxide thickness.
Although the reference current ct is schematically represented as a controlled current, distributing precise currents across multiple channels, as shown in Figure 16A, is problematic because the total current ncdref from current source 206 will not necessarily be distributed evenly among the inputs to MOSFET drivers 215a through 2lSn, i.e. h≠ ≠ In. The solution to this problem., shown conceptually in Figure 1 6B, is to employ a reference voltage source 207 to distribute a voltage Vref rather than a current to each channel and to convert this voltage into identical currents using a transconductance amplifier 208a, 20Sb...208n in each channel. For example, transconductance amplifier 208a converts into current la feeding MOSFET driver 2 5a, transconductance amplifier 208b converts the same ref into current lb feeding MOSFET driver 215b, and so on.
hi practice however, it is unnecessary to employ n-channels of
transconductance amplifiers since the voltage conversion function can be performed inside the MOSFET driver's circuitry. For example, as shown in Figure 16C, the c rrent h coming from reference voltage source 207 and feeding MOSFET driver 215a is used to bias a current mirror MOSFET 210 through bias resistor 2 2 and a parallel network of trim resistors 213a through 213x, The subscript "x" refers to a mathematical variable and not the 24th letter of the English alphabet. Since the gate of MOSFET 210 is connected to its drain, i.e. MOSFET 210 is "threshold connected," the gate voltage of MOSFET 210 will naturally bias itself to a voltage V½ sufficient to conduct the desired reference current L as set b series resistor 212 and a parallel trim network 220 comprising resistors 213a through 213g. MOSFET 210 and the parallel combination o resistor 212 and trim network 220 form voltage divider, where the voltage across mirror MOSFET 210,, νΡ«<* = Vref - I^Requiv where l/¾ uiv = l/Rmax + 1/Ru + 1/Γ½ + ... + 1/Rtx. By changing the resistive value of the resistor network 220, ii.it adjusts itself to produce a gate voltage VGZ on MOSFET 210 consistent with its drain current because its gate and drain are connected, i.e. VGS = V≠ot> The gate voltage Vr,2 of MOSFET 210 will be slightly larger than its threshold voltage, hence the designation "threshold connected." This same gate voltage V z biases a much larger MOSFET 211 to the same gate drive condition such that the ratio of nominal operating currents through current mirror MOSFETs 210 and 211 are equal to the ratio of the gate widths of current mirror MOSFETs 210 and 211. For example, if reference current L is nominally set at 2μΑ and. l-m, is intended to be 20mA, then the size ratio between MOSFETs 210 and 21.1 should be selected to be 2t)mA/2uA=10,000, meaning that the gate width of current mirror M/QSFET 211 should be . 0,000 times larger than the gate width of MOSFET 210. Because of thei common gate biasing a nd fixed size ratio, only when current mirror MOSFET 211 is conducting 20mA, will its drain -to- source voltage Vscnse be equal to Vf)iiot. During illumination of LED string 205a, a differential amplifier 214, which is biased in a closed, loop with a stable voltage gain Av, drives the gate of high-voltage MOSFET 216a with a gate voltage VGI, till the current 1LEDm flowing in MOSFETs 2 6a and 211 drives the difference between e and Vpiiot to zero, i.e.
Figure imgf000050_0001
In this way, the reference current ]» is "mirrored" in MOSFET 211, and a controlled and constan current flows in LED string 205a even if the LED supply voltage +VL?;O changes.
During manufacturing, the resistor network 220 in parallel with fixed resistor 212 is functionally trimmed to produce an accurate output current thereby eliminating the impact of variability coming from MOSFET transconductance of MOSFET 210 or in the resistor value F . of resistor 212. In the example shown, trimming is performed by measuring the current ILED.3 and then blowing fuse links till the measured value of hm* reaches its target value, Because amplifier 214 controls the gate voltage of MOSFET 216a (and hence the current h &) and provided the size of MOSFETs 210 and 211 are equal, then the error voltage, the difference between V$e and V UK, will be driven to zero when the currents la and !LEDS are equal. Should the gate width of MOSFET 211 be larger than that of MOSFET 210, then when the error voltage i zero, the LED current hnaa will be larger than reference current L by the MOSFETs width ratio,
For example, initially after manufacturing and immediately prior to trimming when all the resistors in resistor network 220 are still electrically connected in parallel with resistor 212, the total resistance of the resistor network 21 is at its minimum value, is higher than its target value, and therefore the value of ILEDS will also be too high, e.g. 22mA (10% above its target value of 20mA). On the integrated circuit (or on a printed circuit board) probes are electrically connected to common metal trim pad 221 and to ail the specific resistor trim pads 222. For clarity's sake, only trim pad 222b in series with trim resistor 213b is labeled. A high current is then impressed by the tester between common trim pad 222 and a specific channel's trim pad,, e.g. trim pad 222b causing the thin portion of the metal fuse link 223b in series with trim resistor 2:13b to melt and become an electrical open circuit, disconnecting resistor 213b from trim network 220. With less parallel resistance, the total resistance increases,, the value of reference current drops , and the LED current in LED string 205a decreases by a fixed amount.
This measurement and link blowing process is repeated until the proper number of metal fuse links have been blown to produce targeted value of the current ΙΙΕΌΆ. If all the fuse links all blown, the resistance in series with MOSFET 210 increases to i ts maximum value i . the resistance of resistor 212, and reference current h reaches its lowest value. If that current is still above the target value, then that particular integrated circuit will be rejected as defective lowering production yield and increasing product cost As such, the resistance values Rti, S½, ...R used in resistor network 220 must be chosen carefully to accommodate normal stochastic variability in integrated circuit manufacturing. Note that the schematic
representation of fuse link 223b is illustrated by a line that is thinner than the rest of the conductors shown in the schematic of Figure 16C,
Also., single-pole double-throw switch 217 is shown to illustrate the digital enable function within MOSFET driver 215a. When MOSFET 216a is conducting and LED string 205a illuminated, then the digital input to digital gate buffer (shown as an inverter symbol) 218 is "high" or a logic one. I the enable signal is biased to a logic zero state, the switch connects the gate of high-voltage MOSFET 216a to ground, whereby VYa = 0 and MOSFET 216a turns off, cutting off the current in LED string 205a. While this function is shown as a mechanical switch, it is actually realized by a network of transistors configured as an analog switch or amplifier as commonly known to those skilled in the art Also, during times when a specific
SO channel is not enabled, the operation of differential amplifier 214 may be suspended or clamped in voltage so that it does not try to increase its output voltage in a futile attempt to increase the sense current in MOSFET 211.
VVhi!e resistor trimming is commonplace, trimming the size, i.e. gate width., of a network of transistors is generally easier and more accurate and reproducible than using resistors. Such a circuit is shown in Figure 16D, where resistor 212 has no parallel network of trim resistors but instead current mirror MOSFET 210 includes a parallel network 230 of trim MOSFETs 225a, 225b ...225x. Another advantage of using MOSFET trimming rather than resistor trimming is that network 230 is generally smaller than network 220, shown in Figure 16C. Like the resistor trim method, as shown fuse links (illustrated by fuse link 233x) are blown to disconnect i.e. turn off, one or more of MOSFETs 225a.„22SX.in parallel with current mirror MOSFET 210. For example, initially after manufacturing and immediately prior to trimming, when all of the MOSFETs 210 and 225a,.,225x are still connected in parallel, the size ratio between MOSFET 2 1 and the parallel combination of current mirror MOSFET 10 and trim network 230 is at a minimum and the current U.ED will be below its targeted value, e.g. at 18mA, 10% below its 20mA target By forcing a high current between common trim pad 231 and channel specific trim pad 232x, for example, fuse Sink 23 K is blown and the gate of trim MOSFET 225x is no longer connected to the gate of MOSFET 210. instead, with its gate disconnected, resistor 226x biases MOSFET 22Sx off. With less parallel gate width in MOSFET trim network 230., the current m irro r ratio i ncreases and for the same value of reference current L, the LED current ILED will increase conimensurately.
Note tha in Figure 160, the gates of MOSFETs 210 and 211 along with those in MOSFET trim network 230 are biased by a voltage source 224 and not by connecting the gate of current mirror MOSFET 210 to its drain. The advantage of this method is that the current, mirror MOSFET 211 may operate with a lower drain voltage V se using this method. While some initial accuracy may be lost using this method, functional trimming is able to correct for this deficiency. Beneficially, the lower voltage drop across MOSFET 211 reduces power dissipation and improves overall system efficiency of the LED driver 215a, implementing a reference voltage to replace the reference current also requires analog circuitry. Methods of manufacturing fixed value reference voltage sources are well known, including means to minimize variation in the voltage over temperature. Such methods include bandgap voltage references (see
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/bandgap_voltage_referen.ce) and Zener diode voltage references (see en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zener„diode). Since these techniques are well known to those skilled in the art, they wi.il not be discussed here.
Analog Sinusoidal Synthesis
While sinusoidal waveforms can he generated digitally as described later in this application, an inventive means disclosed herein by which to synthesize a sinusoidal waveform for driving LEDs in a phototherapy system is through the use of analog synthesis. While digital synthesis, as disclosed, involves pulsing an LED current on-and-off in constantly varying durations, i.e. pulse-width-modulation, to synthesize a sine wave (or chords of multiple frequency sine waves), analog synthesis involves smusoida!ly varying the reference current or current bias to the LED current control circuit, i.e. the current: mirror driving an LED string, in essence making the reference current into an oscillator, Referring to the exemplary waveforms shown in Figure 15, analog waveform synthesis is illustrated by sinusoids 254, 255 and 256 occurring at times , ts, and , and also by the arbitrary time dependent waveform representing the ability to implement any control function by waveform 2S2 at time tz,
As shown in Figure 17A, to perform analog sinusoidal synthesis, the reference voltage biasing MOSFET driver 2 l5a is replaced with a fixed frequency sine-wave or sinusoidal oscillating reference voltage source 235, also known as a linear or "harmonic" oscillator. Harmonic oscillators in the audio range can be made using inductor-capacitor, i.e. LC, oscillators or using resistor-capacitor, i.e. RC, oscillators circuits including RC phase shift oscillators, Wien bridge oscillators, or twin-T oscillators (see wikieducator.org/sinusoidaLosciiiator). During
manufac turing, the output voltage of oscillating reference voltage source 235 must be trimmed using resistors or transistor arrays in a manner similar to the trimming of MOSFET driver 215a described previously. In contrast, other common RC circuits often used for dock generation comprising simple relaxation oscillators are not harmonic oscillators and are not applicable because they produce sawtooth or triangular shaped waveforms with unwanted broadband spectral content.
in Figure 17 B, oscillating reference voltage source 235 is replaced by a controlled oscillating reference voltage source 236 with an adjustable frequency and an adjustable voltage. One example of such an oscillating reference is illustrated in Figure 17C comprising a Wien oscillator 280 with a voltage follower 281 and a trimable variable voltage output buffe 282. Wien oscillator 280 comprises two matched variable capacitors 284a and 284b and two matched programmable resistors 283a and 283b. The two RC networks create a voltage divider and feedback network returning signals from the output of a high-gain differential amplifier 285 back to its positive input A damping network comprising resistors 286a and 286b sets the gain and stability of the circuit to stabilize the oscillations.
The oscillating frequency may be adjusted b changing the resistance Rose of programmable resistors 283a and 283b or alternatively by changing the capacitance Cose of variable capacitors 284a and 284b. Variable resistance ma be realized by varying the gate voltage and resistance of OSFETs biased in their linear region of operation, or alternatively using a digital potentiometer comprising discrete resistors with parallel MOSFETs able to short out the various resistors. Variable capacitance may be realized by varaetors comprising back-to-back PN junction diodes, one of which is reverse biased to a fixed voltage to establish the junction capacitance. Changing either the resistance or the capacitance adjusts the oscillating frequency of Wien oscillator 280,
To insure that loading by triniabie variable voltage output buffer 282 does not affect the oscillating frequency of Wien oscillator 280, voltage follower 281 comprising a differential amplifier 287 with negative feedback through resistor 288 provides buffering, The voltage VW of voltage follower 281 is then adjusted by a resistor divider comprising a fixed resistor 292 and a variable resistor 291 with resistance values Ri and Kz respectively. The variable resistance 291 may comprise a trim network as well as a digital potentiometer, as described previously, The voltage at the ta point Iocated between resistors 291 and 292 and connected to the
S3 positive input of differentia! amplifier 289, is equal to the output voltage Vr. iout of voltage follower 28 1 and is given by V out = (V uf* 2)/(Ri+R2). With its output connected to its negative input by wire 290, differential amplifier 289 behaves as a voltage fol lowe faithfully reproducing the voltage waveform of its input while delivering the required current to a electrical load connected to its output Vrei t As shown by the output waveform 295, this output voltage Wefout has an AC component VAC(T.) extending from zero to Its peak value of +VAc(t) with an average valu of VAc(t)/2 and contains no added DC offset (aside from the intrinsic DC average value of a sine wave). Since the onl voltage component is AC, specifically the sine wave generated from harmonic oscillator 280 + VAc(t), then the sine wave can be said to represent large-signal AC behavior, i f it is desirable to also include a DC offset, the output of oscillating reference voltage source 236 may be further adj usted by the circuit shown in Figure 17D. In this circuit, the Vn-fout output of the circuit shown in Figure 17C is fed into a voltage follower 300 comprising a differentia! amplifier 302 (or another type of voltage followe circuit) through an AC coupling capacitor 303. Differential amplifier 302 operates as a voltage follower because of negative feedback on wire 301, connecting its output to its negative input. The purpose of AC coupling capacitor 303 is to block any DC offsets present within the output of oscillating reference voltage source 236. If no offset is present capacitor 303 may be eliminated.
Although operational amplifier 302 is powered from logic supply +Vk.gio its negative supply rail is not connected to ground but instead is connected to a generated voltage produced by a voltage bias circuit 309, an above ground voltage that acts as the negative supply rail for differential amplifier 302, Because of this re-referencing its negative supply rail, the output voltage Vi-etoufc? of differential amplifier 302 is shifted in its voltage level from ground to a more positive voltage, As a result, the waveform of the output voltage Wesoutz appears the same as the waveform of its input Wefout but Vrejoutz is offset by a DC voltage equal to the generated voltage + η«¾, or mathematically as
V fOufa = VDC + VAC(I) = -s-VfMrg + V fOufc < +\¼>ic The circuit will faithfully reproduce the input so long that the sura of the DC bias (+ Vneg) and the sine wave input signal AC(t) do not exceed the supply voitage +Vkigic, otherwise the top of the sine wave will be "clipped", i.e. reach a constant maximum output voitage at during any interval where + Wg + VrefOut2≥ +V;:)<;,c. Waveform clipping results in the distorting of the output waveform, producing unwanted harmonics and spectral contamination similar to (or even worse than) that of LED drive using digital pulses. Also note that if the difference in voltage (+Vi^sc - +V«^} is too small, meaning that the level shifted bias is too high, differential amplifier 302 may not be able to function properly.
Generation of the DC voitage +V may be performed in any num ber of ways including a trimmed bandgap voitage followed by a variable gain amplifier, a voltage controlled amplifier, or varying resistor or switched-capaeitor voitage divider networks. One such voltage divider method is illustrated in Figure 1.7D as voitage generation circuit 309 using a resistor voitage divider technique. As shown the logic suppl voltage -V¾¾ic is connected to series resistor string comprising resistors 304a through 304x, where x is a mathematical variable and does not represent the 24th letter in the English alphabet. Resistors 304b through 304x are connected in parallel with MOSAFETs 305b through 3Q5x, respectively. The number of resistors may commonly be 9, 13, or 17 allowing various 8-bit, 12,-bit and 16-bit combinations of voltage to be realized depending on the accuracy required, where the number of resistors needed equal one plus the number of bits of accuracy desired. For example, 8 bits of accuracy requires 9 resistors providing 256 levels of output voltage,
The output voltage +W;¾ taken from the voltage tap point between resistors 304a and 304b, is varied by shorting out various resistors by turning on and off MOSFETs 305b through 305x in various combinations. For example, if a ll the
MOSFETs 305b through 305x are turned on and their resistance is designed to be small relative to that of the resistance value R of resistor 304a, then the output voltage t V···. ¾ is near ground; if none of the transistors 305b through 305x is turned on, the output voltage becomes +Viogic, and for various other combinations an intermediate voltage may be selected. The resistor network 304a through 304x can further be modified to select a voltage from only a portion of the supply range. For example, a lower voltage than +Viogic may be used to power the resistor string. The series ladder of resistors 304a through 304x forms a type of digitai-to-ana!og converter because turning various MOSFETs on and off is essentially a digital function and the result is an analog , albeit quantized, voltage. For greater resolution the number of resistors can be increased or the voltage range reduced to that the least significant bit, i.e. LSB, represents a smaller voltage gradation,
Aside from the voltage generator function, resistor trim network 310 comprising parallel resistors 31 ia through 311x is placed in parallel with resistor 304a to provide a means to trim the voltage accuracy during manufacturing by blowing fuse links by impressing temporary high currents on trim pads on an I For example, by running high current between common trim pad 312 and trim pad 31.4, thin metal line 3 3 wilt act like a fuse and melt creating an electrical open-circuit and removing resistor 311b from the parallel network of resistors in trim network 310,
in conclusion, the DC offset circuit shown in Figurel7D, combined with the oscillating reference voltage circuit of Figure 17C allow the electrical generation of a sine wave AC{t) of va rying frequency and magnitude offset by a DC voltage. So long as it does not exceed the supply voltage +Vk¾k-., the output voltage of this newly disclosed oscillating reference voltage Is Vretoufc. = Voc ±VAC(X)/2 - ± Vrefouta having a peak output voltage of Voc + VAc(t)/2, a minimum output voltage of Vnc - VAc(t) /2, and an average output voltage of VDC If the AC coupling capacitor 303 is removed, the average value of the output increases by the average voltage of the sign wave VAc(t)/2, reduci ng the usable operat ing voltage range of differen tial amplifier 302.
As shown by the V rf u 2 waveform 308, using the circuit of Figure 17D or a similar circuit, the AC component of the signal is smaller than the DC offset voltage, i.e. VAC(1') < VDC. Since the main voltage component is DC and not the sinusoid, then the sine wave can be said to represent small-signal AC behavior. In a phototherapy application, the voltage value of VrefGut2 actually represents the reference current that determines LED brightness whenever the LED string is enabled and conducting, Small signal operation of the inventive circuitry represents a completely new operating mode for phototherapy - one wherein the LED string is continuously illuminated at a fixed current and then modulated sinusoidaMy at bias condition with slight increases and decreases in current and corresponding changes in
brightness.
As shown in Figure 18A, another way to vary the reference current is to supply the reference voltage used to generate the reference current ct!f¾f for
MOSFE'F driver 215a from a digital-to-analog (D/A) converter 315, While an number of bits ma be used to control accuracy, commonly available converters, for example those used in HDTVs, comprise 8 bits with 256 levels, 12 bits with 4096 levels,, or 16 bits with 65,536 levels. Converter speed is not high because the highest frequency required for phototherapy is 20kHz, and in most cases only 5kHz, in operation, data is written into a latch or static memory, specifically ILED register 16., and loaded into D/A converter each time the converter receives a digital clock pulse on it Load input pin, i.e. between 5kHz to 20kHz, as desired,
While many method including switched capacitor, resistor ladder and other types of D/A converters (DAC) exist, because only audio frequencies are required in phototherapy applications low cost solutions may be utilized. One such circuit is an 8-bit resistor ladder converter 315 shown in Figure 18B comprising a precision reference voltage source 320, and a DAC resistor ladder comprising resistors 321a through 32 lx, along with DAC switches comprising OSFETs 322b through 322x controlled by decoder 323. MOSFETs 322b through 322x are connected in parallel with resistors 321b through 321x, respectively. I n operation, a decoder 323 loads an 8-bit word from its input line 8b upon receiving a clock pulse on its digital Load input, represented by digital inverter 344, and converts the 8-bit word into instructions of which of the MOSFETs 322b through 322x should be turned-on in various combinations to produce a linear output voltage on the DAC ladder tap point between resistors 321a and 321b. The DAC ladder voltage, ranging from zero to Vref, is then fed to the positive input of a differential amplifier 335 configured as a voltage follower. A resistor trim network 325 comprising resistors 324a through 324x, trim pads (e.g. 326 and 328) and fuse links 327, is placed in parallel with resistor 32 la in order to trim the output voltage during manufacturing, Alternatively, the internal reference voltage Vref provided by source 320 may be trimmed to provide the required precision.
As an inventive element, a switched filter capacitor 342 is optionally included to filter the ripple of the output voltage VYeiOut, or i f a high speed transient is desi red to disabie the filter depending on the digital control signal on the Filter Enable input represented by digital inverter 343. in operation when MOSFET 340 is turned on and MOSFET 341 is disabled capacitor 342 is connected in parallel with the output of buffer ampl ifier 335 and the output of reference 315 is filtered removing high frequency noise. When MOSFET 340 is turned off and MOSFET 341 is enabled, capacitor 342 is disconnected from the output of buffer amplifier 335 and the output of reference 315 is not filtered. By enabling MOSFET 341, the charge on capacitor 342 is discha rged to prevent the accumulation of voltage from repeated operation. Other D/A converters may be employed in place of resistor ladder converter 315, as desired.
An example of an 292Hz (D4) oscillating reference voltage without any added DC offset generated in the disclosed manner is illustrated in Figure 19A comprising a 1.2V sine wave 371 with a period of 3.42msec and an average voltage output of 0,6V. The peak voltage is convenient chosen to be similar to the output voltage of a bandgap voltage trimmed for a low temperature coefficient or near zero "tempco". Other voltages, however, may be employed as well to produce the desired input current to LED driver 215a.
St should be emphasized that sinusoid 350 as disclosed herein is synthesized, programmable, and low voltage, not the artifact of a rotating electromagnetic generator or alternator used in AC power generation in power plants. So while LEDs used in residential and commercial lighting applications can, at least theoretically, be driven directly from the 60Hz AC line voltage, the sinusoidal characteristic of the AC line voltages and its application in general lighting is completely different than the proposed sy nthesized sine wave excitation of LEDs applicable for phototherapy.
First, the AC line voltage is high-voltage, typically 110VAC or 220VAC and unacceptabiy dangerous in medical appiications where a device, in this case the LED array and pad, touches the skin, in LED drive for phototherapy, the total number of series connected LEDs is limited to operate at a maximum, voltage below 40 V, a voltage considered safe by Underwriter Laboratories (UL) for consumer and medical applications.
Second, the frequency of the AC line varies with loading of the utility customers and is contaminated by numerous undesirable spectral harmonics affecting the purity of t he sinusoid and rendering it unsuitable for phototherapy applications,
Third, the frequency of the AC line, namely 60 Rz and its harmonic 120 Hz do not represent a frequency known to be beneficial in phototherapy, e.g. a multiple of 292 Hz. in fact 60Hz does not represent a multiple of any pure or chromatic tone indicated for photobiomodulation.
Fourth, aside from its uncontrolled variation with loading, the frequency of the AC fine is fixed and is not programmable or adjustable. It cannot be adjusted or varied dynamically or to match the time constants of natural biological processes and associated time constants, ft also cannot be used to generate chords of multiple frequency sinusoids nor control the energ densit and spectral content, i.e, the mix, of multiple frequency sinusoids,
Fifth, the reduction of the AC mains line voltage from 110 VAC or 220VAC to a safe level, i.e, below 40V, requires a large and heavy iron-core transformer designed to operate at QE'i,
Sixth, LEDs using in phototherapy necessarily comprise relatively narrow spectral wavelengths in the red, near infrared, or blue portion of the spectrum. The LED light, typically ±35nm in spectral width, emitted through the quantum- mechanical process of tunnel emission is determined by handgap engineering of the nianmade crystal used to realize the LED in manufacturing. LEDs used in lighting are designed to emit a broad spectrum of light, i.e, white light, comprising a number of colors in the rainbow. Unlike LEDs used in phototherapy, white light LEDs comprise blue or UV LEDs with a fens cap containing phosphor tuned to absorb blue or UV light. In operation, the light emitted from the LED semiconductor material is absorbed by the phosphor atoms in the lens cap and converted into broad spectrum "white" light similar to sunlight but more white and less yellow. Finally, the direct drive of LEDs using AC sinusoids in general lighting applications is actually not in commercial practice today for a variety of intractable technical problems including poor power efficiency, poor power factor, electrical shock risk, and flicker. Today's LED bulbs use multistage PVV switching power supplies for power factor correction and voltage regulation. LED brightness is therefore control led by digital pulses and not using sinusoids.
So LEDs driven in AC lighting are not applicable for phototherapy,
In operation of D/A converter 315, the digital input to decoder 323 is repeatedly loaded during clocking of the Load pin, i.e. the input to inverter 344, occurring at fixed time intervals in order to generate a sine wave of an arbitrary and adjustable frequency. The following table represents examples of various time points used in the waveform synthesis.
Figure imgf000061_0001
Figure imgf000062_0001
As shown, an 8-bit D/A converter exhibits 256 output states or 256 steps above its zero state, i.e. from 0000-0000 in binary or from 00 to FF in hexadecimal. To conveniently map these states to the 360 degrees of angle arc, only 240 steps (i.e. 241 states} of the D/A converter have been employed. As such, 240 steps
corresponds to 360° or 1.5° per DAC step. The remaining DAC steps from 241 to 255, in hexadecimal corresponding to DAC input codes from FO to FF are
intentionally skipped and not used in sinusoid generation. As described, the DAC value is represented in three equivalent ways
· by a hexadecimal digital code, the input to decoder 323 in Fig, 1833, as illustrated by the hex code in the third column of the above table
· by a binary digital code shown in the second column of the above table representing the various combinations of turning on and off the
MOSFETSs 322b through 322x in Fig. 18B to dynamically change the resistor divider network ratio
* by the analog output voltage output from DAC 315 and buffer 3 5 shown by the rightmost column in the above table, or alternatively by a current in case that voltage is divided by a resistor to make a DAC controlled current.
In operation, a sequence of increasing digital codes is fed into to the DAC at a regular time intervals to produce a rising output voltage. Conversely a sequence of declining digital codes may be used to lower the output voltage of the DAC, i this increasing and decreasing code sequence is performed repeatedly and consistently a any periodic function can be synthesized as an output of DAC 315, In codes are input into the DAC at regular time intervals according to evaluation of a sine function for fixed steps of angles, e.g. 15°, then the sequence will result in a sinusoidal output from DAC 315.
To synthesize a 292 Hz sine wave having a period of approximately T - 3.42msec, each of the 240 steps comprises G.0142694msec. The minimum
corresponding signal used to load DAC's decoder 323 must therefore be 292Ηζ·240 states/Hz or 70,080Hz. The resulting spectra of the oscillating reference voltage is illustrated in Figure 19B using a D/A converter to synthesize a sinusoidally oscillating reference voltage 351 having a frequenc fsyBth - i ~ 292Hz
corresponding to a pure sinusoidal D4 frequency 350. At over 70kHz, the clock frequency 354 is well into the ultrasonic range and is therefore not a source of unwanted spectral contamination. Compared the prior art spectrum of square wave generated 292 Hz, ie. a pulsed D4, shown in Figure 12, the harmonic spectra 353 of the 3r<*. 5* 7th through 13th multiples of a 292 Hz sinusoid all have zero energy - meaning all spectral contamination in the audio band has been completely eliminated (see Table 355),
Aside from being outside the audio range, the magnitude of the noise generated fay clock frequency 354 is small. A close-up view 352 of sinusoid 350 shown in Figure 19C reveals the origin of the noise, incremental steps in voltage 359 present in the generated waveform 358 occurring each time the output of the D/A converter changes voltage. As shown, these transitions occur at the oscs hating frequency of the clock used to load the decoder of the DAC. Th is frequency occurs at a frequency ~ f ·.·=·· i · (# of DAC steps) where the "# of DAC steps'" corresponds to the bit resolution of the D/A converter (rounded to any convenient number of steps), although it is also possible to employ dock frequencies higher than this clock frequency.
Unless higher clock frequencies are intentionally utilized, the frequency of the clock and hence the freq uency of the noise generated by the clock will scale with freq uency of the sine wave being generated. As such, if the sine wave being generated is at a lower frequency, the noise spectrum of the clock will correspondingly occur at lower frequencies, possibly overlapping the audio spectrum. For example, graph 360a shown in Figure 19Ό illustrates a portion of a 18.25Hz sine wave 361 comprising a sequence of small voltage changes 362 occurring at the clock frequenc of the D/A converter, specifically 4,380Ηκ.
On the same time scale, graph 360b of Figure 19Ό illustrates in histogram 363 the change in voltage at each of these steps as a percentage of the oscillation's 1,2V peak-to-peak magnitude. Prior to 13.7msec when the output voltage Vref is still increasing, the value of AVrei is positive. At 13.7msec the change diminishes to near zero and thereafter the change become negative in polarity. At approximately 27,4msec when the sine wave passes through its average voltage of 0.6V, i.e. a point 364, the magnitude of AVref reaches its largest negative value and thereafter begins to diminish in magnitude. This peak magnitude represents less than 1.3% of the amplitude of the sine wave itself,
The resulting spectra are shown in Figure 19E, which indicates that the magnitude of the voltage tran sitions occurring at the clock frequency 4,380Hz, represented by column 367, are small compared to the magnitude of the oscillating reference voltage at 18,25Hz, represented by column 366. Similarly, the harmonics of these digital transitions are also negligibly small in relative magnitude, For example, the magnitude of the 3: ;i harmonic of the clock frequency is represented by the column 368, Even though the clock and its 3rd and 5th harmonics are in the audio spectra, i,e. lower in frequency than 22,000Hz shown by line 175, their small magnitude makes the spectral contamination of the synthesized oscillating reference insignificant, even at low frequencies, if necessary, moreover, the remaining ripple, however small, can be filtered out by the Filter Enable function biased to connect capacitor 342 to the Vref output by turning on OSFET 340,
By employing analog sy nthesis as disclosed herein, a wide range of sine wave excitation patterns in the audio spectrum can be generated to drive LED arrays for phototherapy piications, free from harraonic contamination, Using the disclosed methods and apparatus in analog sinusoidal synthesis, dynamic control of waveforms in both frequency and in amplitude may be realized including independent control in peak and average current control.
As illustrated in Figure 20, these various combinations are exemplified in graph 370a, which shows an Enable signal 371 and reference current waveforms 375-379, and graph 370b, which shows the resulting LEI) current waveforms 385- 389. These sinusoidal waveforms, summarized in the following table, are not shown to imply a specific therapy or protocol but simply to illustrate the various current waveform combinations possible using analog synthesis.
Figure imgf000065_0001
Graphs 370a and 370b are broken into S time intervals, with a different waveform example in each interval, the intervals before time representing large signal behavior, where the LED current oscillates with a peak-to-peak variation that represents a significant fraction of the peak available supply current, and the intervals after t3 representing a small variation In current relative to the peak available supply current and relative to the average DC current hoc + Mi3. Furthermore, the frequencies frefo and in the intervals before tt and between and t are shown to be high compared to the frequencies of the waveforms in t e other intervals,
Specifically, in time intervals to ti and ti to tz, the magnitude of reference current waveforms 37 S and 376 oscillate betwee zero and a peak current value of In with an average current of h$ - lri/2 shown by dashed line 380 and with respective frequencies frefo > t ti, This reference current result in an LED current Ai ± AI LI having an average LED current AlLiii!ustrated by dashed line 390 , a peak current 2ASu, and a minimum current of zero, i the subsequent interval from ti to ts, the large signal reference current waveform 377 decreases in peak magnitude compared to the previous intervals but stiil remains large signal, with a reference current ranging from zero to Lz with an average value he ~ 1(2/2 illustrated by dashed line 381. Consequentially, LED current 387 oscillates sinusoidally from zero to a peak current 2ΔΙΐ2 around an average current of magnitude ΔΪ i2 represented by dashed line 391, While the frequency frets of waveforms 377 and 387 can be chosen to any value, as shown it remains the same as the prior interval ti to it, namely frds = frrfl,
At time ts and thereafter the amplitude of the reference current waveforms 378 and 379 is reduced dramatically, waveforms 378 and 379 ranging between currents i and L- symmetrically around an average current of magnitude hi represented by the dashed line 392 and oscillating at frequencies h > fi-ew combined with a constant DC offset h-4. The resulting LED currents 388 and 389 oscillate sinusoidall at frequencies f«r« and h respectively, and both have an peak-to-trough range of 2Mm and an average current represented by dashed Sine 392., which is equal t a DC offset hoc pl us one-half the peak-to- trough range 2Δ! of the waveforms 388 and 389, Le, ILDC + AILS. The resulting small signal waveform therefore is a current oscillating sinusoidally between maximum and minimum values of ILDC + &\ ± ΔΪ1.3, meaning that the LEDs are continuously illuminated but with sinusoidal variation in their brightness,
I n conclusion, to create time varying currents of regular periodicity for phototherapy it is preferable to vary the LED current using a controlled current source o controlled current sink instead of driving the L I) string with a controlled voltage source, because LED brightness varies in proportion to current in a consistent manner, in contrast, LED voltage varies in a manner independent of brightness and primarily as a consequence of variations in LEI) die fabrication and manufacturing. Maintaining consistency and uniformity of LED brightness using voltage drive therefore remains problematic, requiring precision trimming of each channel of LE D d rive.
As shown previously, to implement a controlled current sink, a
programmable voltage is fed into a network of resistors and transistors to establi sh a reference current and to mirror this current to one or multiple channels driving separate LED strings. The value of the reference current may be actively trimmed during manufacture to set the precise value of current for a given voltage input by trimming a network of resistors as shown previously In lug, 16C or by trimming a network of transis tors as shown in Fig. 161). The transi stors may comprise either bipolar or MOSFET type,
By varying the voltage used to drive the cu rrent mirror or transconductance amplifier over time in a regular periodic manner, a time dependent or oscillatory LED current may be created. The voltage may be varied sinusoidally or by any other regular periodic function by operating the voltage reference in an oscillatory circuit. Alternativel the voltage can be constantly changed using d igital control of a voltage-output type DAC to "synthesize" the desired waveforms.
An alternative means by which to produce a controlled voltage Is to feed a time varying programmable voltage into a transconductance amplifier, an amplifier which naturally converts a voltage into a corresponding current, but
transconductance amplifiers are larger and more expensive to implemen than sing current mirrors.
Still another alternative, at least theoretically, could be to bias each current sink MOSFET to o perate in the constant current regime of operation, precisel driving it with the proper gat voltage for each desired drain current To accomplish this goal, the gate drive circuitry would require calibration at the time of
manufacturing. Once calibrated, driving the MOSFET gate with time-varying sequence of voltages will result in a desired periodic current waveform. Because, however, threshold voltage varies not only with manufacturing but with
temperature, the calibration method to produce controlled and well matched currents across multiple channels of LED drive remains problematic. As such a current mirror is stil i vastly superior because the two or more mirror transistors vary with manufacturing and over temperature in the same way so that the current ratio of the transistors and the resulting LED current remains constant.
Finally, a programmable current-mode DAC can be employed to synthesize a periodic time varying current, but to drive multiple LED strings, it still is beneficial to feed the DAC output current into a transistor current mirror not only to buffer the current to a higher value but to conven iently produce mul tiple channels of well matched LED drive.
Analog Sinusoidal Synthesis of Chords
Referring again to the resonant graph of Figure 10, it is well documented that many if not most physical system s exhibit more than one resonant frequency. Given the plethora of time constants present in the anatomy and c toiogical
processes of living creatures, it Is clea that multiple bioresonant frequencies exist in nature as well While it is unproven whether the simultaneous excitation of mutlipie bioresonant frequencies has a beneficial impact on treatment efficacy, prior art systems utilize digital pulse excitation of the LEDs. As shown in Figure 11 and Figwre 12, such purely-digital square-wave LED drive methods are incapable of simultaneousl producing multiple frequencies, except for unwanted harmonics.
In dramatic contrast, It is well known that sine wave frequencies acid
algebraically without limitation, as evidenced by the existence of multiple note "polyphonic chords" in an acoustic piano. Mathematically, the sum of sine waves can be expressed by the series sum of multiple sine waves of varying magn itude Ax, freq ency ω* and duration (or decay rate), namely
G(t) = - Ai(t sin{t»Ji ) + A2(t)»sin(w2) +„. + Ax(t)«s (u¾c)
as represented graphically in Figwre 21 where a 192 Hz sine wave 401 and a 120Hz sine wave 402 are combined to produce a two-note chord shown by waveform 403. LEDs driven by polyphonic excitation will simultaneously and concurrently exhibit multiple frequencies, with the ability to effectively couple energy into comparable bioresonant frequencies.
One means by which to synthesize polyphonic chords in shown in Figure 22A comprising an analog mixer circuit 405 summing oscillating reference voltages Vvefii and V;,-n> produced by oscillators 236a and 236b, respectively, to produce a time-varying voltage resulting in oscillating reference current as an input to MOSFET drive 215a. A large variety of analog mixer circuits exist including multiple input amplifiers using adjustable resistor dividers to vary the gain of individual inputs. Oscillators 236a and 236b, having different frequencies of oscillation, may be synchronized to prevent unwanted frequency drift and aliasing.
Other analog sources may be used to generate a polyphonic reference current comprising one or more chords or even music. For example, in Figure 22B the analog output of any polyphonic audio sou rce 408 including a music synthesizer, radio decoder, or audio recording player may be used to generate the reference current ahei, provided that the analog voltage output of the audio source 408 and series resistance of the circuit are adj usted to limit the peak value of lt er to the input range acceptable for MOSFET driver 215a to prevent signal distortion.
Conceptually, the analog voltage output of audio source 408 may be scaled in voltage by a voltage divider including resistors 407a and 407b followed by audio preamplifier 406 to produce the time varying current cdvef. One way to implement such a circuit is to employ a fixed reference current of value h f and to scale this current to a higher or lower current with a current amplifier having current gain a, where the gain a is modulated in response to the analog output of analog audio source 408, The analog audio source 408 may comprise a tape player, a digital audio player, a CD player, or digitally streamed music.
Another method, shown in Figure 22C, to derive an analog audio source is to directly translate a digital source 413 such as digital streamed audio, digitally encoded data, or a CD audio and to convert the specific data encoding format into a parallel or serial digital data using format conversion in an audio codec 412. This stream of 1-bit data or sequence of 16~bit parallel words is then processed using custom algorithms in a digital signal processor (DSP) 411 and loaded at regular intervals into a D/A converter 410 to create the desired time varying reference current aire;. To avoid audio distortion, digital words should be loaded into D/A converter 410 at a minimum frequency of 44kHz if the entire audio spectru m is to be preserved.
One common point of confusion is that digital audio sources such as CD players or Internet streamed digital audio are often considered digital, because the audio information is stored as "bits", specifically digital words describing a sequence of audio volumes commonly refe rred to as PCM or pulse coded modulation. During reconstruction of the analog audio signal, however, the digital PCM source is used to drive a D/A converter to produce a time-varying analog signal and as such, signal reconstruction comprises "analog" synthesis in a manner similar to the method shown in Figure 22C.
Aside from those similarities, the function of digital audio players is to reproduce an audio signal driving a magnetic coil or piezoelectric crystal to move air and produce sound, not to produce light. The mass of a speaker or transducer acts as a natural filter, its inertia responsible for removing man unwanted frequencies and spikes. For example, combined with a filter capacitor, the inductance of a speaker coil naturally forms a simple low-pass filter. In short, audio reproduction favors low frequencies and has to be driven with high currents produced by means of power amplification, in order to faithfully reproduce high frequency tones. In many cases, such as guitar amplifiers, the amplifier is intentionally driven into distortion as long as the harmonics sound "good",
in contrast, photons are massless and no subject to inertia! damping or filtering. The response time of an LED occurs with nanosecond precision and faithfully reproduces all the harmonics of the driving waveform, even when those harmonics are unwanted or detrimental to the pu rpose of phototherapy. As a consequence of these differences, the harmonic spectral content, used for driving LEDs in phototherapy is key to achieving bioresonance with specific biophysical process such as electron conduction, ionic transport, molecular bonding, transient thermal conduction, and steady-state heating of cells, tissue and organs., regardless of whether analog or digital synthesis is used is generating the waveforms for the phototherapy.
For example, when adapting an audio source or music for LED drive., DSP 411 may be used to selectively filter certain frequencies and notes from an audio stream while suppressing other tones that may be adverse to phototherapeutic treatment, for example odd harmonics created by cymbal crashes. Therefore, the data rate at which D/A converter 410 is loaded with new data should be equal to no less than twice the highest frequency being reproduced as LED current modulation by MOSFET driver 215a. As a matter of convenience D/A converter 410, DSP converter 411, and audio codec 412 ma be synchronized b a common digital clock signal 414, often generated by dividing down the oscillations of a crystal (xtai'j oscillator. While digital filtering may make music and tones reproduced on a speaker or headphone sound unSistenable to the human ear, removing unwanted harmonics and spectral content from LED drive waveforms in phototherapy is important in achieving tissue specificity and high treatment efficacy during phototherapy treatments,
Another inventive method disclosed herein to avoid the complexit and added costs of analog signal processing, digital filtering, or aud io mixing to produce chords of tones, is to combine an analog synthesized waveform with a second digital pulse frequency achieved by digitally "strobing" an analog oscillating waveform, Returning to circuit of Figure 1738, such a method employs the single frequency oscillator 236 to feed the reference current input of MOSFET driver 215 while strobing the MOSFET driver on and off using digital synthesizer 203a. Two possible methods exist namely
· setting the digital strobing frequency feock to be higher than the frequency of the oscillating reference current IV f, i.e. fdoc* >
♦ setting the frequency of the oscillating reference current (.·<■> to be higher than digital strobing frequency fdock, i.e. I > fdoek The waveforms produced using these two methods have differing spectral characteristics, and therefore the methods cannot be used interchangeably to perform dual-frequency LED drive.
Figure 23 A illustrates the case wherein the frequency of the clock signal is higher than the frequenc rd of the sinusoidal!y oscillating reference current, i.e. the first of the methods described above. As shown in graph 420a, a 2921 lz oscillating sinusoidal, reference current 421 (D4) with a period T¾ - 3.42msec and an average value 422, clearly has a longer period and. lower frequency than the digital pulses of an Enable signal 423 having a clock period Tcsock. For the purposes of this illustration, the specific frequency of the digital pulses of Enable signal 423 may be any value provided that fdo k is at least double the sine wave frequency fref. During operation, MOSPET driver 215 outputs zero volts, i.e. ground, whenever Enable 423 is at a logic zero and the analog value of oscillating reference current 421 whenever Enable signal 423 is a logic one or "high" state. The resulting waveform is equivalent to multiplying the analog sine wave by the digital multiplier of "1" or "0" for each moment of time, essentially "chopping" a sine wave into pieces.
The LED current waveform shown in graph 420b comprises small pulses of current of varying height, where the collection of pulses forms an envelope 425a, 425b, 425c, or 42Sd (individually and collectively as 425} having the same frequency and phase as oscillating reference current 421. The difference of these envelopes is a variation only in amplitude depending on the ratio of ton to of Enable signal 423, The duty factor of the Enable signal 423., i.e., ton/Tcioe*. acts as PWM brightness control, controlling the average current of the sinusoidal envelope 425 and hence LED brightness by pulse width modulation, without changing the frequenc or phase of the sinusoidal reference current 421,
Because the higher of the two frequencies in the polyphonic chord is created "digitally", this frequency component will exhibit' the previousl described harmonics of a square wave, contributing to unwanted spectral contamination. This point is illustrated in Figure 23B, where the 292 Hz reference curren 421 occurs at a frequency fr«f shown by line 431, and combines with the 4,672Hz digitally pulsed Enable signal 423 that occurs at a frequency fctock shown by line 432, Because the Enable signal 423 is a square wave, it produces harmonics 434 including a 3 f harmonic at 14,016Hz in the audio spectrum and the remainder of its harmonics in the ultrasonic spectrum, i.e. beyond the frequency illustrated by line 175. So using this method, a chord of 292 Hz (D4) and 4,672 Hz (D8) can be generated without the need for a mixer or two analog oscillators, with the only disadvantage that an unwanted 3rti harmonic is still present in the audio range. The resulting spectra are summarized in table 435 including other octaves of D for reference.
if the digital pulse rate is increased to D9 or any other note higher than approximately 7kHz, no harmonic will be manifest in the audio spectrum. This example is shown in Figure 23C, where the 292.Hz reference current shown by line 431 is combined with a 9,344Hz digitally pulsed Enable signal 441 at a frequency fdoek (09) shown by line 440. The resulting spectra are summarized in table 445 including other octaves of D for reference.
Note that, as shown in Fi ure 230, if the clock frequency fekn-k shown by line 450 can be pushed into the ultrasonic spectrum, then as shown in table 451 no harmonics of concern exist Because this method eliminates the second note of the chord it is therefore not a method for polyphonic synthesis and confers no advantage over leaving the Enable signal on continuously. As an alternative, running the clock at 18,688Hz, i.e. at D10, as shown by solid line 452 in Figure 23E,
eliminates all audio harmonics but still offers a second frequency as an octave of fj< f. in summary, for polyphonic synthesis of two tones where fdwk > fret there is no restriction of the value of f}¾f but the digital pulse generated frequency fd<>d must be chosen to avoid significan spectral contamination in the audio range,
Figure 24 illustrates the case vhere the Enable signai is digitally strobed at a frequency friw.it that is lower than the frequency IV.· i of the sinusoidally oscillating reference current, i.e. where faiKk < f <
As shown in graph 460a, a fixed-frequency constantly oscillating reference current 462 with period n-f and average value 464 oscillates with longer period and lower freq uency than digital pulses of Enable 4 1 having a clock period Tciock. Each clock period Tciock is subdivided into two intervals - toff when Enable 461 is at a logic zero or biased in an "off" condition, and i-m when Enable 461 is biased at a logic one or "high" state. During operation, MOSFET driver 215 outputs zero volts, i.e. ground,, whenever Enable 461 is at a !ogic zero. Conversely, whenever Enable 461 is a logic one or "high" state, MOSFET driver 2 IS outputs the time varying analog values of oscillating reference current 462.
During this ton Interval, the output of the MOSFET driver 215a does not result in a single, constant LED current but whatever portion of the sinusoidal, oscillation in voltage and current is occurring at that time. The resulting waveform is equivalent to multiplying the analog sine wave by the digital multiplier of " " or "0" for each moment of time,, essentially "chopping" the sine wave into short intervals or "snippets" of oscillation. The LED current waveform shown in graph 460b comprises the same intervals of duration t<m, where the LED cu rrent 466 completes one or several oscillating cycles before it is is shut off as shown by line 467, for a duration toff and thereafter repeating the entire cycle.
in the event that reference current waveform 463 includes a DC offset with an average value 465, as shown in graph 460a, then the resulting LED current waveforms 468, shown in graph 460b, exhibit identical AC oscillator behavior, except that the magnitude of the oscillation is reduced, resulting in oscillator perturbations in brightness of an LED string that repeatedly conducts for a duration ton and then temporarily is interrupted for a duration toff before resuming its conduction and small signal oscillations. Note that the absence or presence of a DC offset in the oscillatory reference current has no impact on the harmonic spectra of the two-note chord,
The resulting spectra for a chord of D8 and D using this disclosed method is shown in Figure 2SA, where a sinusoidal reference current at a frequency ]··« of 9,344ffe (D9), shown by solid line 472, combines with an Enable signal digitally pulsed at a frequency feuxk of 4,672 Hz (D8), shown b solid line 423. Because the Enable signal Is digitally pulsed, it produces harmonics 434, including a 3td harmonic at 14,016Hz in the audio spectrum and higher-frequency harmonics in the ultrasonic spectrum, i.e. beyond the frequency illustrated by line 1 5. So, using this method, a chord of D8 and D9 can be generated without the need for a mixer or two analog oscillators, with the only disadvantage that an unwanted 3 i harmonic is still present in the audio range. The resulting spectra are summarized in table 473, including other octaves of D for reference,
Whi!e this method works fine for high frequency chords, its operation is problematic when generating low frequencies because the digitai clock, the origin of harmonic noise and spectral contamination, occurs at the lower frequency of the two-note polyphonic chord. This problem is illustrated in Figure 25B, which shows the resu lt of mixing a 584Hz (DS) reference current (line 476) with a 292Hz (.04) digitally pul sed Enable signal (line 161). Because of the 292Rz square wave Bnable signal, spectral contamination of harmonics 164 occur throughout the audio spectrum,, as described in Table 477, identical to those shown in Figure 1.2, Such a method is therefore not useful for generating low frequency polyphonic chords for LED drive in phototherapy applications,
For generating high frequency polyphonic chords, the method can be implemented at low cost as show in Figure 26 because the oscillator 236 used to create the sine wave can also be used to drive a simple divide by 2, 4 or 8 counter 482 to simply generate the digital clock pulses needed as the Bnable signal input to MOSFET driver 215a. Because the oscillating reference 36 exhibits sinusoidal transitions too slow for cleaning triggering counter 482, an intervening Schmidt trigger or comparator 481 with hysteresis and high input impedance is inserted between the oscillator 236 and the counter 482, Each factor of 2 in frequency division implemented by counter 482 represents an octave in musical notes, e.g. D8 divided by 2 is D7, D8 divided by is D6 and so on.
Pu!se Width orfwlaierf Digitai LED Control
in addition to analog sinusoidal synthesis described above, another inventive means disclosed herein to synthesize sinusoidal waveforms with controlled harmonic content for driving LEDs in a phototherapy system is through the use of digital synthesis, While analog synthesis involves sinusoidal ly varying the reference or bias current to the LED current control circuit, digital synthesis involves pulsing the LED current on-and-off in constantly varying durations to synthesize a sine wave (or chords of multiple frequencies of sine waves). Pulse modulation techniques include both fixed-frequency "pulse width modulation", commonly referred to by the acronym PWM, and variable-frequency "pulse frequency modulation",, referred to by the acronym PFM. While both PWM and PF modulation techniques may be employed to control average current or voltage in electronics circuits,, such as voltage regulators, the variable clock rate of PFM complicates waveform synthesis. Moreover, PFM can give rise to unwanted radio frequency noise and electromagnetic interference (E I) which varies in frequency and is therefore difficult to filter or shield. EM I is especially problematic in medical devices because government agencies such as the FDA and the FCC strictly prohibit E I that could dangerously Interfere with other life-critical medical devices in a hospital or clinic. As a consequence, the digital synthesis section of this application mainly focuses on PWM control techniques with the understanding that, alternatively, a sequence of PFM controlled pulses may be used in waveform synthesis of so d esired.
Returning to the waveform examples shown in Figure IS, while the pulsed digital waveforms 243 througii 258 do not specifically illustrate digital sinusoidal synthesis, the ability to change the average LED current from a level shown by dashed line 272 to a higher level 273 simply by increasing the LED current pulse width 267 to a l nger pulse width 268. Since the frequency of both of pulses 267 and 268 is equal to 1/Τί, this represents the principle of "pulse width modulation", also known as fixed-frequency PWM, one means by which to perform sinusoidal synthesis digitally. The alternative method of digital synthesis, "pu lsed frequency modulation" or also a "PFM", is exemplified b comparing pulses 268 and 269 at times te and t<s used to increase the average LED current from a level shown by dashed line 273 to 274 by varying the LED on-time and frequency, L e„ since T2 is greater than ΤΛ, the frequenc of pulse 268 (1/Ti) is greater than the frequency of pulse 269 (I/T2), Variable frequency PFM methods ma comprise fixed -on time or fixed-off time modulation schemes, Variable frequency PFM methods are often avoided because of concerns of time-varying signals contributing to dy namically changing electromagnetic interference resulting in noise that is difficul to filter.
Unlike analog circuits whose performance and circuit stability are sensitive to electrical loading of their outputs, in digital sy nthesis, the enable signal produced by the digital synthesizer circuitry has a large digital "fan-out," meaning that one digital synthesizer can foe used to control many channels and MOSFET drivers. An example of a large fan-out is illustrated in Figure 27C where digital synthesizer 203 has a single output and is used to drive the Enable input of numerous MOSFET drivers from 215a through 2 l5n, where n is a variable and does not necessarily represent the 1 th letter of the English alphabet, i n this example, where digitai synthesizer 203 has a single output, all the channels of LED drivers will exhibit the same digital waveform and synthesize the same sinusoids synchronously. This centralized approach allows one digitai synthesizer to connect to all the MOSFET drivers using a shared conductive signal path, whether a wire, conductive printed circuit hoard (PCB) trace, or a data bus.
Figures 27A, 2 IB, and 27C illustrate and contrast various combinations of digital synthesizers and independent channels of LED drive, in Figure 27 A, each MOSFET driver 215a through 215n is controlled by its own corresponding digital synthesizer 203a through 203n (collectively as digital synthesizer 203), where the subscript "n" rep resents a mathematical variable and not the 14th letter of the Engl ish alphabet. These various digital synthesizers shown may occupy one, several, or completely independent integrated circuits representing either a centralized, clustered, or fully distributed system. Because each LED channel and associated MOSFET drive are controlled by their own dedicated digital synthesizer, this implementation offers complete flexibility in synthesizing sinusoids of channel- unique frequency, magnitude, and duration should it he desired, As such, it is important that the channels be synchronized to a common clock reference, or noise may result from channei-to-channel interactions and aliasing, in this independent and autonomous approach, each of d igital synthesizers 203a-203n must connect to its corresponding one of MOSFET drivers 2 lSa-2 ISn with a dedicated wire or conductive PCS trace.
Another method which minimizes duplication of circuitry and minimizes IC real estate without sacrificing flexibility is a centralized method of control shown in Figure 27B comprising a single digital synthesizer 203 having multiple
independently controlled outputs. In this approach, the centralized digital synthesizer 203 must uniquely address every MOSFET driver with a separate and distinct wire or conductor, if discrete wires or conductive PCB traces are employed, the digital synthesizer must be located near, i.e. in the physical vicinity of, the MOSFET drivers or otherwise a iarge number conductors of extended length will be required. Alternativel a data bus may be employed to distribute the data for ail channels, but then each channel requires a decoder circuit to uniquely identify its particular control signal from the others. .
One implementation of the digital synthesizer 203a of Figure 27A is schematically represented in Figure 28A, comprising a digital counter 503, a latch 506,, and a digital buffer string comprising inverters 507a and 507b, with the output of digital synthesizer 203a controlled by ciock signals 501 and parallel data bus 502 generated by microcontroller pC 500, Inverters 507a and 507b are shown to illustrate that the output of latch 506 comprising minimum size logic transistors must be buffered to drive the input capacitance of one or more MOSFET drivers 215a, as well as to compensate for any parasitic resistance and capacitance present in the conductive interconnect between digital synthesizer 203a and electrical load, represented by current sink circuit 201a. As such, the current drive capability and the corresponding gate width of the MOSFETs used in inverter 507b should be sized accordingly to drive the Enable line at the requisite speed.
While the illustration shows a single inverter 507a electrically inserted between the un-buffered output of latch 506 and the input to high current inverter 507b, in practice many intermediate inverters of sequentially increasing gate widths (not shown) may be used to scale each inverter's outpu current with the capacitive loading of the next inverter. So long as the tota l number of inverters in the series of inverters (including the first inverter 507a and the last inverte 507b) is an even number, e.g, 2, 4, 6, ... then the output of digital counter S03 and latch 506 should remain in digital phase with the output of digital synthesizer 203a. The result of employing the described sequential buffer string is a significantly larger fan out and ability to consistently drive a wide range of data lines while contributing a negligible change in signal propagation delay, Throughout this disclosure, this same technique may be used anytime a high-speed gate needs to drive a long line, high capacitance, or heavy load at a high speed, and therefore it will not be described again.
in operation, pC 500 writes data from its pattern EPROM onto parallel output lines 502. pC 500 also generates clock signals on lines 501, comprising a Sync pulse and dock signal §. in operation, a Sync pulse sets the output of iatch 506 to logic " " which, buffered by inverters 507a and 507b enables MOSFHT driver 215a into an on state, driving the gate of MOSFET 216a to produce a programmed current ILED and illuminating LED string 205a to a fixed brightness. Concurrently, the Sync pulse causes digital counter 503 to load the data present on parallel data bus 502 into the counter's register 504, shown by example as an 8-blt word. Pulses of clock signal 8 cause digital counter 503 to count down linearly, decrementing the remaining count by one with each pulse. When the count reaches zero, digital counter 503 generates a pulse on output line 505, resetting the output of latch 506 to "0" and disabling MOSFET driver 215a.
The timing diagram of Figure 28B illustrates digital synthesizer operation of digital counter 503 in graph 510a and operation of latch 506 in graph 51 b. As shown, digital counter 503 loads data 512 upon load instruction 511 triggered by the Sync pulse on one of clock signal lines 501. Repeated pulses of the clock signal Θ subsequently decrement the counter register 504 once for each interval Te, eventually counting down to zero count at time 513, During this time, the output of the digital synthesizer 203a outputs a logic "1" state as shown by waveform 516. When the value of the count In digital resister 503 reaches zero, the output is reset (line 517) and the LED string switches off at time 513, Until the next load pulse (line 511), the count in digital counter 503 remains at zero (line 514} or alternatively is ignored even if it continues to coun
As illustrated, digital counter 503 is binary and may comprise a ripple counter or a sy nchronous counter. Alternativel the counter 503 may be realized by software within pC 500, eliminating the need for hardware counters and latches, but still performing similar functions. In conclusion, the PWM counter function within digital synthesizer 203a may be implemented discretely, or using a dedicated timer function within pC 500, or implemented in software within pC 500. When software timers are employed, however, care must be maintained to insure that interrupts do not suspend or delay regular counter operation, or an incorrect frequency may be synthesized.
The resulting LED current waveforms of the disclosed LED drive system comprise pulses of controlled widths and varying duration repeated at a fixed clock rate. By varying the on time to« while maintaining a fixed clock period Tsym, the average current in an LED string can be controlled digitally. Such a method can be referred to a fixed- frequency pulse width modulation or PWM control Examples of fixed-frequency PW generation of pulses of varying on-time are illustrated in Figure 28C. in phototherapy applications, PWM average current control can be used for dynamic brightness adjustment of digitally pulsed LED currents as shown in Figure 8B and described in previously cited U.S. Application No. 14/073,371. Alternatively, such PWM methods disclosed herein can be used for digital synthesis of sinusoidal waveforms, driving LED strings in an inventive manner free from spectral contamination in the audio spectrum,
Unlike in analog synthesis described in the previous section, where the average LED current is changed by altering the conducted LED current using a sinusoidal reference voltage, i digital sinusoidal synthesis a sequence of pulse widths varying in a prescribed manner are employed to recreate the sinusoidal waveform at a frequency far below the clock rate used to generate the pulses themselves. As shown in Figure 28C, pulse 5Z0 comprises an on-time tonso which is half that of the clock period T¾>.nc specifically with a digital value of '"1" for the portion 520 of the waveform and with a digital value of "0" for the remaining portion 521 of the T&ync period. As such the on-time ton ~ 50%*Ts>-«c, the off-time ton? - 1- ton = 50%«Tsy»c, and in this particular case ~ ton;
The average current during any PWM pulse is determined by its duty factor, defined as D ¾ ton / T¾?n . Accordingly, in this example the duty factor is given by D = tonso / Ts nc ~ 50%, where dashed line 522 graphically illustrates the duty factor, visually representing the average value of the waveform. Starting with waveform 523, the top row of waveforms shown in Figure 28C illustrates pulses 524 with duty factors greater than 50%, specifically duty factors of 61%, 71%, 79%, 82% and 99%. In the 99% waveform, the dashed Sine 526 representing the average value and the off-time shown by line segment 525 are not drawn to scale in order to better illustrate the variables. Similarly, starting with waveform 527, the bottom row of waveforms show Figure 28C illustrate pulses with duty factor less than 50%, specifically duty factors of 39%, 29%, 21%, 18% and 1%. In the 1% waveform, the dashed line 529 representing the average value and the on -time shown by pulse 528 are not drawn to scale in order to bette illustrate the variables. Each example in the top row is located above it complementary waveform in the bottom row, i.e. the mirror image condition around the 50% condition. For example, waveform 524 with an on-time tto»6i and an a 61% duty factor has a duty factor 11% above the 50% center value, while waveform 527 with an on-time t >.«:·, 5« and an a 39% duty factor has a duty factor 11% below the 50% center value.
By stringing together, i.e. sequencing, a series of pulses of varying duty factors and fixed period in a specific manner, any mathematical function, including sinusoidal waveforms, can be generated from PWM modulated digital pulses. For example, in Figure 29A, a series of digital pulses 590 of varying width, e.g. too, tons2, t<m2i, etc. occurring at a fixed period Ts m- results in a time-varying average value synthesizing a pure sine wave 592, During this digital synthesis, the value of analog reference current 591 remains constant and does not contribute to generation of the sine wave, i n this method, si ne wave 592 ca n be synthesized to have any freq uency and period independent of the clock frequenc l/Tsync, provided that the clock frequency 1/Tsym-is higher than the highest frequency 1 Tsynt being synthesized.
Provided that the clock frequency fsym- * 1 Tsync is chosen to be near or greater 22kf¾ neither the digital clock frequency nor its harmonics are present in the audio spectrum, and the resulting digital synthesis produces no spectral contamination that could adversely impact phototherapy efficacy. For example, a 21,024 Hz clock can be employed to synthesize a 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave with 24 independen Tsym- lime intervals. Such an approach is equivalent to breaking a 360° sine wave into 24 pieces of 15° and 35.7 ¾^ each as illustrated in graph 600 of the digital synthesizer's normalized magnitude versus time shown in Figure 29B. Plotting the average value of sine wave 601 against elapsed time expressed in fixed 15° angle increments 602 results in a spectrum comprising the frequency fsy»th = l TSy»th of the generated sinusoid 602 along with the clock frequency fsym- -
Figure imgf000082_0001
generate it in pulse width modulation, the magnitude of each pulse determi ned by the PWM duty factor has the same average amplitude as that of a D/A converter with the same resolution.
Unlike a D/A converter, however, in PWM control the actual analog value is not present in the ampiitude of a waveform but in its duration determined by the time average value of the current or voltage. This duration is illustrated by waveforms 604a through 604d having PWM duty factors of 50%, 100%, 75% and 25% corresponding to arc angles of 0°, 90°, 150° and 330° respectively. The a erage value 602 of any 15° time increment comprises a portion of time when the output is at the full scale of 100% and a the remainder of the period where the output is at 0%, The average value shown as sinusoid 600 is in between, varying in proportion to the duty factor of each time slice,
As a practical matter, in sinusoidal synthesis using digital circuitry, negative voltages are problematic because they require dual power supply voltages, e.g. ±0.6V, where the signal must range from voltages above-ground to those "below- ground". Negative or below ground voltages are uncommon in integrated circuits, difficult to integrate because they require special electrical isolation techniques, and almost unheard of in digital circuitry. To realize a sinusoid usin only positive supply voltages, the average value of the sine wave must occur above ground. For example, if sine wave 601 is realized using 1,2V logic, then for a sinusoid having a peak-to-peak voltage range of 1.2V, i.e. +0.6V, the average voltage of the sine wave occurs at 0.6V, In digital synthesis this center voltage occurs at 0 = 50%, equivalent to the zero state of a sine wave occurring at. 0°, 180°, and at 360°,
A direct comparison between analog synthesis and fixed-frequency PWM digital synthesis of a sinusoid is shown in Figure 29C, where the vertical axis represents the ampiitude of the synthesized sine wave in a given interval while the horizontal axis represents time within the interval In analog synthesis using a D/A converter ( D AC), the amplitude of the signal shown in graph 620a controlled by the DAC output remains at a constant voltage for the entire period T .·,·)·.>·. in any given interval, the normalized DAC output has a value V\>a/1.2V ranging from 0% to 100% and may vary in the next time increment by a change in magnitude 622. These magnitude changes generally comprise linear steps of ±Δ¥, +2ΔΥ, etc, according to any desired resolution comprising 256 levels for an 8-hit DAC, 4096 levels for a 12- bit DAC and 65,536 steps for a 16-bit DAC. Since the instantaneous voltage of the waveform is set fay the DAC and not fay a PWM counter, then the highest required clock frequency to implement analog synthesis is l/Tsync with the period T-.vm- adjusted in accordance with the highest frequency to be reproduced with fidelity. in contrast, using PWM digital synthesis, in a plot of voltage versus time shown in graph 600b, at the beginning of each time interval the voltage jumps from 0% up to 00% with no intermediate values except for transitions, and remains at this voltage for some fractional ton time 62S of the T*yne period 627, The on-time ton is dynamically adjusted i n linear increments of time ±At, ±2Δΐ, etc, set by a 8-bit, 12- bit, or 16-bit counter having a resolution of 256, 4096 or 65,536 steps respectively according to the desired resolution unless otherwise limited by available clock freq uencies. Because the average value of the sinusoid is set by a clock counting time and further subdividing the pulse shown in graph 660b, then a higher clock rate is needed to synthesize a sine wave than is required using a D/A converter, So, while analog synthesis achieves its resolution with steps in voltage, PWM digital sy nthesis achieves its resolution by step of time. As such, the maximum frequency of the clock requi red for PWM digital synthesis is 1/ΤΘ where this frequency is the sync clock frequency i/I times the desired resolution desired, in PWM synthesis, each time interval, e.g. 604a, includes a portion of the time current is flowing in the LED and a portion of time where the drive current is zero. Provided the clock frequency i$yac. is sufficiently high to be beyond the audio spectrum, then the cells in living tissue cannot respond to the presence of this high frequency, especially since it represents a small signal change in the average current from one interval to the next in essence the cells provide natural filtering. Another filtering effect occurs because of capacitance in the LEDs and the MOSFET drive circuit which unavoidably softens the driving current waveform edges and filters hig frequency noise, particularly harmonics beyond the audio spectrum, Lastly additional capacitance can be added to the LED drive channels if required.
Sinusoidal reconstruction with good fidelity, i.e. sinusoidal synthesis with minimal harmonics from distortion of the waveform from its mathematically ideal shape, requires a sufficient number of intervals of the highest sinusoidal frequency being reproduced fsym:>(max). For analog synthesi this clock frequency fSc is given by the relation.
firyoc - 1/Tsyac ~ (#intervals) · fsynt (max)
where the variable "^intervals" is the number of ti me intervals per 360° for the highest frequency waveform being synthesized and fSy»th(max) is the highest frequency waveform being synthesized. One means by which the #intervals can be chosen is by the desired width of each time interval in degrees using the following relation: intervals 360° / (arc angle of each time interval). For example if each arc angle is 36° then #intervals = 10, if each arc angle is 20° then intervals - 18, if each arc angle is 15° then intervals - 24, if each arc angle is 6° then intervals = 60, and so on. This hyperbolic relationship, that smaller angles require more time intervals to describe one full 360° cycle of a sine wave, means in PWM synthesis higher resolution, requires a faster clock.
To summarize the comparison, digital PWM synthesis requires a higher frequency clock h than analog synthesis because each time interval Tsyne must he further subdivided into smaller snippets of time of duration Ts, meaning for digital PWM synthesis the same bit resolution requires a higher clock frequency than analog synthesis. The required frequency fe of this faster clock, the one used for counting tlie increments of the on-time and setting the dut factor, is given fay the relation
fe = 1 /Τβ ~ (bit resolution) · fsy«c ~ (bit resolution) / Tsync
~ (bit resolution} · (#sntervals)♦ fsysthfma )
essentiaily describing how many thin rectangles of fixed time intervals are used to reconstruct, one cycle of the highest frequency t be synthesized. This faster PW clock signal fe may be generated from an even higher fixed, frequency oscillator f -, preferably temperature compensated to minimize drift, using either a constant or dynamically adjustable frequency ratio. The process of dividing the synthesized sinusoidal waveform into small rectangles of fixed duration and of height equal to the magnitude of the function is analogous to the mathematical procedure called "integration" in calculus, in integral calculus, as the time increments "dt" become infinitely thin, the synthesized waveform is reproduced precisel and the area under the curve, the energy and harmonic content of the phototherapy excitation, is precisely controlled. Also it should he noted that the value of Tsync is identical for both analog and digital synthesis. For example, using 18 intervals of 20° each to synthesize a 1,168Hz (D6) sinusoid, the Sync clock used to load D/A converters in analog synthesis or to load the digital counter in digital PWM synthesis has a frequency fv..-;><- of 21 ,024Hz, a frequenc sufficiently high that it and all its harmonics occur at the extreme upper range of the audio frequency range and beyond,
Graph 640a in f i ure 29D illustrates a plot of the clock frequency required in the system as a function of the maximum frequency sine wave to be synthesized, shown ranging from D4 to D8. The y-axis represents the highest frequency clock which in the case of analog synthesis represented by line 641 is the sync pulse used to load the D/A converter at a frequency of fSy«c and in the case of digital PWM synthesis is the digitai counter dock having a frequency f«. Using digital synthesis of the same 1, 168Hz waveform, the digital clock rate of the PWM digital counter for 8- bit, and 10-bit resolution shown b lines 642 a d 643 respectively requires correspond ing clock frequencies fe of approximately 5.38MHz and 21,529MHz. For 12-bit resolution, the digital counter clock is 4,096 times that of fSync or over 86 MHz, too high to be shown on the graph.
Graph 640b also shown in Figure 29D illustrates the linear impact of increasing the number of time intervals used to synthesize 360° of the highest frequency sine wave being generated, where the number of intervals varies from 8 to 30. As shown fay line 645 the clock rate required to synthesize a 2,336Hz (D7) sine wave remains below 5MHz for employing a 6-bit counter offering 64
magnitudes for a 1.2V sine wave, i.e. where each step represents 18,8niV or 1,6% increments of the signal. Line 646 i! !ustrates an 8-bi.t counter offering 256 steps and a precision of 4.69mV or 0.4% step increments can be achieved over the full range without exceeding 2QMH .
Considering that practical commercial microcontrollers typically operate at clock frequencies between 10 and 25MHz, line 647 illustrates that a 10-bit PWM counter can only be used with a small number of intervals, 8 or less, while remaining below 25MHz. Using fewer than .1,2 intervals per 360° results in distortion in the synthesized sinusoid not compensated for by higher bit precision, meaning the benefit of more precisely setting the average voltage in a given time interval by using 12-bit PWM counters or iarger, is not worth sacrificing the number of time intervals used to construct the sinusoid. For high fidelity synthesis of a sinusoid free from unwanted audio spectrum harmonics, the number of time intervals for practical considerations ranges from 12 time-intervals each 30° wide, to 24 intervals of 15°. The following tables details the clock frequency required to synthesize a 4,672Hz (08} sinusoid using a various sized PWM counters,
Figure imgf000086_0001
Of the above conditions, the shaded boxes are not viable either because the clock frequency exceeds 25MHz or because the number of time intervals are too few. This analysis suggests that the optimum condition is a 21,5MHz PWM clock driving a 8~ bit PWM counter to synthesize a 4,672Hz (D8) sinusoid from 18 time intervals, each 20° in width. The corresponding PWM clock has a period Te - 1/fe - l/(21.529MHz) = 46.5nsec and sync period of Ts ¾f: = 256/¾ ~ 1 l^sec with a corresponding freq uen cy f$ync - 83.9k Hz,
While discrete oscillator solutions can be utilized, in many cases the accuracy and cost is unwarranted, especially considering that man such solutions were developed for radio communications. On the other hand, 25 Hz oscillators are relatively easy to manufacture discretely or in conjunction with common
microcontrollers because this oscillating frequency is commonly used in Ethernet communications. One timing source and clock generator circuit 660 made in accordance with this invention is illustrated in Figure 30, comprising oscillator 661, digital counters 662 and 664 and trim register 693 to create clock signals 501 used to drive the digital synthesizer 203 shown in. Figure 28A.
Oscillator 661 may he realized using a. crystal oscillator, a R-C relaxation oscillator, a ring oscillator, or a silicon MEMs oscillator. A crystal oscillator, comprising a crystal shard of quartz mechanically tuned to resonate a specific frequency is advantageous for its temperature independence, but it is unfortunately relatively fragile compared to semiconductors. A R-C relaxation oscillator employs a resistor-capacitor network to charge the capacitor at a set rate, discharging the capacitor rapidly after reach ing a comparator or Schmidt trigger threshold, and repeating the process interminably. In many cases, the circuit elements to
implement timing source 660 are fully integrated into μ€ 500 (shown in Figure 2 A) and are entirely user-programmable in firmware o software.
Clock precision is achieved by trimming the resistor in an R-C oscillator and/or using materials that are relatively temperature independent. Another alternative is the to create a time source using a large number of inverters connected head-to-tail, i.e. output to input, to form a loop or ring. When powered, the signal propagates around the inverter ring at a frequency i accordance to the inverters' propagation delays. An od d number of inverters are required to insure the oscillations continue. The newest solution available today is the use of silicon micromachine devices or MEMs, used to create a small vibrating spring or diving board (cantilever) monitored electrically by eapacitive coupling or peizo-resistive variation and tuned to resonate according to its specific mass.
Regardless of the techni ue employed, the oscillator 661 produces a 25 Hz oscillating signal which is then adjusted to any lower desired frequency, e.g.
21.5M Hz, by digital counter 662. if oscillator 661 is trimmed during manufacturing then counter 662 can be preset to a fixed value by software, if however, the frequency of oscillator 661 varies with manufacturing, functional trimming using trim register 663 is normally performed during manufacturing, in functional trimming, measurement of frequency fe is made repeatedly while the count being loaded into counter 662 by the digital value stored in trim register 663 is adjusted until the desired frequency is achieved and the frequency source calibrated.
This PWM clock frequency is supplied to the digital synthesizer and also to the input of programmable counter 664, converting the PWM clock frequency into the Sync p lse having a frequency fsync that is, as shown, 256 times lower than fa The divide by factor for counter 664 shou ld match the desired resolution of the PWM output, e.g. 8-bits, iO-bits etc. in this manner the PWM digital counter 664 will count pulses corresponding to the frequency fe and the Sync pulse occurring 256 pulses later will reset the LED driver and restart the count.
As applied to LED drive in phototherapy, the effective resolution of sinusoidal generation using the disclosed invention can be estimated by multiplying the number of time intervals used in constructing the sinusoid times the number of PWM duty factors possible, Le. the bit resolution of the PWM counter. Multiplying 18 time increments, approximately equivalent to 4-bit precision, times 256 possible values of D generated from an 8-bit counter means for sinusoids up to 5,425Hz, the total resolution is approximateiy equivalent to 12-bits or 4096 combinations. U less the clock frequency is increased in proportion to fs wh(ma ), using PWM methods to synthesize sinus ids above this freq uency means the aggregate resolutio must be reduced hyperbolically, i.e, where foSc./fsy»«j(max3 sacrificing fidelity either by lowering the bit-resolution or the number of time intervals. This tradeoff between the maximum frequency synthesized and its aggregate resolution is illustrated in the following table:
Figure imgf000088_0001
fosc / fs>nsh(max) ratio | 5351 4,608 2,676 1 ,338 1136 waveform resolution | 4,608 4,608 2,676 1,338 1136 equivalent I
12-bit 12-bit 11 -bit 10-bit 10-bit resolution | The table illustrates that for synthesizing sinusoids up to approximately 5.4kHz, the overall resolution of the digital synthesizer is 4608 combinations, greater than 12- bit resolution. Above this frequency, referred herein as the synthesizer's
"bandwidth", the digital synthesizer's resolution declines in proportion to the sinusoid's frequency, declining to 11-bit precision at 9,344Hz (09) and maintains at least 10-bit resolution a ll the way to the upper edge of the audio spectrum. The bandwidth limitation and its impact is illustrated graphically in Figure 31 wherein curve 671 shows the aggregate synthesizer resolution versus the maximum synthesized frequency f nth (max) in both the number of possible combi nations and in their bit equivalence. As shown, the accuracy of digital synthesizer 203a remains constant at a value exceeding 12-bits until the frequency of 5.425kHz, the digital synthesizer's bandwidth, i reached (line 673), above which the resolution declines proportionately with fsyn«i{max). At the edge of the ultrasonic spectrum (line 175), the digital synthesizer 203a still maintains an overall resolution of ID-bits. If the number of time intervals used to synthesize the highest frequency sine wave is maintained at intervals ~ 18, then the drop in aggregate resolution 671 must be accompanied by a decrease in PWM counter resolution as shown by line 672. Even operating above synthesizer 203a's bandwidth, up to the edge of the ultrasonic spectrum 175, the PWM counter resolution still exceeds 6-bits.
Clearly above synthesizer 203a's bandwidth, as the resolutio declines the fidelity of the synthesized sine wave suffers. While for audiophiSes listening to m usic, subtle distortion and phase artifacts of the digital audio reproduction process may be noticeable to the trained ear, in an LED drive for phototherapy the resulting distortion is essentially insignificant, carrying little energy and occurring at harmonic frequencies outside the audio spectrum. No adverse impact is expected in this frequency range.
As described previously, at a frequency slightly above 7kHz, even the lowest harmonics of a square wave are outside the audio spectrum and not expected to affect photobiomoduiation and phototherapy efficacy. So at freq encies above the threshold frequency shown by line 673 in Figure 31 the disclosed invention may continue PWM synthesis with reduced fidelity, switch to pulsed digital operation, or switch to analog synthesis described previously. The resulting harmonic spectra., shown in Figure 32 A, illustrate that using PWM digital synthesis of a sinusoid results in only the synthesized frequency represented by line 675 in the audio range. The sync frequency fs nc used to load the data stream into the PWM digital counter, represented by line 676, occurs at a frequency far into the ultrasonic spectrum beyond the upper limit of the audio spectrum (line 175). The clock pulses used to control the PWM on- time (line 678} and the clock pulses used to generate it (line 677) occur in the MHz range and are not presen in the LED drive excitation waveforms whatsoever,
When the same approach is employed to synthesize a lower frequency sine wave, e.g. fs nth = 292 Hz (D4) show b line 681 in Figure 32B, a potentially serious noise problem results. If the synthesized frequency of 292Hz is generated using the minimum required Sync clock frequency (line 682), the resulting clock frequenc fs ac occurs at 7,078Hz in the middle of the audio spectrum and with relatively high energy content. Moreover as described by table 679 in Figure 32B, the third harmonic of the Sy nc clock (line 683) also fails at a frequenc below the lower limit of the ultrasonic spectrum (line 175 ), in the upper part of the audio spectru m. So while using the minimum possible clock frequency is beneficial in synthesizing high frequenc waveforms, it is not advantageous in generating lower frequenc sinusoids,
As illustrated in Figure 32C, requiring the upper limitation in PWM clock frequency ft not to exceed the preferred oscillator frequenc 25MHz, and the lower limitation in t e Sync pulse frequency ί$>™ not to fail within the audio spectrum puts practical constraints on the range of frequencies f m that can be synthesized using the fixed clock ratio described previously, namely
fa - (bit resolution) · f&ync- = (bit resolution) · (tintervals) · fSy»th(max') For the PWM clock frequency for synthesized sine waves formed of twenty-four 15° time intervals or eighteen 20° time intervals to remai at or below 25 Hz, shown by horizontal line 680, the maximum frequency sinusoid fsy«t (max) is limited to 4,069Hz and 5,425Hz respectively., as shown by points 682a and 68.2b and consistent with Figure 31. According to the above relation at the other extreme, synthesizing any sine wave having a frequency fsym¾ below 917Hz with 15° time intervals or below 1,222 Hz with 20° time intervals mean that the Sync clock pulse frequency fs »c will be sufficiently low that it fails below the frequenc represented by line 175 and into the audio band, specifically shown as points 684a and 684b, creating the potential for unwanted spectral contamination affecting phototherapy efficacy. The resulting range bounded by the audio spectrum's limitation of the Sync clock fsyne on the low-end and the practical limit of the oscillator's 25MHz frequency on the PWM clock frequency fe on the upper end (shown by shaded region 685 for the 20° synthesis example). Assuming the oscillator frequency and audio boundaries are fixed, operating outside of the allowed range means resolution must be sacrificed for synthesizing high si usoidal frequencies and at the other extreme, a higher than minimum, i.e. an "over-sampled" Sync clock frequency must be maintained when synthesizing low frequency sinusoids.
i conclusion, when the required clock frequency for PWM digital synthesis is impracticably high, the options available using the disclosed inventio include · limit the maximum frequency of the synthesized sine wave
* compromise the harmonic fidelity of the synthesized waveform by limiting PWM bit resolution, i.e. reducing the resol ution of the duty factor
» compromise the harmonic fidelity of the synthesized waveform by employing larger time intervals, thereby reducing the number of time intervals per T.¾mtfi · switch from digital synthesis to analog synthesis above a certain clock
frequency, using a D/A converter as described previously including to vary 1 the magnitude of the LED current in accordance with analog, digital and PCM
2 sources
3 * Combinations of the above methods
4 Conversely, when the frequency of the sine wave being synthesized istoo low, the
5 minimum Sync clock frequency must be maintained above a set frequency limit and
6 cannot scale in proportion to the synthesized frequency. Using the inventive
7 methods disclosed herein a sinusoid of controlled and dynam ically adjustable
8 frequencies for LED phototherapy can therefore be generated using digital synthesis
9 free from spectral contamination of unwanted harmonics in the audio spectrum.
I 0 Digitai Sinusoidal Synthesis
I I Given the aforementioned description of the apparatus and methods of
12 pulsed width modulation control o LED current, frequency, and brightness, an
13 sinusoid, series of sinusoids, or chords of multiple sinusoids ma be dynamically
14 synthesized,
15 Referring again to the apparatus of Figure 28A, in sinusoidal synthesis, a
16 particular control sequence, i.e. a specific series of PWM cou ts, is sequentially
17 loaded from any digital controller such as € 500 into register 504 of digital
18 synthesizer 203a. The digital synthesis of sinusoids in accordance with the methods
19 described herein controls the harmonic content, and brightness of one or more LED
20 strings used in phototherapy. While microcontroller \xC 500 is shown as the source
21 of these instructions, any programmable logic or logic array, custom digital circuitry
22 or custom integrated circuit ma also be used to generate the control sequence.
23 Whether by hardware, software or some combination thereof, execution of
24 the digital synthesis invol ves a sequence of steps such as those shown in Figure 33,
25 Starting with the step "Select Pattern" (step 700), the LED wavelengths, channels,
26 and driving algorithms are chosen. In "Load Conditions" (step 701), these settings
27 including f c, h, ton, Tsync, TS »th, and the various synthesis patterns are loaded into
28 the appropriate registers within μ€ 500 and in associated hardware, counters,
29 buffers, etc. if a single-frequency sinusoid i);yn is to be synthesized, the sequence of
30 digitai codes required is recalled from non-voiatiie memory files and then saved in a
31 data register or stack. These codes represent the counts loaded sequentially into the PWM counter each time a Tsync pulse occurs, if a chord of multiple sinusoids fsynthi + fsyathj + fsynthx is to be synthesized, a different sequence of digital codes is recalled from nonvolatile memory file comprising and loaded into a data register or stack. Data registers may comprise static or dynamic memory, i.e. SRAM or DRAM, but since they are modified, i.e. "written" frequently and rapidly during synthesis, the data registers operate at a frequency too high for non-volatile memory such as EPROM, P OM or flash, used to store the phototherapy patterns and algorithms.
After the conditions are loaded into registers or stacks for quick access, in "Load Tsync Counter" (step 702a) the register 705 containing data that represents the first time interval Tsync is loaded into the Tsync counter 664, shown in Figure 30. In tandem, in "Load PWM Counter" (step 702b), the data in register 706,
representing the on-time of the pulse within the time interval lY -ac, is loaded into PWM counter 503 shown in Figure 28A. in the step entitled "Set Latch, Enable LED, Commence Counting" (step 702c)the output of PWM latch 506 is set "high" enabling MOSFET driver 215a and illuminating LED string 205a, Concurrently, Tsym- counter 664 and PWM counter 503 commence counting puises from the ¾ clock. In the step entitled "Decrement PWM Counter to Zero" (step 702d), PWM counter 503 counts down to zero while the Tsync counter continues unabated. When the PWM counter 503 reaches zero, the output of PWM latch 506 is reset "low" disabling MOSFET driver 215a and turning off LED string 205a as described by the step entitled "Reset Latch, Disable LED, Continue ,··.¾· Count" (step 702c). As the name describes, the Tsyn counter continues to count through the step entitled "Decrement T&ypc Counter to Zero" until the Tsync count reaches zero.
Once Tsync counter 664 reaches zero, a program decision (step 703) is made in accordance with the algorithm prescribed by files originally loaded during the "Select Pattern" step 700, If the pattern has been completed in the "Pattern
Complete" case (arrow 704a), the sequence is finished and a new pattern must be selected to continue, Otherwise, in the case "Pattern Not Complete" (arrow 704b) a new set of counts com rising the data in register 705, representing the new time interval sync 70S, and the data in register 706, representing the on-time of the pulse within the time interval IV, ; ... ar respectively loaded into Τ*>·«« counter 664 and PWM counter 503,, and steps 702a through 702f are repeated. The process continues until decision 703 determines the pattern is complete, whereby program execution terminates and digital synthesis of a sequence of sinusoids or sinusoidal chords is complete,
in software implementations, the size of counters 702a and 702b are adjustable, able to synthesize a single cycle of a sinusoid or multiple cycles. The duty factor of a given pulse may be cal culated as the ratio of the on-time determined by the count stored in register 706 and the Ί\¾-;κ· time interval stored, in register 705. While in fixed frequency PWM synthesis, the sync time interval i register 70S remains constant and the on-time in register 706 is adjusted to control the duty factor, the Tsync period can be adjusted to synthesize any given sinusoid of an arbitrary frequency i<,Vnv;->. The algorithm shown in Figure 33 accommodates changing the value of Tsym.- in accordance with the frequency of the sinusoid being synthesized and to maintain a desired resolution. For example, fSy«r. can be
decreased in proportion to the maximum frequenc i hirn ] of the sinusoid being synthesized. Alternatively, a higher value of fsync than required may be employed.
For example, except for the aforementioned of audio frequency noise Issue, a 292Hz (D4) sinusoid may be synthesized using an 8-bit PWM counter and either 24 or 18 time intervals, in graph 730 of Figure 34A, sinusoid 73 la is synthesized using 24 evenly-spaced intervals each corresponding to 15° of arc and having a duration of 140.7μ56€. Each interval has an average value shown by steps 731b determined by an 8-bit PWM counter having 256 durations summarized in t ble 732. By successivel loading the PWM co nter with the binary equivalent of the decimal number in the "PW count" column or the hexadecimal number in the "hex" column of table 733, the sinusoidal waveform 73 "la will result In operation, at the first time point representing: 0°, the PWM counter is loaded with hex number 80 for 50%, the sin of 50°, Because of a quantization error in the counter, i.e. 128/255, the nearest duty factor is 50.2%, the synthesizer exhibiting a slight discrepancy from its ideal average output. After 14 sec, one Tsync time Interval, the PWM counter is loaded with a new value AO hex (160 decimal) changing the duty factor to 62.7%, The process continues sequentially driving the average magnitude higher till at 0.86ms the PWM counter is loaded with FF hex reaching a duty factor of 100%. Thereafter the PWM duty factor declines reaching a minimum value at 2.57ms of 0 corresponding to the sin of 270°. The process then repeats to synthesize additional cycles of sinusoids. The major negative aspect of this sinusoidal synthesis is the noise generated by f c - 7,008Hz shown in table 732. While it does not comprise an entire spectrum of audio frequency harmonics present in presen t day digital pulsed systems intentionally operating in the audio band, it still represents audio spectral contamination.
in graph 730 of Figure 34B, sinusoid 736a is synthesized using 18 evenly- spaced intervals each corresponding to 20° of arc and having a duration of
190.3 psec. Each interval has an average value shown by steps 7 6b determined by an 8-bit PWM counter having 256 durations summarized in table 737. By
successivel loading the PWM counter with the binary equivalent of the decimal number in the "PWM count'* column or the hexadecimal number in the "hex" column of table 738, the sinusoidal waveform 736a will result The advantage of dividing a sine wave into 20° intervals of time over that of 15° intervals is the lower resolution allows a higher frequency sinusoid to he synthesized with a clock frequency fe. The disadvantage of employing 20° Intervals is that the nearest points to the maximum and minimum values on the sinusoid at 90° and 270° occur at 80°, 100°, 260° and 280° causing some flattening of the synthesized sine wave, slight distortion appearing as if the waveform was "clipped". Another negative aspect of this sinusoidal synthesis is the noise generated by fs w = 5,256Hz shown in table 737, While it does not comprise a entire spectrum of audio frequency harmonics present in present da digital pulsed systems Intentionall operating in the audio band, it still represents audio spectral contamination.
A time graph of PWM pulses 739 used to synthesize sinusoid 736a and its sequence of average value steps 736b is shown in greater detail in Figure 34C. For clarity the average value of each step 736b is listed as a percentage for each interval along with the corresponding decimai equivalent, of the binary count loaded into the 8-bit PWM counter. Figure 34 D illustrates synthesis of a single cycle of 1,168Hz (D6) sinusoid 741a with PWM average value shown by steps 741b comprising IB time intervals of 20°. In this case, the PWM ciock frequency fe and the sync interval T, m are adjusted from fe ~1.3 6 hz to 5.198MHz and from syne - 1 ϋ.3 5 to 49.3 δ, commensurate with the decrease in the period of the synthesized sinusoid from 3.42ms to 0.86ms as summarized in table 742. The PVVM counter sequence used to synthesize sinusoid 741a is described in table 743 both in hexadecimal form and its decimal equivalent Since the Syne frequency is f e ~ 20,304Hz, no audio spectrum noise is generated.
Figure 34E illustrates the same data for synthesizing a 4,672Hz (D8) sinusoid 746a shown in graph comprising steps 746b formed in accordance with PWM count sequence shown in tabie 748 and clock periods shown in table 747. Comparing these conditions with the synthesis of lower frequency sinusoids tikistrates that the minimum frequency ciock rate requirements for the PWM ciock S¾ change with synthesis accuracy, i.e. the number of ti me intervals used to synthesize the sinusoid (intervals), and with the frequency of the sinusoid being synthesized fsynth.
Figure imgf000096_0001
As the above table reveals, the PWM clock frequency fe increases in proportional to the frequency being synthesized with synthesis at 15° increments carrying a 33% overhead in added clock rate compared to 20° resolution. This added accuracy only becomes limiting when synthesizing the 4,672Hi (DS'J frequency or higher, because 28.7MHz exceeds the common clock frequency 2S H?. used in microcontrollers and for Ethernet The table also clarifies that synthesis of a 292ϊίζ sine wave using the minimum frequency v,K results in noise in the audio spectrum,, at approximately 5kHz and 7kHz. This problem can be avoided using over-sampling, discussed below.
While the aforementioned waveforms comprised sinusoids with peak-to- peak amplitudes representing 100% of the digital scale, the magni tude of the synthesized sine wave can be reduced simply by changing the sequential PWM code, as shown in table 753 in Figure 35A. In the digital synthesized waveform 751 shown in graph 750, the average value of the function is +25% and varies with an amplitude 754 of ±25%, ranging in total from 0% to 50%, i.e. with a sinusoidal output of 25% ± 25%. Without changing the operating conditions in table 752 from that of a full seaie sinusoid specified previously in table 732, the magnitude and the mean value of the digitally synthesized sinusoid can be controlled simply by adjusting the PWM code sequence labeled "Hex" in table 753 to lower magnitude numbers.
Although this reduced magnitude sine wave shown in Figure 3SA extended down to 0% at its minimum, as shown in Figure 3SB, even with a reduced magnitude sinusoid of ±25% shown by line 764, the entire curve can be shifted up by a DC offset 765, in this example by +25%, to produce resulting offset sinusoid 761 with a DC bias offset. In phototherapy this waveform modulates the LED brightness while maintaining some illumination at all time. The shif is the average value and the smaller magnitude of the oscillation is accomplished entirel b minimizing the variation in the sequential PWM code described in table 763.
As Figure 35C reveals., modification of the PWM code as shown in table 773 can be used to further limit the AC swing to a small signal level, e.g. ±10% variation. This AC com onent 774 can be considered small signal when compared to the DC component 765 of the waveform 7 1, comprising +60% offset 765 in the entire sinusoid. The resulting spectrum is shown in Figure 35D illustrating a sinusoid of limited amplitude (line 781) at frequency of 1, 168Hz (D6) (line 780). As graphically represented, the sinusoid of limited amplitude (Sine 781) sits atop a DC offset (line 782). By definition, direct current or DC has a frequency of zero Hertz. The Sync clock has a frequency (line 783) of 28kHz, well outside the audio spectrum,
Digital Sinusoidal Sy thesis of Chords
An LED phototherapy drive system made in. accordance with this invention is also capab!e of digitally synthesizing chords of multiple frequencies for driving LED strings. When more than one frequency pattern is present, e.g. a higher-frequency sine wave o period Tsyntiu and a lower-frequency sine wave of period Tsymh-2. the duration of the pattern is chosen to synthesize at least one cycle of the lower frequency. This means the overall time of the pattern has a duration of at least Tsym-ha and over the same interval more than one 360° cycle of the higher frequency sinusoid will necessarily occur. Assuming for simplicity's sake that the rati o of the sinusoids is an integer, i.e. where Tsymkz ~ βΎί.γαΐ ι, then more than β cycles of the higher frequency sinusoid will occur is the same time that only one cycle of the lower frequency sinusoid occurs. For example, a single cycle of a 1,168Hz (D6) sine wave requires 0.856ms to complete 360° while a 4,672Hz (D8) sine waves requires only 0,21 ms. The ratio of their sinusoidal periods is therefore β = 4, meaning four complete cycles of the 4,672Hz [D8] sine wave is completed in the same time interval that only one cycle of the 1 168HZ sinusoid is completed,
An example of this higher frequency component is shown in Figure 36 where an individual cycle of a 4,572Hz sinusoid having a period TsyntM - 0.214ms is repeated four cycles having a total period for the pattern synthesized of pTsy»thi = 4Tsynt = 4*0.214ras = 0,856ms. T e resulting curve 801 shown in graph 800 comprises the same pattern of synthesized duty factor and digital PWM codes described in table 803a for the duration from 0 to 0.214ms and then repeats in columns 803b, 803c, and 803d for the corresponding time intervals from 0.214ms to 0.428ms, from 0.428ms to 0.642ms, and from 0.642ms to 0.856ms. Ail told, synthesis of four cycles of a 4,672Hz sinusoid requires 4*0.214 = 0.856ms to complete, comprising 4* 18 - 72 time intervals.
in order to accurately add two or more waveforms together to form a chord in digital synthesis disclosed herein, each function must have a defined value at the same time points, even if the value must be interpolated from other time points. For example to add the values of a 1,168Hz sine wave together with that of four cycles of a 4,672 Hz sine wave 801, both sine waves must have a corresponding value at each ti me increment of 0.214ms. So while synthesis of one 360° cycle of higher-frequency sine wave 801 will comprise onl 18 time intervals, the lower frequency sine wave will comprise 72 time intervals, many more than required for its high-fidelity synthesis. Synthesis of a waveform with more time intervals than is practically needed for high fidelity reproduction is herein referred to as "oversarapiing".
An example of an oversampled sinusoid is illustrated in Figure 37A
comprising a 1,168Hz sinusoid 811 generated from the PWM average value 812 of 72 distinct time intervals, 4.X the number needed to faithfully synthesize sinusoid 811 wi h high fidelity. The benefit of oversarapiing includes
* reducing output ripple
♦ simplifying filtering of high frequency clock signals
» preventing the Sync clock frequency from failing into the audio spectrum
when synthesizing Sow frequency sinusoids
· increasing the resolution to include common time points where the
amplitude of two or more sinusoids of differing frequencies may be added to digitally synthesize a chord of frequencies.
For example, in pattern tables 815a, 815b, and 815c shown in Figure 37B defining the PWM counts used to synthesize sinusoid 811, only the shaded rows are needed to synthesize the waveform with fidelity. The rest of the PWM counts represent oversampled data. Since only one-in-four PWM counts are needed to accuratel produce the desired sine wave, the drive data is 4X, Le, four-times, oversampled. in this case, such a waveform can be directly added together with sinusoid 801 of Figure 36 to produce a new waveform comprising a chord of two sine waves. The process of adding waveforms to produce a new waveform comprising a chord of the two component fre uencies is shown graphically in Figure 38 where graph 820a illustrates the two component frequencies of the chord, namel one cycle of 1,168Hz (D6) sinusoid 811 and four-cycles of 4,672Hz (D8) sinusoid 801, each equal in amplitude having a peak-to-peak amplitude of 1.00% and an average duty factor of 50%. While 4-cycle sinusoid 801 has a period Ί γαι ι ~ 0.21ms sliown by line 821, lower frequency sinusoid 811 has a period l\yam - 0,86 shown by line 822, four times longer than Tsyntiu. Because the two curves are integral multiples of one another, oversanipling facilitates easy addition of the PW counts at each time interval in order to synthesize the chord of the two notes.
The resulting composite frequency representing a chord of the component frequencies is shown by waveform 823 in graph 820b in Figure 38, The sinusoidal nature of the waveform and its constituent frequencies are not easily identified from the time waveform shown in graph 820b, In the frequency spectrum shown in Figure 39, however, it can readily be seen that the synthesized frequencies represented by Sines 828 and 827 equal to the 6th and 8th octaves of D are of equal amplitude and the only synthesized frequency below the upper limit of the audio spectrum (line 175), The sync clock occurs at a frequenc 18 times that of the highest frequency, i.e. 18·4,672Ηζ ~ 84,096Hz (line 829) well into the ultrasonic spectrum.
As more notes are added to the chord or if the constituent frequencies have different amplitudes, the waveform becomes even more complex visually. An example of mixing sinusoids of differing frequency and amplitude is illustrated in graph 830a of Figure 40 where a 1,168Hz [D6] sinusoid 811 having a peak-to-peak amplitude of ±50% around a 50% average value is mixed, i.e. algebraically added, to 4 cycles of a 4,672Hz sinusoid 831 having an attenuated AG magnitude 852 of
±7.5%, with sinusoid 831 sitting atop a DC offset 833 of + 17.5%, meaning sinusoid 831 ranges from a low value of 17,5% to an upper value of 15%. in phototherapy, a DC offset can be interpreted as a minimum curren and corresponding brightness which an LED will never drop below. The resulting waveform 834 from the summation of the two sinusoids into a chord is shown in graph 830b of Figure 40. Despite the fact that wavefor m 834 and waveform 823 of Figure 38 both com prise identical frequency com onents and harmonic spectra, specifically the notes of D6 and D8, the time waveforms appear entirely differen A process by which the pattern tables used for sinusoidal synthesis, e.g.
tables 8.1.5a through 815c, are created involves an algorithm shown in Figure 41 or some modification thereof, in this method, starting with the number of time intervals, e.g. #intervals - 18, then the arc degree column of data is calculated using a fixed angle namely = 360/18 = 20°. The column arc degrees Φ, combined with the frequency of the synthesized waveform fs n h, e.g. fsyafc « 4,672 Hz, results in a calculated time
Figure imgf000101_0001
0.012ms. Give the foregoing, if the number of cycles β * 1, the total period pTsy nth is then pTs ntb l»(i8»0.012ms) = 0.214ms. The result is time interval table 843 comprising a column of angles versus corresponding time points, if two cycles are desired, i.e. number of cycles β ~ 2, then the height of time interval table 843 is doubled where the time column extends from 0ms to 0.428ms in increments of 0,012ms and the corresponding arc angle ranges from 0° to 720s in increments of 20°.
The time interval table 843 of time versus arc angle Φ is next processed line- by-line by normalized mathematical function 840, in the example by sinusoid function A»(sin[4>) + 1) + B]≤ 100%. As indicated, the function is normalized, i.e., represented as a percentage from 0% to 100%. A represents the amplitude and 8 the offset of the sine wave. The amplitude A is calculated from the vertical midpoint between the peak-to-peak values of the sine wave; the offset B is calculated from the minima of the sine wave. Th us, 0 > A < 0.5 and 0 < B < 1, and when A = 0,5, B = 0, The result is analog sine table 844 comprising columns of time with corresponding arc angle Φ and the output of normalized mathematical function 840, the exact normalized value of the sine function at each arc angle, provided the function does not exceed 100%.
For example, in the υη-sca!ed sine wave with no DC offset shown in Figure 34D, the multiplier A = 0,5 and B ~ 0 so that the output of normalized mathematical function 840 is ί0.5 ίη(Φ)+1) + 0] having values ranging from 0% to 100% with an a erage value of 50%, In the case of an attenuated sine wave with a scaled amplitude A ~ 0,25 and no DC offset B - 0 as shown in graph 750 of Figure 35A, the output of normalized mathematical function 840 is [0.25· sin( ) +1} + 0] and ranges from 0% to 50% with an average value of 25%, in the case of an attenuated sine wave with a DC offset as shown in graph 750 of Figure 35B, A - 0,25 and B - 0.25, the output of normalized mathematical function 840 is [0.25«(sln(<t»)+l} + 0.25] having values ranging from 25% to 75% with an average value of 50%. in the example shown in graph 770 of Figure 35C illustrating a highly attenuated sine wave with a large DC offset, A = 0.1.0 and B = 0.60, whereby the output of
normalized mathematical function 840 is given by [0,i 0»(sin(4>)+l) + 0.60] with values ranging from 60% to 80% and an average value of 70%.
in the event that the calculated value of normalized mathematical function 840 exceeds 100%, e.g. f"(A«sin(<I>) + t) + B] > 100%, then the output of
mathematical function 840 is pinned at a 100%, the maximum value of the function. in such cases the top portion of the waveform will "clipped" at a maximum value of 100%, and the resulting waveform distortion will likely produce unwarranted harmonics and spectral contamination. For stimulating healing in phototherapy where spectra! control and the prevention of unwanted harmonics is important, the preferred LED excitation pattern is a distortion free sinusoidal waveform with even harmonics, in other cases such as piiotodynamic therapy, ie. using photons to excite or chemically activate a chemical compound or pharmaceutical, or in efforts to target cellular destruction of bacteria or viruses, other waveforms may also be beneficial. The mathematical operation performed by normalized mathematical function 840 may therefore represent any time varying and preferably cyclical, function and is not limited to sinusoids. Regardless of the function, it is convenient to scale the analog output of this operation to "exact values" ranging between 0% to 100%, i.e. normalized data. While normalization is not actually required, limiting the data range by scaling and normalizatio to a range of 0% to 100% makes
subsequent data processing of the analog table 844 more convenient in avoiding signals greater than the input range of any subsequent mathematical operations.
The term '"'"exact values" for the purposes of this disclosure means greater accuracy than the LSB, i.e. the least significant bit of the digitization process in subsequent steps of the pattern generating process. The resulting output includes an analog duty factor ranging from 0% to 100%. in the event that the sinusoid has
10 X an attenuated amplitude A<50%, e.g. A ~ 25%, results in an output that is limited to a range of duty factors less than full scale.
Referring again to Figure 41, analog sine table 844 is then inputted into an analog-to-digital converter 841, wherein each percentage value of the function (A«sm(4>) + 1) + B is converted into a equivalent digital duty factor to later he used in a PWM counter to generate sinusoids. The conversion process is chosen to match the bit resolution of the intended PWM counter. For example, in digitizing the analog output of normalized mathematical function 840 using 8-bit conversion for use in an 8-bit counter, the duty factor is a digitized value or count ranging from 0 to 255 in decimal format shown in digitized sine table 845. The data may also be represented by a hexadecimal equivalent of this count ranging from 00 to FF, but in actual use, the PWM counter operates digitally using base- 2 Boolean logic. The process of digitization naturally rounds the exact analog value to its nearest digital equivalent value, the PWM count with an analog value closest to the original analog value input to analog-to-dfgltaS converter 841.
The decimal equivalent of the analog value stored in a nalog sine table 844 is then loaded into PWM counter emulator 842 to generate the quantized output "synthesized duty factor" a key component of pattern table 846 used to synthesize sinusoids in real time. The synth dut factor column in pattern table 846 represents the analog synthesized value closest to the original exact value in analog sine table 844, the small different being the digitization error resulting by the conversion process of analog-to-digital converter 841. This error can be reviewed when creating pattern table 846 to determine if the agreement with the original is acceptable. If not, a higher bit resolution may be used with the caveat that the maximum frequency of the synthesized sinusoid may be reduced by employing higher resolution data conversion. While the decimal equivalent of the duty factor is used to drive the PWM counter controlling LED drive, the analog value in pattern table 846 is useful to drive display graphics,
While the algorithmic process to generate a pattern file shown in Figure 41 can be performed in real time "on the fly" or in advance, it is beneficial to perform the process in advance for commonly used frequencies and to store the collection of pattern fi!es in a "pattern library" for convenient access during normal machine operation in phototherapy treatments,
i n the same manner, chords of two or more sinusoids can be generated in real time or made in advance and stored in the pattern library as shown in the algorithm of Figure 42A. In this process the time interval table is generated from the input conditions for both sinusoid A having frequency fsymhA and sinusoid B having frequency syrithE. The number of time interva ls and hence the gradation of arc angle Φ must be chosen to meet the minimum acceptable number of intervals on the higher frequency sinusoid. To add the amplitudes of different frequency sinusoids the two sine waves should have the same time scale. As a consequence, the lower frequency sine wave will be oversampied such as the one shown in Figure 37A, having a greater num ber of time intervals and a finer gradation of arc angles Φ than is required for synthesis with high fidelity. Bach time-interval table is then converted into exact values of magnitude G(4 ) using normalized mathematical functions 850a and 850b and outpu in their corresponding analog sine tables (not shown] whereby
Figure imgf000104_0001
(½(Φ) =[Α·(δίη(Φ) + 1) + 8]B
corresponding to two sine waves of differing frequencies,
These amplitude values are then scaled by scalar multipliers 851a and 851b CA and Cs, After scaling, the magnitudes are added arithmetically together with any DC offset CDC using arithmetic logic unit (ALU) 851 or equivalent programs to facilitate a weighted-sum addition of the componen analog waveform data outputted from the normalized mathematical function generators 8S0a and 850b. The weighted average of these waveforms in ALU 852 is given by
Weighted Average - {€·>· ΟΑ Φ) + Cs* 0Β(Φ) + CDC }/(CA+ CB + CDC)
In the event that CA = CB = 1 and CDC = 0, then the Weighted Average = {ΟΑ(Φ} + 0Β(Φ)}/2 and the output is the average of the two values. In the case of a weighted average, e.g. where CA - 2 and CB = 1, sinusoid A contributes twice as much to the chord as sinusoid B does, in which case
Weighted Average - {2GA(4>} + 0Β(Φ)}/3 if a DC offset comprising a quarter of the maximum amplitude is added the signal, the above equatio becomes
Weighted Average = (20Α( ) + ΟΒ(Φ} + ij/4
After mixing, the output of ALU 852 is then digitized using analog-to-digital converter 853, resulting in the signal magnitude represented by a digitai code used to control the on-time of a PWM counter. To complete the chord pattern table 855, the digital code is converted by PWM counter emulator 854 back into an analog value representing the duty factor. The only error introduced by this process is the single digitization error that occurs from rounding the weighted average output of ALU 852.
Because numerical errors are introduced only once, i.e. when generating the chord pattern file, the algorithm of Figure 42A offers superior accuracy. This accuracy is especially beneficial when synthesizing complex pattern files for inclusion in a pattern library and used later for subsequent playback. One disadvantage of the algorithm is complexity introduced by numerical weighted averaging of multiple analog values and requiring subsequent digitization, making it less amenable to real time synthesis of chords than purely digital signal
reconstruction methods.
An alternative approach using purel digital reconstruction to create chords, shown in Figure 42B, utilizes the algorithm described in Figure 41 to generate individual sinusoidal pattern files using normalized mathematical function A 860a and analog~to-digitaS conversion 861a to create sinusoid A pattern table 862a and similarly using normalized mathematical function B 860b and analog-to-digital conversion 861b to create sinusoid B pattern file 862b. These individual pattern tables can be saved i digitai form in the pattern library and used later for generating chords.
As shown in Figure 42B, to generate a chord, the individual sinusoid pattern tables 862a and 862b are scaled, i.e. multiplied digitally by EA digital multiplier 860a and EB digital multiplier 860b respectively. These scaled files are then added digitally to the digital EDC DC offset 863c and added using Boolean algebra in ALU 864, whose output is converted into a synthesis chord pattern by PWM counter emulator 854. Alternatively, the data can be fed directly into a PWM counter to provide rea 1 time control of LE Ds.
One complexity of digital chord synthesis is creating files wherein the mathematical function of the composite waveform is continuous in amplitude and in slope, i.e. in its 1st derivative, from the end of one pattern and the beginning of the next pattern. This goat is most easily addressed by sinusoids having composite frequencies that are integral multiples of one another, i.e. where β is an integer, as illustrated in the examples of Figure 43. in all the examples, the lower freq ency sinusoid 870 is com ined with higher frequency sinusoids 872, 873, 874, 875, 876 and 878 representing higher frequencies that are integral β muitipies of the frequency of sinusoid 870, specifically where β equals 2, 3, , 5, 6, and 8,
respectively.
Because the frequencies of the sinusoids 872, 873, 874, 875, 876 and 878 are integral multiples of the frequency of the sinusoid 870, each of the sinusoids begins and ends at the same value, namely D - 50.2%. The reason the dut factor is 50.2% rather than 50% is an artifact of the digitization process. Even through the PWM counter has 256 levels including 0 volts for a zero code, the number of maximum intervals is 255 steps, i.e. that 255 represents 100%. So code 128 is not exactly half of 255 steps, but instead is 128/255 ~ 50,2%
As such, a chord comprising any mix of these two component frequencies will have the same amplitude at the beginning and end of the synthesized pattern and when repeated sequentially will form, a piecewise continuous waveform in amplitude and in its 1st derivative function. In accordance with the prior discussions of even harmonic and their importance in phototherapy efficacy, even m ultiple sinusoids 872, 874, 876 and 878 are preferred. The sinusoids 872, 874, and 878, specifically being: multiples of two of the frequency of sinusoid 870, represent octaves of the fundamental,
i n the event that component frequencies of a chord have a ratio that is non- integral., using a pattern comprising a single cycle of the lower fundamental frequency will not. achieve a continuous function across repeated patterns. Any discontinuity across repeated patterns causes a sudden jump in LED current and results in unwanted harmonics, harmonics present constantly because of repeated sequencing of a single pattern for durations ranging from 3 to over 20 minutes.
One simple solution to overcoming discontinuities in fractional values of β > 1 is to employ more than one cycle of the lower fundamental frequency ¾-πΛ2 - 1 Tsynth2 to define the total period of the pattern pTsymha. The minimum number of required cycles can be determined by converting the decimal ratio into a fraction with the lowest common denominator. This lowest common denominator defines the numbe of cycles of the lower f equency fundamental in the pattern while the numerator defines the nu mfoer of the complete cycles of the higher frequency.
For example in the topmost graphic example in Figure 44 labeled β = 1.5 = 3/2, two sinusoids having a frequency ratio of 1.5 or fractionally as 3 /2 comprises two-cycles of lower frequency sinusoid fSynt 2 shown by curve 880 and three-cycles of high frequency sinusoid sym-hi shown by curve 881 having the same start and end values. Because the component sinusoids start and end with the same value, any chord combining the two will also be continuous in magnitude and in its slope, i.e. its 1st derivative, across repeated patterns. While the pattern may also be stored comprising an integer multiple of this fraction, e.g. 6/4, 12/8, or 24/16, the data sets are substantially larger without adding any additional information or improving resolution, Patterns comprising scalar multiples of lowest-common-denominator based fractions are therefore only beneficial in matching other patterns in a pattern library having the same total pattern duration and not for their fidelity or harmonic content
Fractions comprisi ng the lowest-common-denominator are applicable for any frequency where the total pattern duration and underlying data file is manageable. For example, the bottommost graphic example in Figure 44 labeled β = 2.33333 = 7/3 comprises two sinusoids having a frequency ratio of 2,33333 or fractionally as 7/3. In this example, the component of the chords comprise three- cycles of lower frequency sinusoid i s^ shown by curve 882 and seven-cycles of high-frequency sinusoid fk¾th i shown by curve 883 having the same start and end values. Because the component sinusoids start and end with the same value, any chord combining the two will also be continuous in magnitude and in slope, i.e. i its 1st derivative, across repeated patterns. Because more cycles are required to construct a repeating pattern maintaining continuity throughout than in the example of where 8 - 1.5, the data file of such a pattern is naturally larger and longer. Whi!e even long duration patterns have manageable file sizes, they are less flexible In forming new combinations.
Another means to reduce file size and pattern length is to utilize the principal of mirror phase symmetry. For example, in the topmost waveform in Figure 45 labeled β - 11,5 a single-cycle of lower frequency sinusoid of period TSy»ft>2 is combined with sinusoid 886 having a frequency 11.5 times higher. Sinusoi d 886 is one half a cycle short of being 12 full sinusoidal cycles, as shown by missing piece 887. Even though both sine waves have the same amplitude at the beginning and end of the pattern, the slope of sinusoid 886 is negative at the end of the pattern, meaning the function is positive and declining in magnitude at the end of the pattern. Repeating the pattern will result in two positive "humps" in the sine wave producing an unwanted higher harmonic spectral component.
Rather than doubling the length of the pattern to its lowest common denominator fraction β = 23/2 to avoid this issue, another option is to numerically synthesize a mirror phase pattern. This inventive method as disclosed herein is shown in the bottommost graphs of Figure 45 whereby fundamental sine wave 885 remains the same in both normal phase and mirror phase patterns, while higher frequency sinusoid 886 shown in the normai phase pattern Is inverted to form sinusoid 888 in the mirror phase. The alternating combination of normal phase and mirror phase patterns results in sinusoids continuous in magnitude and in slope, i.e. in its 1st derivative, without the need for storing long inflexible patterns in the pattern library,
in the event that frequencies of irregular fractions are combined, it can be im ractical to find a convenient, fraction for constructing two or more sinusoids of full cycles. For example, Figure 46 illustrates that the frequency of sinusoid 8 1 is not an integral or even fractional multiple of the frequency of fundamental sine wave 890. instead, sinusoid 891 exhibits a gap in amplitude 892 between its value at the start of the pattern and the end. Repeating this pattern will result in a severe discontinuity in amplitude and slope at the transition between the end of one pattern and the beginning of the next pattern. M oreover, because of the non-integral fractional multiple in frequency β = 1.873, even a large number of cycles will not converge on a discontinuity-free transition. One brute-force solution is to employ an interpolated gap fill 894 where sinusoid 891 is modified into curve 893 with a constructed interpolated Sine segment 895, created manually or by some
mathematical means. The shape of interpolated line segment 895 results i no discontinuity in the amplitude of the pattern and minimal discontinuity in the slope. While the edit does create some harmonics, it can be designed using Fourier analysis to minimize an adverse impact of harmonic spectra,
The disclosed apparatus and methods for synthesizing sinusoidal and chord excitation patterns for LED drive in phototherapy systems using digital synthesis were described in the context wherein the reference current used in the LED drive circuitry remained constant throughout the generation of various patterns. Changes in frequency, amplitude and DC offset can all be generated entirely in the digital domain without the use of analog synthesis. Pure digital s nthesis in the context of this application means the use of PWM synthesis not including PCM audio methods. In contrast, because it employs digital-to-anaSog conversion outputting a time- varying analog output, pulse coded modulation is considered herein as analog synthesis. Previous sections of this disclosure also described a range of options for generating LED drive using both purely analog and such PCM and other digitized analog synthesis methods. Nothing in this application precludes the combination of using both digital and analog synthesis to generate sinusoids and chords thereof, The discussion of such mixed-mode synthesis is bey ond tiie scope of this application and will not be described further except in the context of using the reference current as a means to adjust the full scale value o f sinusoids generated using digital PWM synthesis. An example of this point is illustrated in Figure 47, wherein the to most waveform illustrates a PWM generated sine wave 903 using pulses 901 of varying pulse width in accordance with the previously disclosed methods. As shown, the reference current cdr f has a value 903a that at time tj increases to a higher current 903b. The result of this change in reference current is illustrated in the bottommost graph of Figure 47 showi ng the LED current resulting from the described synthesis waveforms.
in the interval prior to time ti when the reference current is biased at current 903a, the full scale output current of the LED driver is shown by l ine 905a, After time ti when the reference current is increased to current 903b, the full scale output current of the LED driver correspondingly increases to current level 905a. Since digital synthesis only controls the LE D enable signal of the driver, the actuai current flowing when the LED driver is conducting is set by the reference current value. As a result, prior to time ti the peak-to-peak value of sinusoid 906 ranges from zero to current level 905a while after time ti the peak-to- peak value of sinusoid 907 ranges from zero to current ievei 905b, thereby increasing the magnitude of the output without changing the digital pattern code used in sinusoidal synthesis. At the transition at time ti a discontinuity 908 ma occur, which with capacitance present in the LED drive circuit may appear filtered into transition 909. Since changing the reference current is an infrequent event in phototherapy, the non-repeating transition has no significant impact on the frequency spectrum of the LED drive, Bus Architecture Based Control
Referring to Figure 27A, a distributed LED driver system comprises separate digital synthesizers 203a through 203n independentl controlling the current in multiple channels of LEDs through the enable input of OSFET drivers 215a through 2l5n. Constructed using dedicated counters and latches, these digital synthesizers can operate independently but require a proper sequence of PWM codes to he repeatedly loaded into the counters to synthesize the desired sinusoid. In this regard, collectively digital synthesizers 203 therefore require some centralized control able to uniquel access each digital synthesizer 203a through 203n at high speeds. One such means to implement this kind of control and communication is through a high-speed digital bus.
As described in the previously-cited U.S. Application No, 14/073,371, a bus- controlled LED driver is used to generate programmable square wave pulses. By utilizing the methods disclosed herein, any digital pulse drive circuit used in LED drives may be repurposed for sinusoidal synthesis. For example the circuit of Figure 48 illustrates one such implementation of an LEI) driver including a bus- programmable reference current source 930a comprising a D /A converter 932a, which converts an 8-bit digital word stored in I LED register 931a into an analog current aim quantized into 256 levels. If greater resolution is required a greater number of bits, e.g. 3.2 bits for 4096 quantized levels or 16 bits for 65,536 quantized levels, may be used.
As shown, the data setting the current aU-a may be loaded into the latch of I LED register 931a from a software or firmware program residi ng in a central controller or microprocessor 920 and passed to ILED register 931a through digital communication bus 923. Because more than one channel is generally controlled by the same microcontroller 920 and connected to the same common data bus 923, a decoder 925a is included to detect and store "channel -a" only analog information into digital registers 931a (along with digital synthesis data for registers 927a and 928a }, thereby ignoring data for other channels,
Control of the bus is managed through bus control circuitry 920b contained within microcontroller 920. This information is communicated by a data bus 921 generally using a standardized protocol such as SPI (serial peripheral interface) or other high-speed alternatives to the various ICs connected to the bus. Each iC communicates with the bus through an SPI interface 922 and translates the serial information into serial or parallel data specifically formatted for communication inside the integrated circuit, delivering the information to decoder 925a and other channels through an internai bus 923. Internal bus data structures such as internal bus 923 generally comprise parallel data needing a large number of conductors while system bus protocols such as SPI bus 921 used to connect various Cs together generally comprise high-speed serial data in order to minimize the numbe of connecting wires. The information relayed from microcontroller 920 to SPI interface 922 through SPI bus 921, while it could contain algorithmic information and programs, generally only comprises the operating settings needed to instruct the LED driver IC how to drive the LEDs, e.g. the registe data for data registers 927a, 928a and 930a. These settings may be stored in tabular form in pattern EPROM 920a contained within microcontroller 920, in addition to communicating the digital data for iLED register 931a, the data decoded in decoder 925a loads on-time data into t™ register 927a and phase delay data into register 928a Regardless of how programmable current control is achieved for each specific channel, the independent control of an array of m ultiple strings of LEDs can be achieved by combining or integrating multiple channels of the disclosed LED current driver and controlling them from a central controller or microprocessor,
For example, microcontroller 920 contains within its pattern library 920a the waveform synthesis algorithms executed by the LED driver channel as shown by precision gate bias and control circuit 935a and high-voltage MOSFET 936a. This waveform pattern information generated by microcontroller 920 is relayed from its internal bus interface 920b to one or more LED driver ICs, using the high-speed Pl bus 921. While other digital interfaces may be employed, the SPl bus has become an industry standard in LCD and HDTV backlighting systems, and a common interface for LED driver ICs in large displays (but not in small displays used in handheld electronics). As such, this drive electronics can be repurposed for LED drive in phototherapy, and in accordance with the methods disclosed herein, may be adapted for sinusoidal synthesis despite the fact that such ICs were never intended for such purposes,
Using the SP! protocol, each LED driver 1C has its own unique chip !D code, All data packets broadcast from microcontroller 920 on SPl bus 921 include this unique chip S D in the header of the data stream as an a type of address - an address employed to direct the data to one and onl one LED driver 1C, i.e. the target LED driver 1C, Only data matching a particular chip ID will be processed by the corresponding target LED driver IC even though all drive ICs receive the same data broadcast. The chip ID is typically hardware-programmed for each LED driver IC with one or two pins on the IC. Using a four-state input, where each pin can be either grounded, tied to Viogic, left open, or grounded through a resistor, an multistats analog comparator interprets the analog level and outputs a 2-bit digital code. Using two pins, a 4-bit binar word (i.e., a binary nibble) uniquely identifies one of 42 or 16 chip IDs. Whenever a data broadcast is receded on SPl bus 921 matching the chi I D of any specific LED drive, i.e. the specific iC is "selected", meaning the particular LED driver IC responds to the broadcast instructions and settings. Data broadcasts whose data header do not match a particular LED driver IC's chip ID are ignored, in summary, each LED driver channel comprising a set of "n" channel drive circuits is generally realized as a single integrated circuit with its own unique "chip ID" used to direct instructions from the microcontroiler 920 directly to that specific IC and to the LED drive channels contained within. The same communication from microcontroller 920 is ignored by all other LED drivers made in integrated circuits without the matching eh ip ID,
Within a selected LED driver IC, SPI interface 922 receives the instructions from SPI bus 921 then interprets and distributes this informatio to decoder 925a and other channel decoders through internal digital bus 923, which instructs the individual LEI) driver channels on drive conditions (including channel by channel timing and LED biasing). For high-speed data transmission with a minimal number of interconnections, internal digital bus 923 comprises some combination of serial and parallel communication. Since bus 923 is dedicated and internal to the LED driver of an LED pad, bus 923 may conform to its own defined standards and is not subject to complying with any pre-established protocol.
The digital information from digital bus 923, once decoded by decoder 925a and other channels, is next passed to digital data registers present within each individual LSD driver channel. For clarity of identification, respective elements within a given channel utilize the same Ietter designator as the channel, for example, counter 227 is labeled as 227a In chan el-a and as 227b in channel-b (not shown), These registers may be realized with S-type or D-type flip-flops, static latch circuitry, or SRAM cells known to those skilled in the art
in the particular driver IC shown, the decoded data for each channel includes a 12-bit word defining the channel's on-time ton, a 12-bit word defining the phase delay φ, and a 8-bit word defining the LED current, stored respectively in ton register 927a, φ register 928a, and km register 93 la and corresponding to«, φ and ILEO registers in the other channels (not. sho n). For example the decoded output of decoder 925a comprising the tim> φ, and ILED data for channel-a is loaded into registers 927a, 928a, and 931a, respectively.
As previously described, the on-time t(J» of LED string 940a, along with the signals Ok 0 and Syne on clock line 924 combine to set the LEDs' brightness through the corresponding PW duty factor D, and in waveform synthesis to set the pulsed frequency fsy»th of the synthesized pattern of photo-excitation. While in pulse synthesis the tOT!, φ, and m data loaded in their corresponding registers change infrequently, in sinusoidal sy nthesis they are updated with every Sync pulse to load a new PWM value into counter 929a.
Similarly, the decoded output of decoder 925b (not shown) comprising the too, φ, and ILED data for channe!-b is loaded into its corresponding registers 927b, 928b, and 931 b (not shown) respectively, and the decoded output of decoder 925n comprising the φ, and ILED data for channel-n is ioaded into registers 927n, 928n, and 93 i n respectively (aiso not shown).
These data registers may operate as clocked latches loading data only at predefined times, e.g. whenever a Sync pulse occurs, or may be changed
continuously in real-time. Synchronizing the data loading and execution to a clock pulse is known herein as "synchronous" or "latched" operation while operating the latches and counter where the data can be changed dynamically at any time is referred to as "asynchronous" or "non-latched" operation. Latched operation limits the maximum operating frequency hut exhibits greater noise immunity than asynchronous operation. In this invention disclosure, sinusoidal waveform synthesis performed by LED drive can be realized by either method - using either latched or asynchronous methods, in display applications, however, only latched operation is employed because of an LCD image's severe sensitivity to noise,
In non-latched or asynchronous operation, the data received over SPl bus 921 for channei-a is decoded and immediately loaded into the ton, φ, and km registers 927a, 928a and 93 la and the corresponding registers in the other channels through registers 927n, 928n and 931n in channel-n. Depending on the LED driver IC's implementation, two possible scenarios can occur thereafter, in the first case the count being executed in counter 929a is allowed to complete its operation, before new data is loaded into counter 927a and a new count commences.
By example, in non-latched operation data freshly loaded from decoder 925a into ton, φ, and S LED registers 927a, 928a, and 931a would wait until the ongoing count in counter 929a is completed. After the count is completed the updated data for ton and φ in registers 927a and 928a are loaded into counter 929a and
simultaneously the updated ILED data in register 931a is loaded into D/A converter 932a changing the bias condition on precision gate bias and control circuit 935a. After loading the data, counter 929a commences immediately counting pulses on the Clk Θ line of clock line 924, first by turning off LED string 940a if it was on, then counting the number of pulses in φ register 928a before toggling precision gate bias and control circuit 935a and OSFET 936a back on. After turning LED string 940a back on. counter 929a then counts the number of counts loaded from >n register 927a on Clk 8 line 223b before shutting LED string 940a off again. The counter 929a then waits for another instruction,
In the second alternative for non-latched or asynchronous operation the system behaves exactly the same as the non-latched operation described previously except that whenever an instruction is received via a broadcast on SP1 bus 921, the latch is immediately rewritten and simultaneously restarted. Other than cutting short the ongoing count cycle at the time the register data was rewritten, the operating sequence is identical. Regardless of which asy nchronous method is used, it takes time to broadcast, decode, and commence operation for each and every chaonel on a one-by-one basis, in display applications, the delay in writing new data (and changing an LED string's operating conditions) between the first and last channel of an LCD panel may result in flicker and jitter. As such, asynchronous operation is not a viable option i LCD backlighting. In LED phototherapy, however, where a fixed condition may be maintained for minutes, non-latched operation is a viable option especially for generating higher frequency LED excitation patterns, i.e. fo higher values of f¾<«th.
linlike in asynchronous operation, where data is updated continually, in latched or synchronous operation the LED operating conditions are updated only a predetermined occasions, either synchronized to fixed times, or prescribed events. in latched operation of the circuit shown in Figure 48, whenever the Sync pulse occurs on line 924, the data most recently loaded into toa register 927a and φ register 928a is loaded into counter 929a. Counter 929a then commences counting a number of pulses on the Clk 8 line 924 equal to the number stored in φ register 928b before toggling precision gate bias and control circuit 35a on. After completing the cou n , the counter 927a toggles on precision gate bias and control circuit 935a, biasing the gate of current sink MOSFET 936a to conduct a prescribed amount of current ΪΙΕΌΆ thereby illuminating LED string 940a to a desired level of brightness. Counter 929a su bsequently counts the number of Clk Θ pulses loaded from ton register 927a until the count is complete, and then toggles precision gate bias and control circuit 935a to shut off current MOSFET 936a and terminate illumination. At this point, depending on LED driver IC's design, LED string 940a may remain off f the remainder of the Ts m- period, i.e. until the next Sync pulse appears on clock line 924, or alternatively repeatedl toggle on and off at the value loaded into ton register 927a until the next Sync pulse occurs on line 223a.
In latched systems the Sync pulse serves several purposes. First, it is an instruction to load the data from the on register 927a and the φ register 928a into the programmable digital counter 227a, Second, it is an instruction to reset the counter 929a and commence counting in counter 929a, first to pass a period of time corresponding to the phase dela φ, and then to turn on the LED string 940a for the number of clock counts loaded into the corresponding trm register 927a. Thirdly, it is an instruction to load the value in the km register 93ia into the D/A converter 932a, precisely setting the analog value of current αϊ,-, , Simila r operations are performed in the corresponding counters, D/A converters, and Lm. φ and !LED registers in the other channels. Finally, it prevents noise from overwriting the data in the registers 927a, 928a and 931a midstream jumbling the count
Photother peutic Strategy
Using the described inventions to facilitate sinusoidal synthesis of LED drive and illumination patterns for phoiotherapy applications, phofobiological processes in tissue repair and immune response can be stimulated with a greater degree of precision, control and tissue specificity, free from spectral contamination present in pulsed LED drives. The generation of sinusoidal drive waveforms may be performed using analog synthesis, digitally-controlled analog synthesis (PCM), or by purely digital synthesis methods, preferably using fixed frequency PW techniques. The LED driving waveforms may include a simultaneous mix and/or a programmed sequence of audio-frequency square wave pulses, sine waves, chords of sinusoids, and any other time-varying waveforms such as ramp and triangle waves, filtered audio sources, or combinations thereof
The disclosed methods may be used for driving any wavelength LED or laser diode, including long infrared, near infrared, visible light including deep red, red, blue and violet, as weli as driving near ultra-violet LEDs. Far UV and beyond are excluded because of the detrimental health risks of ionizing radiation.
As disclosed, the methods and apparatus facilitate control of key parameters for phototherapy, namely
» Magnitude of oscillating LED current drive (AC amplitude)
* Frequencies of synthesized sinusoidal oscillations in LED drive
» Magnitude of continuous LED current drive (DC offset)
· Chords of multiple sinusoidal frequencies
The control may be performed dynamically or in prescribed patterns made in advance of their use and stored in pattern libraries. By controlling the above variables without the potential adverse impact of unwanted audio frequency harmonics, particularl of odd harmonic multiples, a strategy consistent with the principles of bioresonance and photobioiogieal time constants can be realized, An example of a phototherapeutic strategy is graphically illustrated in 3D in Figure 49, where the x-axis represents the peak-to-peak amplitude of an oscillatin LED current from 0mA to 30mA, the y-axis represents the constant DC component of the LED current ranging from 0mA to 30mA, and the z-axis represents the AC frequency of sinusoidal oscillations ranging from 0.1Hz (nearly DC] to over lOkt z, The locations of the various physiological structures and conditions, shown by the numerals 960 through 983, HI us irate the areas of possible maximum beneficial effects from particular combinations of the amplitude, sinusoidal frequency and DC component of the current used to illuminate the LED string. The graph illustrates in general terms the prior observation that electron transport 960 can occur at higher frequencies, in the range of kHz and beyond, ionic transport 961 occurs i n tens- to- hundreds of Hertz, and chemical transformations 962 occur in the single-digit Hem range. Also in the single-digit range, albeit specifically at higher DC currents or higher low-frequency AV currents, transient thermal effects are manifest Steady state thermal processes 964 occur at even high DC currents from increased heating at frequencies from 0.1 Hz to DC, i.e. 0Hz.
Also, as show higher magnitude AC is required to stimulate entire organs 967, while lesser current is need to treat patches of tissue 966, and even smaller current to affect concentrated groups of cel ls 965. Using too high of AC ampli tude may actually reduce efficacy by introducing energy at a rate higher than a specific photobiologicai process can absorb or use. Among the treatments shown i an exemplary fashion in Figure 49, muscles 970 and therniotherapy 96 benefit from greater heating and therefore require a higher continuous LED illumination, Le. a greater DC offset
Neurological response such as neural 982 and relaxation 981 benefits from higher frequencies and moderate AC currents with minimal DC offset. Photodynamic therapy 980, where photons are being used to stimulate or activate a photochemical process, or anti-bacterial treatments where energy is attempting to impede normal bacterial metabolism require a combination of high excitation frequencies and high AC LED current Photodynamic therap also benefits from high total light intensity, meaning brighter and hence higher DC currents are better.
At moderate frequencies and AC current levels with little or no DC contents a variet of remedies exist including treatment therapies for circulation and angiogenesis 974, immune system and hormonal stimulation 973 and skin 972, exhibiting treatment mechanisms at both the cellular and tissue level. Lungs 971, heart, kidney, liver, pancreas and other major bodily organs benefit from an increased AC current invoking mechanisms at both the tissue and organ levels. Regardless of whether the specific treatments offer efficacies consistent with the 3D graph as depicted, prior pulsed light experiments with their spectral contamination still reveal a significant influence of pulse frequency and LED brightness of treatment efficacy. Using the analog and digital synthesis methods disclosed herein, the ability of the disclosed apparatus of methods to generate and control the frequency and amplitude o sinusoidal exxitation of LEDs is expected to profoundly improve phototherapy control and efficacy beyond that of any prior art digitally pulsed LED or laser system.

Claims

Claims We claim:
1. A phototherapy process comprising:
providing an LED pad, the LED pad comprising a plurality of light-emitting diodes (LEDs);
positioning the LED pad so as to direct light into a human being or animal; and
varying an intensity of light emitted by the LEDs in accordance with a sinusoidal function.
2, The phototherapy process of Claim 1 wherein the sinusoidal function consists of a single sine wave,
3, The phototherapy process of Claim 2 wherein a frequenc of the single sine wave is less than 20KHz.
4. The phototherap process of Claim 3 wherein the light comprises no frequency less than 20KHz other than the frequenc of the sine wave,
5, The phototherap process of Claim 1 wherein the sinusoidal function comprises a plurality of sine waves,
6, The phototherap process of Claim 5 wherein respective frequencies comprised in the sine wave are all less than 20KHz.
7, The phototherapy process of Claim 6 wherein the light comprises no frequency less than 20 Hz other tha the respective frequencies of the sine waves.
8, A phototherapy system comprising:
an LE D pad comprising a string of LEDs;
a MOSFET connected in series with the string of LEDs; and means for driving a voltage at a gate of the MOSFET in accordance with a sinusoidal function,
9. The phototherapy system of Claim 8 wherei said means for driving comprises a reierence current and means for causing said reierence current to oscillate in accordance with a sinusoidal function.! 0. The phototherapy system of
Claim 9 wherein said means for driving comprises means for comparing said reference current with a current through said MOSFET.
11. The phototherapy system of Claim 10 wherein said means for causing said reference current to oscillate comprises a device selected from the group consisting of an LC oscillator, an RC oscillator, a Wien bridge oscillator and a twin T oscillator.
12, The phototherapy system of Claim 8 wherein said means for driving comprises a digital- to-analog (D/A) converter and a register connected to an input terminal of said D /A converter for delivering numbers representative of values of said sinusoidal function at predetermined times.
13. The phototherapy system of Claim 8 wherein said means for driving comprises an analog mixer for combining component waveforms of said sinusoidai function.
14. A phototherapy system comprising:
an LED pad comprising a string of LEDs;
a MOSFET connected in series with the string of LEDs; and
means for delivering a pulse-width modulated (PWM) signal to a gate of the MOSFET.
15. The phototherapy system of Claim 14 wherein said means for delivering a PWM signal comprises a PWM latch and a PWM counter, and output term tnai of the PWM counter being connected to an input terminal of the PWM latch,
16. The phototherapy system of Claim 15 wherein said means for delivering a PWM signai further comprises a register for holding a number representative of an on-time of th e MOSFET, the register being connected to the PWM counter.
17. The phototherapy system of Claim 16 wherein said means for delivering a PWM signal further comprises a timing source and clock generator circuit having an fsy output terminal connected to the PWM latch and the PWM counter and an ffj output terminal connected to the PWM counter.
18. The phototherapy system of Claim 17 wherein the timing source and clock generator circuit comprises a ! t counter, the i¾ output terminal being connected to an input terminal of the ' counter, the fsya- output terminal being connected to an output terminal of the T s nc counter.
19, The phototherapy system of Claim 14 wherein wherein said means for delivering a PVVM signal comprises a counter, a register for holding a number representative of an on-time of the MOSFET and a φ register for holding a number representative on an off-time of the 'OSFET, an output terminal of the tm register being connected to a first input terminal of the counter, an output terminal of the register being connected to a second input terminal of the counter,
20. The phototherapy system of Claim 15 wherein wherein said means for delivering a PVVM signal further comprises an SLED register for holding a number representative of the current in the MOSFET and a D/A converter, a output terminal of the Ιιν.ν. register being connected to an input termi nai of the D/A converter.
PCT/US2015/015547 2014-02-14 2015-02-12 Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy WO2015123379A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201580019372.1A CN106687175B (en) 2014-02-14 2015-02-12 Sinusoidally driven phototherapy system for phototherapy
EP15749448.5A EP3104936B1 (en) 2014-02-14 2015-02-12 Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy
RU2016136821A RU2709115C2 (en) 2014-02-14 2015-02-12 Sinusoidal transmission system and phototherapy technique
KR1020167025565A KR102156468B1 (en) 2014-02-14 2015-02-12 Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy
JP2016569560A JP6659587B2 (en) 2014-02-14 2015-02-12 Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201461940209P 2014-02-14 2014-02-14
US61/940,209 2014-02-14
US14/461,147 2014-08-15
US14/461,147 US10328276B2 (en) 2014-02-14 2014-08-15 Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2015123379A1 true WO2015123379A1 (en) 2015-08-20

Family

ID=53797169

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2015/015547 WO2015123379A1 (en) 2014-02-14 2015-02-12 Sinusoidal drive system and method for phototherapy

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (1) US10328276B2 (en)
EP (1) EP3104936B1 (en)
JP (1) JP6659587B2 (en)
KR (1) KR102156468B1 (en)
CN (1) CN106687175B (en)
RU (3) RU2709115C2 (en)
TW (2) TWI704937B (en)
WO (1) WO2015123379A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4321097A1 (en) * 2022-08-12 2024-02-14 Kingfar International Inc. Eeg impedance test circuit, method, and device

Families Citing this family (61)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11109458B2 (en) * 2012-11-08 2021-08-31 Applied Biophotonics Ltd. Phototherapy system with dynamic drive for light-emitting diodes
US9877361B2 (en) * 2012-11-08 2018-01-23 Applied Biophotonics Ltd Phototherapy system and process including dynamic LED driver with programmable waveform
ES2837061T3 (en) * 2014-09-09 2021-06-29 Lumithera Inc Multi-wavelength phototherapy devices for non-invasive treatment of diseased or damaged tissue
JP6516219B2 (en) * 2015-06-24 2019-05-22 公立大学法人名古屋市立大学 Photodynamic therapy light irradiator
JP6542047B2 (en) * 2015-07-03 2019-07-10 キヤノンメディカルシステムズ株式会社 Ultrasonic diagnostic equipment
US12109429B2 (en) 2015-07-28 2024-10-08 Know Bio, Llc Phototherapeutic light for treatment of pathogens
EP3328491A4 (en) 2015-07-28 2019-05-01 PhotonMD, Inc. Systems and methods for phototherapeutic modulation of nitric oxide
TWI592112B (en) * 2015-09-09 2017-07-21 泰金寶電通股份有限公司 Skin care device
US9925390B2 (en) * 2015-09-17 2018-03-27 Ets Technologies, Llc Mobile device case with ultraviolet light sanitizer and light therapy
TWM524784U (en) * 2015-11-05 2016-07-01 Libelle Technology Co Ltd Ultraviolet curing machine for light-cured paint
US10003256B2 (en) * 2015-12-18 2018-06-19 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Systems and methods for controlling a voltage multiplier ladder for optimal efficiency and minimal component stress
US10116232B2 (en) 2015-12-18 2018-10-30 Schlumberger Technology Corporation Collocation of radiation generator components for limited-space devices
US10406379B2 (en) * 2016-05-19 2019-09-10 Nicole Kerstin Sentis Portable rechargeable LED red light cavity healing devices
EP3254636B1 (en) * 2016-06-07 2019-07-24 Braun GmbH Skin treatment device
US11298072B2 (en) * 2016-07-01 2022-04-12 Bostel Technologies, Llc Dermoscopy diagnosis of cancerous lesions utilizing dual deep learning algorithms via visual and audio (sonification) outputs
US9666307B1 (en) * 2016-09-14 2017-05-30 Micron Technology, Inc. Apparatuses and methods for flexible fuse transmission
US20180360665A1 (en) * 2017-06-15 2018-12-20 InLightened Partners IP, LLC Disposable wound bandage with adhesive for administering light therapy
TWI640777B (en) * 2017-08-04 2018-11-11 錞鐿科技股份有限公司 Electric meter apparatus with light-blinking function
JP6900832B2 (en) * 2017-08-09 2021-07-07 富士電機株式会社 Dimmer and power converter
US10381103B2 (en) 2017-08-18 2019-08-13 Micron Technology, Inc. Apparatuses and methods for latching redundancy repair addresses to avoid address bits overwritten at a repair block
US10443531B2 (en) 2017-08-18 2019-10-15 Micron Technology, Inc. Apparatuses and methods for storing redundancy repair information for memories
US11723579B2 (en) 2017-09-19 2023-08-15 Neuroenhancement Lab, LLC Method and apparatus for neuroenhancement
KR102543063B1 (en) * 2017-11-28 2023-06-14 삼성전자주식회사 Capacitor-less voltage regulator and semiconductor device including the same
US11717686B2 (en) 2017-12-04 2023-08-08 Neuroenhancement Lab, LLC Method and apparatus for neuroenhancement to facilitate learning and performance
US11478603B2 (en) 2017-12-31 2022-10-25 Neuroenhancement Lab, LLC Method and apparatus for neuroenhancement to enhance emotional response
US10827580B2 (en) 2018-01-11 2020-11-03 EcoSense Lighting, Inc. Two-channel tunable lighting systems with controllable equivalent melanopic lux and correlated color temperature outputs
WO2019140327A2 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-07-18 Ecosense Lighting Inc. Display lighting systems with circadian effects
WO2019140309A1 (en) 2018-01-11 2019-07-18 Ecosense Lighting Inc. Switchable systems for white light with high color rendering and biological effects
ES2788140B2 (en) * 2018-04-06 2023-03-24 Applied Biophotonics Ltd DISTRIBUTED PHOTOBIOMODULATION THERAPY, SYSTEM AND METHOD
US11364361B2 (en) 2018-04-20 2022-06-21 Neuroenhancement Lab, LLC System and method for inducing sleep by transplanting mental states
CN108814935B (en) * 2018-04-20 2021-01-05 史琳 System is diagnose to rhythm's disease
KR102037133B1 (en) * 2018-04-23 2019-11-26 곽동률 Health care apparatus and method for operating the same
US11452839B2 (en) 2018-09-14 2022-09-27 Neuroenhancement Lab, LLC System and method of improving sleep
US20220001200A1 (en) 2018-11-08 2022-01-06 Ecosense Lighting Inc. Switchable bioactive lighting
WO2020097579A1 (en) * 2018-11-08 2020-05-14 Ecosense Lighting Inc. Display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
KR102135544B1 (en) 2018-12-10 2020-07-20 (주)지 메디 Air cleaner
US10548190B1 (en) * 2019-04-25 2020-01-28 Microsoft Technology Licensing, Llc Negative voltage rail
US11786694B2 (en) 2019-05-24 2023-10-17 NeuroLight, Inc. Device, method, and app for facilitating sleep
US10709347B1 (en) * 2019-06-10 2020-07-14 Vektor Medical, Inc. Heart graphic display system
US11825575B2 (en) * 2019-09-12 2023-11-21 Microchip Technology Incorporated Pulse-width modulation and arbitration for contextual and uniform LED illumination in USB applications
US11076462B2 (en) * 2019-10-23 2021-07-27 Toshiba Global Commerce Solutions Holdings Corporation Remote counting of serially connected components using a controller
WO2021092570A1 (en) * 2019-11-08 2021-05-14 EcoSense Lighting, Inc. Dynamic display lighting systems with bioactive lighting
JP2021084074A (en) * 2019-11-28 2021-06-03 太陽誘電株式会社 Driving apparatus, vibration generating apparatus, electronic apparatus, and driving method
FR3104449B1 (en) * 2019-12-12 2021-12-24 Commissariat Energie Atomique Illumination device implantable in a living being
US11387624B2 (en) 2020-02-04 2022-07-12 Analog Devices International Unlimited Company Resonant laser driver
US20210275827A1 (en) * 2020-03-07 2021-09-09 Reversal Solutions, Inc. Systems and methodologies for treating or preventing psychiatric disorders, brain trauma, and addiction or dependence by light therapy with modulated frequency
US12011611B2 (en) 2020-03-19 2024-06-18 Know Bio, Llc Illumination devices for inducing biological effects
US11986666B2 (en) 2020-03-19 2024-05-21 Know Bio, Llc Illumination devices for inducing biological effects
US11147984B2 (en) 2020-03-19 2021-10-19 Know Bio, Llc Illumination devices for inducing biological effects
US11229804B1 (en) * 2020-04-06 2022-01-25 Aeth-Illume Inc. Light therapy system and methods of using same
KR102472861B1 (en) 2020-11-09 2022-12-02 (주)지 메디 Apparatus for cleaning air
EP4264354A1 (en) * 2020-12-16 2023-10-25 Xiant Technologies, Inc. Pulsed lighting network facility
TWI803377B (en) * 2020-12-23 2023-05-21 臺北醫學大學 Phototherapy device for blood vessel imaging and restoration treatment
TWI767471B (en) * 2020-12-23 2022-06-11 臺北醫學大學 Phototherapy device for vascular imaging and repair treatment
US12115384B2 (en) 2021-03-15 2024-10-15 Know Bio, Llc Devices and methods for illuminating tissue to induce biological effects
US11654294B2 (en) 2021-03-15 2023-05-23 Know Bio, Llc Intranasal illumination devices
KR102390193B1 (en) * 2021-04-20 2022-04-25 한국광기술원 Light Output Apparatus that Outputs an Optical Signal Modulated to Audio Signal
US11917737B2 (en) 2021-08-02 2024-02-27 Bio-Rad Laboratories, Inc. Circuit for sharing current between parallel LEDs or parallel strings of LEDs
US20230126680A1 (en) * 2021-10-21 2023-04-27 Optoceutics ApS Modulation of the theta-gamma neural code with controlled light therapeutics
US12015413B2 (en) 2022-09-15 2024-06-18 Apple Inc. Coding for pulse amplitude modulation with an odd number of output levels
WO2024092197A1 (en) * 2022-10-28 2024-05-02 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Wide-range switched-mode power amplifier architecture

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995007731A1 (en) * 1993-09-13 1995-03-23 Efos Canada Inc. A portable light emitting apparatus with a semiconductor emitter array
US20050245998A1 (en) * 2004-04-30 2005-11-03 Led Healing Light, Llc Hand held pulse laser for therapeutic use
WO2013102183A1 (en) * 2011-12-31 2013-07-04 Williams Donald V Driver for arrays of lighting elements

Family Cites Families (34)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
IL84367A (en) 1987-11-04 1994-02-27 Amcor Ltd Apparatus for use in radiation therapy
US5409445A (en) * 1992-05-05 1995-04-25 Rubins; Tye Brain wave synchronizer
RU2116089C1 (en) 1996-11-19 1998-07-27 Государственное научно-производственное предприятие "НИИПП" Method for treating biological objects
JPH11192315A (en) 1997-10-28 1999-07-21 Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Hyperthermia equipment
US6049471A (en) * 1998-02-11 2000-04-11 Powerdsine Ltd. Controller for pulse width modulation circuit using AC sine wave from DC input signal
DE19912992A1 (en) * 1999-03-23 2000-09-28 Romberg Hans Laser irradiation method for medical or cosmetic purposes, or for use on animals, plants or cell culture; involves using laser diode, with pulse characteristics varied to alter effective illumination
US6395555B1 (en) * 1999-10-14 2002-05-28 David F. Wilson Method and apparatus for determining the effect of a drug on cells
US6586890B2 (en) * 2001-12-05 2003-07-01 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. LED driver circuit with PWM output
US6902296B2 (en) * 2002-06-15 2005-06-07 Searfoss, Iii Robert Lee Nightlight for phototherapy
US20070219604A1 (en) * 2006-03-20 2007-09-20 Palomar Medical Technologies, Inc. Treatment of tissue with radiant energy
US20070213792A1 (en) * 2002-10-07 2007-09-13 Palomar Medical Technologies, Inc. Treatment Of Tissue Volume With Radiant Energy
US7354432B2 (en) * 2003-01-17 2008-04-08 Mcw Research Foundation, Inc. Red to near-infrared photobiomodulation treatment of the visual system in visual system disease or injury
US20100069898A1 (en) * 2003-02-25 2010-03-18 Tria Beauty, Inc. Acne Treatment Method, System and Device
RU2263520C1 (en) * 2004-05-12 2005-11-10 Федеральное государственное унитарное предприятие Омский научно-исследовательский институт приборостроения Physiotherapeutic apparatus
US7645226B2 (en) * 2004-11-12 2010-01-12 Biogenics Ii L.L.C. Relaxation device and method
CN2808194Y (en) * 2005-01-12 2006-08-23 黄祥 Medical health infrared modulating apparatus
US20070129776A1 (en) * 2005-10-20 2007-06-07 Light Sciences Llc External wearable light therapy treatment systems
RU2349355C2 (en) * 2006-11-07 2009-03-20 Андрей Андреевич Ворона Physiotherapeutic device for light-beam therapy
US8236037B2 (en) * 2007-10-24 2012-08-07 Paul Weisbart Scalar laser therapy apparatus
US9071139B2 (en) * 2008-08-19 2015-06-30 Advanced Analogic Technologies Incorporated High current switching converter for LED applications
CN102145203B (en) * 2010-02-10 2015-01-14 赵维平 Hand-held palm electrical pulse therapeutic equipment for treating symptoms of hypertension, hyperglycemia and hyperlipemia
RU101363U1 (en) * 2010-06-28 2011-01-20 Федеральное государственное унитарное предприятие Омский научно-исследовательский институт приборостроения (ФГУП ОНИИП) DEVICE FOR INTEGRATED EXPOSURE TO ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD
US20120143285A1 (en) * 2010-10-07 2012-06-07 Jian Wang Handheld excitation terminal and emf emitter providing dynamic optimization of emission and therapeutic effect and remote therapeutic system
CN102974034A (en) * 2011-09-02 2013-03-20 三维医疗科技江苏股份有限公司 Physiotherapy instrument with pulse-width modulation (PWM) technique used
US8779696B2 (en) * 2011-10-24 2014-07-15 Advanced Analogic Technologies, Inc. Low cost LED driver with improved serial bus
US9288861B2 (en) 2011-12-08 2016-03-15 Advanced Analogic Technologies Incorporated Serial lighting interface with embedded feedback
US9232587B2 (en) 2011-09-30 2016-01-05 Advanced Analogic Technologies, Inc. Low cost LED driver with integral dimming capability
CN104025717B (en) * 2011-11-03 2016-06-22 施耐德电气东南亚(总部)有限公司 Phase-controlled dimming system and method
TW201325651A (en) * 2011-12-30 2013-07-01 Ind Tech Res Inst Phototherapy system
RU2495691C2 (en) * 2012-01-26 2013-10-20 Юлия Викторовна Димитрова Method for prevention of hyperesthesia following ododentical tooth preparation for permanent dental prostheses with preserved pulp vitality
CN202590179U (en) * 2012-04-05 2012-12-12 北京君乐宝医疗设备有限责任公司 Integral mobile physiotherapy apparatus
WO2013190678A1 (en) * 2012-06-21 2013-12-27 株式会社日立製作所 Biological status assessment device and program therefor
US9877361B2 (en) * 2012-11-08 2018-01-23 Applied Biophotonics Ltd Phototherapy system and process including dynamic LED driver with programmable waveform
US9895550B2 (en) 2014-01-23 2018-02-20 Applied Biophotonics Ltd Flexible LED light pad for phototherapy

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995007731A1 (en) * 1993-09-13 1995-03-23 Efos Canada Inc. A portable light emitting apparatus with a semiconductor emitter array
US20050245998A1 (en) * 2004-04-30 2005-11-03 Led Healing Light, Llc Hand held pulse laser for therapeutic use
WO2013102183A1 (en) * 2011-12-31 2013-07-04 Williams Donald V Driver for arrays of lighting elements

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4321097A1 (en) * 2022-08-12 2024-02-14 Kingfar International Inc. Eeg impedance test circuit, method, and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
RU2769423C1 (en) 2022-03-31
TWI633904B (en) 2018-09-01
RU2741471C2 (en) 2021-01-26
TW201907977A (en) 2019-03-01
EP3104936B1 (en) 2019-11-13
RU2709115C2 (en) 2019-12-16
US20150231408A1 (en) 2015-08-20
US10328276B2 (en) 2019-06-25
CN106687175B (en) 2020-01-14
RU2019138168A3 (en) 2020-04-29
CN106687175A (en) 2017-05-17
TWI704937B (en) 2020-09-21
JP2017506569A (en) 2017-03-09
RU2016136821A (en) 2018-03-19
EP3104936A1 (en) 2016-12-21
RU2016136821A3 (en) 2018-09-13
RU2019138168A (en) 2019-12-11
KR102156468B1 (en) 2020-09-16
KR20160135205A (en) 2016-11-25
JP6659587B2 (en) 2020-03-04
EP3104936A4 (en) 2017-11-08
TW201542260A (en) 2015-11-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
RU2769423C1 (en) Sinusoidal transmission system and phototherapy method
US11109458B2 (en) Phototherapy system with dynamic drive for light-emitting diodes
US11006488B2 (en) Phototherapy process including dynamic LED driver with programmable waveform
ES2326161T3 (en) APPLIANCES FOR ELECTROMAGNETIC THERAPY.
Eddington et al. Auditory prostheses research with multiple channel intracochlear stimulation in man
US7744522B2 (en) System for influencing of a biological cellular structure
CN112996559A (en) Distributed photobioregulatory therapy system and method
EP3643359B1 (en) Signal waveform generation device for biological stimulation
JP2021520867A5 (en)
BR112018009912B1 (en) APPLIANCE FOR USE IN THE TREATMENT OF A NEUROLOGICAL DISORDER OF THE AUDITORY SYSTEM
US20190246463A1 (en) Distributed Photobiomodulation Therapy System And Method
US11642547B2 (en) Bioresonance frequency emitting device, system, and method
US20230310792A1 (en) Systems and methodologies for performing brainwave entrainment using nested waveforms
US9931505B1 (en) System and method for promoting immunity of animal or human
WO2024127242A1 (en) A pulsed electromagnetic field apparatus and method for generating frequencies
EP4399947A1 (en) System and method for providing context-based light and/or auditory stimulus experience

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15749448

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2016569560

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20167025565

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2015749448

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2015749448

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2016136821

Country of ref document: RU

Kind code of ref document: A